JP7479675B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

In conventional gaming machines, various presentation means are provided on the game board, and these presentation means are used to increase the interest in the game.
Such presentation means include a movable presentation means (a so-called gimmick) that is operated in a predetermined operating mode (a so-called presentation operation).

In addition, when the movable performance means is powered on, for example, an operation check (so-called initial operation) is performed to operate it in the same manner or in substantially the same manner as the above-mentioned predetermined operating manner.
Furthermore, this operation check is performed when the power is turned on even when the player is playing the game (for example, while a variable display is being displayed) (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-236681 A

However, when a motion check is performed during a variable display, some players may mistake the motion check for a performance action, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to prevent a decline in interest in gaming machines equipped with movable presentation means.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means for supplying power, and a movable body capable of moving between a standby position and a specific position, the main control means being provided with a determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be executed, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to a result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stopping and displaying the special symbol, and the movable body is capable of moving from a stopped state at the standby position toward the specific position, and is capable of stopping at the specific position when it moves to the specific position, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance in which the performance pattern is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special pattern and the performance pattern is stopped in response to the stopped display of the special pattern, and is capable of executing a performance operation in which the movable body is moved from the standby position to the specific position without stopping during the execution of the variable display, and then moved from the specific position to the standby position , while the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display. and thereafter, when power is supplied, an initial operation by the movable body can be executed during execution of a variable display executed after the power is supplied, a moving path by which the movable body moves from the standby position to the specific position in the performance operation of the movable body is the same as a moving path by which the movable body moves from the standby position to the specific position in the initial operation of the movable body, and the number of cycle changes executed until the movable body moves from the standby position to the specific position in the performance operation of the movable body can be made different from the number of cycle changes executed until the movable body moves from the standby position to the specific position in the initial operation of the movable body, the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance starts after the start of the first cycle change in the variable display of the special pattern, the performance pattern is stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing after the end of the last cycle change in the variable display of the special pattern and before the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, and when the execution of the special game is started in a state where the performance pattern is not stopped and displayed at the predetermined timing, it is possible to execute a display corresponding to the special game without going through a stop display period of the performance pattern.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in gaming machines equipped with movable presentation means.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the gaming machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. A figure explaining the details of a low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-determination table. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a setting change process in the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the RWM clear process in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a setting confirmation process in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special diagram special electric control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern memory determination process in the main control board. A diagram showing a performance display data setting process in the main control board. A diagram showing the display information of the information display device in each game area. A diagram showing the main processing of the performance control unit. A diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit. A diagram showing the command analysis process of the performance control unit. A diagram showing the icon change performance decision process of the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for a hold icon, and FIGS. 1B and 1C are diagrams showing examples of change pattern determination tables for the icon. A diagram showing the predictive consecutive performance decision processing of the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead effect production scenario determination table. A figure showing the jackpot preview performance decision process of the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue preview pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a reel preview pattern determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a blackout performance pattern determination table, (c) is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in performance pattern determination table, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a final performance pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a confirmed effect pattern determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process of a general control unit. A diagram showing the initial processing of the reels by the lamp control unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an origin return process of a lamp control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an initial operation process of a lamp control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial operation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a frame role initial operation pattern determination table. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of a case where a recovery abnormality occurs in the sub-display device after power is turned on; A figure showing a specific example of a case where the movable performance device 1 has a recovery abnormality after power is turned on. A figure showing a specific example of a case where the movable performance device 2 has a recovery abnormality after power is turned on. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is turned on. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example in which a recovery abnormality occurs in the sub-display device after power is restored; A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the movable performance device 1 after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the movable performance device 2 after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is restored. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored when the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state and there is pending memory. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example in which power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a modified example in which a recovery abnormality occurs in the sub-display device after power is turned on; A figure showing a specific example of the initial operating mode and required time of the movable performance device 1. A figure showing specific examples of the performance operation modes and required times of the movable performance device 1. A figure showing specific examples of the time required for the initial operation mode and the performance operation mode of the movable performance device 2. A figure showing a specific example of the time required for the initial operation mode and the performance operation mode of the sub-display device. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources during a setting change. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during setting confirmation. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources after clearing the RWM; 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources after confirming settings. A figure showing a specific example of the changing display of special patterns on a special pattern display device. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing examples of display presentations for each presentation mode. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing examples of display presentations for each presentation mode. A figure showing an example of the display of the number of reserved items. This is a timing chart when the variable performance starts from the waiting state for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 73. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 73. This is a timing chart for when a starting win occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 76. This is a timing chart for executing variable effects continuously. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 78. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 78. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 78. This is a timing chart for when the stopping command is not received properly and a variable performance begins. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 82. This is a timing chart for when the normal variable performance ends and the machine waits for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 84. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 84. This is a timing chart for when the end of the normal variation performance is delayed because the stop command cannot be received properly. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 87. This is a timing chart for when the miss normal reach variation presentation ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 89. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 89. This is a timing chart for when a variable performance is executed after a miss SPSP reach performance ends. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 92. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 92. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the icon disappearance effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the icon disappearance effect. A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 97. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a modified example of FIG. 99 . A figure showing an example of the icon and the start lamp's presentation. A figure showing a timing chart for when power is restored after an outage occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 102. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 102. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 102. A figure showing a timing chart for when the start command cannot be received normally during a look-ahead performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 106. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 106. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed. FIG. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 109. A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 111. A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after a variable effect accompanied by a pattern promotion effect or a revival effect has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 113. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 113. A figure showing a timing chart when a fluctuation performance is executed after a miss SPSP reach fluctuation performance has ended. A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 117. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of normal background image data (mode A). A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 120. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 120. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. A figure showing a timing chart (1/2) when a vibration effect occurs in each scene of a variable effect. A figure showing a timing chart (2/2) when a vibration effect occurs in each scene of a variable effect. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 130. A figure showing a timing chart for a specific variable performance pattern. A figure showing a timing chart when a dialogue preview occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing a timing chart when a dialogue preview and a deciding effect occur in a variable effect. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 135. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored, with special patterns being displayed in a changing state. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored, with special patterns being displayed in a changing state. This is a timing chart when a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 139. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 139. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 139. This is a timing chart for when power is restored after an outage occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 143. A figure showing a specific example of command exchange for normal variable performance. A figure showing a specific example of command exchange for a miss SPSP reach change presentation. A figure showing a specific example of command exchange for the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation. A figure showing a specific example of command exchange during a look-ahead zone performance. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an icon is redisplayed after being hidden. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 149. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 149. A figure showing a specific example of the operating state of a pending icon before and after the icon change performance. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing specific examples of the operation state of an icon before and after an icon change performance. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing modified examples of the operation state of an icon before and after the icon change performance.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 3 is a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the play area 5a through this opening 8 and transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls, such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 described below based on the establishment of the awarding conditions, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. In addition, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create a lighting effect by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 is equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 for the game balls slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the ball feed solenoid 11b operates to send the game balls out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3.

In addition, in the central front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see Figure 1 or Figure 2) are arranged side by side and function as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described below.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, a button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lit state in which the effect button 17 emits light in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

In this embodiment, the effect button 17 is vibrated by the button drive device 17b, but if, for example, another operating means (e.g., a effect lever) is provided other than the effect button 17, the effect lever may also be made to vibrate.
Furthermore, the cross key 19 may vibrate.
In addition, instead of the operating means, a decorative member (for example, a character-shaped object) provided in a position where the player can touch it may vibrate.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11, which allows the lending of game balls and the return of storage media such as cards that store the remaining balance. When the lending button 20a on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, a ball lending machine (not shown) installed next to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the remaining balance stored in the storage media and lends out game balls, and when the return button 20b on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage media is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a full tray error in which the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 5) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 5) for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member for launching the game balls, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the launching member, a launching rail that slopes upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper that stops the game ball at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail. The game balls sent to the launch position by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) are launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided on the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always enter are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always enter is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has entered this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding prize value).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (a start winning area for a first special symbol) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding of prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played is granted (special symbol determination information, described later, is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot in), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the winning judgment described below).

The variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is provided with a second starting hole opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-back direction, a second starting hole 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting hole opening/closing member 48, a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) that converts the second starting hole 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting hole 47 to an open state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 backward (winning allowance position).

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47, which is opened during the auxiliary game described below, and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special game determination information described below is stored).

In the right game area to the right of the decorative frame 40, a normal game gate 44 (normal game start area) through which game balls can always pass is provided, and when a game ball that has passed through the normal game gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but the player is given the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) to determine whether or not to execute a winning game (normal game judgment information, described later, is stored).

Below the normal gate 44 is a first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b), and is provided with a first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening detection switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b (see Figure 5) that converts the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Then, during the jackpot game described below, when the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state, when the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the first large prize opening opening opening member 51 or that have reached the first large prize opening 50 enter the first large prize opening 50 and are detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11.

Below the first variable winning section 49, there is a second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the winning hole) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a big win has been determined in the big win determination).

The second variable prize winning section 55 (second variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e), and is provided with a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-back direction, a second large prize winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second large prize winning opening detection switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large prize winning opening 56, and a second large prize winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) that converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position).

When the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 moves backwards during a jackpot game and the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state, a game ball that has flowed down the top surface of the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 or that has reached the second large prize opening 56 enters the second large prize opening 56 and is detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11.

The game balls launched into the left side game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and will enter one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, the game balls will not enter (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) located in the right side game area.

In addition, a game ball launched into the right-side play area flows through the upstream flow path 91a, then down the central flow path 91b (regular gate 44), the left-side flow path 91c, the right-side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the second downstream flow path 91f, etc., and enters one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right-side play area, or flows into the outlet 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-side play area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which are game balls that have won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 5) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is provided a pattern display device consisting of a first special pattern display 60, a second special pattern display 61, and a normal pattern display 62, a reserved display device consisting of a first special pattern reserved display 63, a second special pattern reserved display 64, and a normal pattern reserved display 65, and a main information display 59 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68. This main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and is designed to be dynamically lit.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the passage (entry) of a game ball into the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination corresponds to obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a varying manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting state of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) when each special symbol changes display. When focusing on only one LED, it flashes at a cycle of 256 ms (32 ms on → 224 ms off). When a special symbol is displayed in a static state, the LED lights up in a mode that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot mode, miss mode).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot game (special game) will be played. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to a player who plays a round game in which the big prize openings (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening 56) are converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times (e.g., four times, ten times, etc.) with intervals between them, making it easier for the player to win prize balls.

The maximum number of times the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize openings (balls enter the opening) even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time are reached, one round of play ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of large prize games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player.

The auxiliary game judgment corresponds to obtaining normal game judgment information (random number value for winning judgment, random number value for normal pattern judgment, random number value for normal pattern variation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal game gate 44, and judging whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained normal game judgment information. When the auxiliary game judgment is made, the normal pattern display 62 displays the variation of the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary display of the normal pattern is made to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game judgment that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during the auxiliary game (winning game) are preset, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times the balls can be opened and the maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved items. Note that up to a maximum of four first reserved items can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the second reserved number (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserved items can be stored, the number may be less than or more than four, or no second reserved items may be stored.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (reserved normal symbols) stored when a game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of reserved normal symbols. Note that up to four reserved normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no reserved normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed as static numbers, and if a jackpot is determined to be a miss, a static "-" can be displayed, and during the varying display, the light can be turned off and the "-" can be displayed alternately.

The round number indicator 66 is made up of six LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game) or during a time-limited game state. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special game) and during a time-limited game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be provided in any location, as long as it is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 60, the second special symbol indicator 61, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the round number indicator 66, the right hit indicator 67, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

Inside the play area 5a, there is a sub-information display 80 consisting of a sub-1 change indicator 81, a sub-2 change indicator 82, a sub-1 hold indicator 83, a sub-2 hold indicator 84, a sub-regular change indicator 85, a sub-regular hold indicator 86, and a sub-right hit indicator 87. This sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and is designed to be dynamically lit. Note that the sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator such as the above-mentioned status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that it is set to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary.

The result of the special symbol jackpot determination may be notified by the sub-first variable display 81 or the sub-second variable display 82. In this case, the LED may be lit in the case of a jackpot and turned off in the case of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number) described below, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number) described below, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is turned on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED blinks (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub right-hit indicator 87 is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-hand area of the play area 5a (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special play) and during a time-saving play state, and is turned off in other play states.

A main display device 70 (first image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a sub-display device 71 (second image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display smaller in size and display area than the main display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the main display device 70, a first movable performance device 73 for performing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a second movable performance device 75 for performing action performances is provided at the left part of the performance space 40a.

The main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, a variable effect that accompanies the variable display (pre-variation action, update variation) of the effect symbol 70a that is performed while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, a variable display (update variation) of the special symbol TZ (the so-called fourth symbol) that is performed while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is executed while a jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, the sub-display device 71 can perform a moving effect by moving it using a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while a moving effect is being performed on the main display device 70.

Specifically, the main display device 70 moves (rises and descends) vertically between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the main display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the main display device 70 to perform a moving performance. The main display device 70 may be swung up and down at the standby position (lower position) or performance position (upper position), or may be swung up and down at an intermediate position between the standby position and the performance position. The main display device 71 may be positioned (stayed) at the performance position (upper position) for a predetermined time, or may perform a predetermined performance action (for example, rotation) at the performance position (upper position). The sub-display device 71 (second image display device) may move left and right or forward and backward, or may be configured to perform a moving performance by operating the performance button 17. The sub-display device 71 does not necessarily need to be provided, and a movable performance device (movable prop) that rises and falls may be provided at the position where the sub-display device 71 is provided.

The display section (effective display area) of the main display device 70 (first image display device) is formed with a variable display area for displaying three performance patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and a mode display area showing the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The performance pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and starts to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and stops in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern. The performance pattern 70a may be a pattern showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The performance symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a state that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (miss state, jackpot state). A jackpot state is a combination of the same performance symbols 70a, such as "777" or "555," and a miss state is any other state.

The display of the effect pattern 70a changes in a vertical scroll mode, but it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch on the spot or rotate (spin).

In addition, during the changing display (changing performance) of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the main display device 70 and sub display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

The main display device 70 is formed with a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in the normal game state described below, a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state described below, an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable performance is being executed, a first hold number display area SA for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and a second hold number display area SB for displaying the second hold number (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), a third display section 70B3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display section 70B2 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display section 70B3 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 (fourth area) from the left, and the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 display the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed first, the second display unit 70D2 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed second, the third display unit 70D3 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is sitting or floating on top of this pedestal image.

Specifically, as the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the first reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and when the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased). In other words, a disappearance effect (erasing effect) of the icon is performed.

In addition, as the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the second reserved icons displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and when the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased). Note that the icon may be made to disappear during the display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the main display device 70 displays the changing effect pattern 70a, but the changing effect pattern 70a may be displayed on either the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or on both.

The first movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b perform a predetermined motion while the main display device 70 is executing a variable display of the performance pattern 70a. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having multiple decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being executed.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rises and descends) between a standby position (first position, "A" in FIG. 59, etc. described later) located toward the end (upper) of the main display device 70, a first performance position (second position, "B" in FIG. 59, etc. described later) located toward the center (lower) of the main display device 70, and a second performance position (third position, "C" in FIG. 59, etc. described later) located even closer to the center (lower) of the main display device 70 than the first performance position. The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position that retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a. The first movable member 73a may be swung up and down at the standby position (first position), the first performance position (second position), or the second performance position (third position). Also, instead of swinging the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73b may be swung left and right while the first movable member 73a is in the standby position or in each performance position, so that the first movable member 73a appears to be swinging. Also, the first movable member 73a may be positioned (stayed) at the first performance position (second position) or the second performance position (third position) for a predetermined time, or a predetermined performance action (e.g., rotation) may be performed at the first performance position (second position) or the second performance position (third position).

The second movable performance device 75 is capable of performing a motion performance while the main display device 70 is executing a variable display of the performance pattern 70a. The second movable performance device 75 is also provided with a board lighting device 74 having multiple decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being executed.

Specifically, the second movable performance device 75 is adapted to move between a standby position (first position, "D" in FIG. 61 etc. described later) located toward the end (left) of the main display device 70, and a performance position (second position, "E" in FIG. 61 etc. described later) located toward the center (left) of the main display device 70. Note that the second movable performance device 75 is movable by a second movable performance device drive solenoid (not shown), and unlike the sub-display device 71 and first movable performance device 73 described above, it does not perform a performance action at the performance position or stay at the performance position for a predetermined period of time, but instead performs only a single action of moving from the standby position to the performance position and then moving (returning) from the performance position to the standby position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment etc. and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control board 120, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control board 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc.

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22, covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the display devices (main display device, sub display device) and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value (probability of determining a jackpot) which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode (described later) by operating the setting key, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 113a and 113b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information showing the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 113c and 113d, form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information showing set values and numerical values of the performance information (see Figure 63). Static lighting is used to display set values, and dynamic lighting is used to display performance information.

(Game Board Configuration)
Next, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board surface unit 500 that forms the front side of the game board 5, and a back surface unit 501 that forms the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a play area 5a formed on its surface by the inner rail 35 and outer rail 36 described above, and a play board 500a made of transparent resin with a window that allows visibility to the rear.

Then, inside the play area 5a of the play board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general winning opening 43, general map gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first starting opening 45 (first starting opening detection switch 45a), variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second starting opening opening opening solenoid 48b), first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, first large winning opening opening opening member 51, first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b), second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56, second large winning opening detection switch 56a, second large winning opening opening opening member 57, second large winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b), and sub information display 80 are provided, and outside the play area 5a, a main information display 59 is provided.

In addition, a stamp plate 502, on which a stamp bearing unique identification information for the gaming machine 1 is affixed, is provided at the lower right of the gaming board 500a in a state that allows it to rotate left and right around the left side as an axis, and at each of the four corners of the gaming board 500a, fixing devices 503a are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501.

The fixture 503a located at the bottom right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the stamp plate 502, but is exposed when the right side of the stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated to the left.

The fixing device 503a has an operating section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operating section to the back side of the game board 500a, and an engagement piece provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a. By operating the operating section, the engagement piece changes between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position).

The rear unit 501 has a unit base 501a formed in a recessed chamber with an open front and a window that allows the rear to be seen. Inside the recessed chamber, the sub-display device 71, the first movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), the second movable performance device 75, etc. are provided, and behind the window, the main display device 70 is provided. In addition, a performance control device 130A is provided behind the main display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the performance control device 130A.

At each of the four corners of the unit base 501a, there is a fixed receiving portion 503b that engages with the engaging piece of the fixing device 503a described above to detachably attach the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixing devices 503a are in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the panel unit 500 and the front surface of the back unit 501 are abutted against each other, the engagement pieces of the fixing devices 503a enter the interior of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are rotated to place the engaging pieces in the second state (engaged posture), the engaging pieces engage with the fixed receiving parts 503b, and the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are fixed together. After that, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A, and the certificate plate 502 is closed, completing the installation of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. After that, the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are turned to set the engagement pieces to the first state, and the engagement between the engagement pieces and the fixed receiving parts 503b is released.

In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engagement pieces of the four fasteners 503a retract from the fixed receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the perspective of like-new of the game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment and detachment of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the game board 5 attached to the game board mounting frame 3.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a locking mechanism, and the locking mechanism prevents the board surface unit 500 from being fixed, making it possible to replace (like new) only the board surface unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board surface unit 500, it is recommended to open the glass frame 4 and then perform the removal work described above.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of a game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations), a payout control board 120 that controls the payout of game balls based on the receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110, a presentation control board 130 that controls the presentation related to the game based on the receipt of a presentation control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board 160 that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the presentation control board 130.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to enable bidirectional transmission and reception of commands, while the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to enable unidirectional transmission of commands from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The main control board 110 is equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and a main control unit 110m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports, etc.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general prize opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start opening detection switch 45a, a second start opening detection switch 47a, a second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, a second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b, a magnetic detection sensor 57a, a radio wave detection sensor 58a, Connected to the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, round count display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120, and performance control board 130.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, displays, etc.), control processing for sending and receiving various control commands, and control processing for sending game information to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal board 90.

The "game information" includes a start hole entry signal output each time a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a pattern determination signal output each time the varying display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped, a jackpot signal output throughout the jackpot game, an open signal output throughout the round game (opening of the jackpot entry hole), a time-saving state signal output throughout the time-saving game state described below, and a security signal output when a situation occurs that is problematic (threatening) in terms of the security of the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear, error, etc.).

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b are, in order, a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, a vector table area in which the start address of the timer interrupt processing described below is set, and a HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set.

The game ROM area is arranged in the following order: a game program area in which programs related to the game progress are stored; a first unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored; a game data area in which data related to the game progress is stored; and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored.

The information ROM area is arranged in the following order: an information program area in which programs related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, and an information data area in which data related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is arranged in the following order: a game RWM area used as a work area when executing a game program, and an information RWM area used as a work area when executing an information program.

The game RWM area is arranged in the following order: a game work area used by the game program as a work area; a first unused area that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored; a game stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program; and a second unused area that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored.

The game work area is arranged in the following order: a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum, described below) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses.

The information RWM area is arranged in the following order: an information work area used by information programs as work, an unused area where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored, and an information stack area where information programs can temporarily save data being processed.

The information work area is arranged, in order, with a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error judgments.

The following explains the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as work. Also, when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as work.

However, in processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced.

When processing based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area during processing based on the game program, and then the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program, and the flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after processing based on the information program ends and returns to the game program.

In addition, immediately after the information program starts, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when performing processing based on the information program, and no inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls being paid out from the payout device 95, a payout motor 95b for paying out game balls from the payout device 95, and a ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for sending a command based on the result of the calculation processing to the main control board 110, etc.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit and an input/output port, which are not shown.
The input/output ports of the launch control unit 122 are connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the launch volume 15b, and the launch solenoid 28b.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 by a detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b so that the launch strength corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, thereby launching the game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The performance control board 130 is equipped with a performance control unit 130m that performs overall control of the progress of the performance based on the performance control commands received from the main control board 110, a display control unit 140 that performs control processing of image display and audio output based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light-emitting components (LEDs, etc.) and various driving sources (motors, etc.) based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs calculation processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the performance control unit 130m.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, control processing for sending a performance control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified voice or sound.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that performs general control of image display and audio output based on receiving a performance control command from the performance control unit 130m, an image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 based on receiving a display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on receiving an audio control command from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs calculation processing, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports to which an image control unit 145 (VDP) and an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing such as generating display control commands (display lists) that specify the performance images to be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71 and sending them to the display control unit 140, and generating audio control commands that specify the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b (performance button drive motor, performance button vibration motor), the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, the board lighting device 74, the start port lamp 76, and the sub information display 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub regular map change display 85, sub regular map hold display 86, and sub right-hit display 87).

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the starter lamp 76, the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the board lighting device 74.

The start gate lamp 76 can emit light according to the icon final display mode and change scenario determined in the icon final display mode determination table (Figure 28) and change scenario determination table (Figure 29) described below. For example, if "Scenario 01" in Figure 29 is determined, it will emit "white" when a win is achieved, "white" for the previous change, and "blue" for the current change. In other words, the start gate lamp 76 can emit light in a color linked to the icon (e.g., the current icon, the pending icon), and together with the icon, it can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot.

The icon or reserved icon may become hidden while a variable performance is being performed (for example, while an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance is being performed) (see Figures 96 and 100). As a result, for example, when a color change is being performed on the icon, the player may forget what color it changed to; however, the start gate lamp 76 does not become hidden and difficult to see while a variable performance is being performed (for example, while an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance is being performed), and emits light in the color corresponding to the hidden icon. Therefore, by visually checking the start gate lamp 76, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting what color the hidden icon changed to.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) (corresponding to a power supply supply means). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (occurrence of a power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, and stops outputting the voltage drop detection signal when the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value while the voltage drop detection signal is being output.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the contents stored in the main RAM 110c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout).

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m so that the memory contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage. Backup power may also be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, the states related to the special game judgment (jackpot judgment) are "low probability state" and "high probability state", and the states related to the second start opening opening/closing member 48 of the second start opening 47 are "non-time-saving state" and "time-saving state".

Therefore, in this embodiment, there are provided a "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" which is a low probability state and a non-time-saving state, a "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" which is a low probability state and a time-saving state, and a "high probability time-saving game state (probable variable game state)" which is a high probability state and a time-saving state.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal game state." Also, during a jackpot game, the game state is set to the "normal game state," but since a jackpot game is being played, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is set low at approximately 1/300 in a special game judgment (jackpot judgment) that is made on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, for example, when the setting value (jackpot probability), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, is "1."

In contrast, a "high probability state" refers to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a low probability state, in which the probability of a jackpot is set high at approximately 1/60 when the setting value is "1." The transition from the low probability state to the high probability state occurs after the jackpot game ends.

The "non-time-saving state" refers to a game state in which, in the auxiliary game judgment that is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the probability of winning is set low at 1/256, the average time for the normal symbol variable display is set to approximately 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the event of a win is set to 0.180 seconds.

In contrast, the "time-saving state" refers to a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the probability of winning is set high at 255/256, the average time for the variable display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting hole 47 in the event of a win is set to 6 seconds, thereby reducing the consumption of game balls compared to the non-time-saving state. The transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state takes place after the big win game has ended.

The "time-saving state" is set to be more favorable than the "non-time-saving state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the winning probability, but it may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the winning probability.

The probability of winning in the non-time-saving state is 1/256, but the probability of winning may be set to 0/256 so that no winning is determined. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the non-time-saving state, and the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 47 (win).

Next, we will explain the details of the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" mentioned above with reference to Figure 6.

In conventional gaming machines, transition to a "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is common at (a) and (d) in FIG. 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the conventional (a) and (d), a transition route to a "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is provided.

Specifically, as shown in (b) of FIG. 6, when a predetermined condition is met in the normal game state, it is possible to transition to a "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" without going through a jackpot game.

One example of "the fulfillment of a predetermined condition" is when a specific losing symbol stops. For example, as shown in FIG. 8(b) described below, the special symbols for losing include "special symbol 00" and "special symbol 10", but other special symbols for losing can be provided (for example, "special symbol 11"), and when "special symbol 11" is determined and the "special symbol 11" stops and is displayed, the game transitions from the normal game state to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)".

This makes it possible to attract the player's attention (whether the above-mentioned "special symbol 11" appears or not) when the losing special symbol is displayed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.
In addition, when playing in the normal game state, the game suddenly transitions to a "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)," which can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase the player's interest in the game.

The rate at which a specific losing symbol is determined may be any rate. For example, it may be the same as or close to the probability of determining a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is more difficult to determine than the probability of determining a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is easier to determine.

Another example of "the fulfillment of a predetermined condition" is when the number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been executed from the starting point reaches N times. For example, an area is provided in the main RAM 110c that counts and stores the number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been executed in the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)", and when the number of times counted and stored in that area reaches N times, a transition is made from the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)".

"N times" can be set to any number of times according to the probability of a jackpot being determined for each set value. For example, if the probability of a jackpot being determined to be "1/199", N times can be set to around "500", and if the probability of a jackpot being determined to be "1/319", N times can be set to around "900".

An example of the "starting point" is a state in which the RWM has been cleared (for example, a state in which the processes of steps S19 and S24 in FIG. 13 described below have been performed).
Another example is the end of a "low probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)", that is, the state of (E) in FIG.
Also, for example, although not shown in FIG. 6, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the end of a "high probability time-shortened gaming state (probability variable gaming state)" may be set as the "starting point."

The upper limit number of times for the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is "50" times or "100" times in this embodiment when transition is made at (ii) in Figure 6.
On the other hand, when the transition is made at (b) in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the number of times is "1000".
In other words, the upper limit number of times to enter the "low probability time-saving play state (time-saving play state)" is higher when entering the state by satisfying a specified condition without playing a jackpot game than when entering the state by playing a jackpot game.

This provides players with information to help them decide whether or not to play, and reduces the number of players who play randomly. For example, if N is about 900 times, it is possible to provide relief to players who have not won a jackpot for a long time, which can help prevent players from quitting gaming. The number of N times can be easily known by players through magazines or the Internet.

In addition, when a predetermined condition is met and a transition occurs to a "low-probability time-limited game state (time-limited game state)," the upper limit number of times the "low-probability time-limited game state (time-limited game state)" can be reached is higher than when a transition occurs to a "low-probability time-limited game state (time-limited game state)" via a jackpot game, which makes players more likely to try playing the "low-probability non-time-limited game state (normal game state)," thereby improving the operation of the gaming machine.

Note that "the satisfaction of a specified condition" may mean satisfying only one of the conditions listed in FIG. 6, or all of the conditions, or may mean satisfying conditions other than those listed in FIG. 6.

In addition, the number of rotations up to "N times" may be actively notified. For example, a notification (display) such as "XX rotations left to enter △△ state!" may be made on the main display device 70 or sub display device 71. On the other hand, a suggestion may be made without an active notification. For example, when the number of rotations approaches "N times", a special presentation mode (background, mode) may be used to suggest that "N times" is approaching.

In addition, when the "special symbol 11" in the above example is displayed stopped while the "time-saving game state 1" in FIG. 6 is being controlled, the "time-saving game state 2" may be controlled along with the "time-saving game state 1". In other words, the "special symbol 11" may be determined based on the ball entering the first starting hole 45, or may be determined based on the ball entering the second starting hole 47.

For example, if the remaining number of times that can be played in "time-shortened game state 1" is "2" and "special symbol 11" is displayed in a stopped state, the remaining number of times that can be played in "time-shortened game state 2" may be set to "1000", and in the next game, the remaining number of times that can be played in "time-shortened game state 1" may be "1", and the remaining number of times that can be played in "time-shortened game state 2" may be "999". Then, in the next game, the remaining number of times that can be played in "time-shortened game state 1" may be "0", and the remaining number of times that can be played in "time-shortened game state 2" may be "998", and only "time-shortened game state 2" may be controlled from there.

As a result, even if the "special symbol 11" is determined in the "time-saving game state 1," the player will not incur a loss (a so-called "draw loss"), and furthermore, the player can continue playing in the time-saving game state, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the "special symbol 11" in the above example is displayed as stopped while the "time-shortened game state 1" is being controlled, the "time-shortened game state 2" may not be controlled. For example, when the "special symbol 11" is displayed as stopped when the remaining number of possible plays in the "time-shortened game state 1" is "1", the number of possible plays in the "time-shortened game state 2" may not be set, and the time-shortened game state ("time-shortened game state 1") may be ended in the next play, and the normal game state may be controlled.
This prevents the player from gaining a significant advantage.

In the above example, we have described a case where the "special symbol 11" in the above example is displayed in a stopped state while the "time-saving game state 1" is being controlled. However, a case where the "special symbol 11" in the above example is displayed in a stopped state while the "time-saving game state 2" is being controlled may also be treated in the same way as the above example.

Next, we will explain the details of the various tables stored in main ROM 110b with reference to Figures 7 to 10.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 7(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (sinking) of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 7(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (sinking) of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 7(a) and (b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, the probability state, and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7(a), when the set value is "1" and normal play is in progress, 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "100" to "299" are determined to be "jackpots." Any random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "misses."

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 8(a) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 8(b) is a special symbol determination table for a miss for determining the type of special symbol when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 8(a) and (b), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be stopped, a random number value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols that do not trigger a jackpot game. The special symbol "01" is the special jackpot symbol that triggers the first jackpot game, the special symbol "02" is the special jackpot symbol that triggers the second jackpot game, and the special symbol "11" is the special jackpot symbol that triggers the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", the first large prize winning port 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the first large prize winning port 50 is closed for two seconds in a round game that is executed up to six times. Note that in the round game, if a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the first large prize winning port 50 even before the opening time has elapsed, one round game ends. In addition, after the first jackpot game ends, the game is set to a low probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) until the special pattern variation display is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", the first jackpot opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the opening is closed for 2 seconds in a round game that is played up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the game is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special symbol variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", the second jackpot opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the opening is closed for two seconds in a round game that is played up to four times. After the third jackpot game ends, the game is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special symbol variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of Figures 8(a) to (b), and determines the type of special symbol, the stop special symbol data, and the special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and the random number value for special symbol determination, and transmits the special symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in Figure 8 is that the type of the big win special symbol and the type of the losing special symbol are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. This allows the player to play with confidence without complicating the gameplay.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in Figure 8 is that the selection ratios of various special jackpot symbols and various losing symbols are constant and do not change depending on the setting value. This prevents the player's degree of advantage from changing drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table)
Figure 9(a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the non-time-saving state, and Figure 9(b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special pattern change pattern determination table associates the type of special pattern (starting hole) that performs the change display, the jackpot determination result, the special pattern determination result (stop special pattern data), a random number value for reach determination, the first reserved number (U1) or the second reserved number (U2), a random number value for special pattern change pattern determination, the special pattern change pattern as the determination result, the change time of the special pattern, and a special pattern change pattern designation command that indicates the special pattern change pattern.

Therefore, a "special pattern change pattern" can be said to be something that can specify the type of special pattern, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special pattern, and the change time of the special pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), the random number value for reach determination, the first reserved number (U1) or the second reserved number (U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, and transmits a special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

In addition, as described below, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance involving the variable display of the performance pattern 70a according to the variable pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special pattern determination result, etc.), so the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in Figure 9 lists the performance contents that can be executed in the variable performance for reference.

The effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 9, "normal fluctuation," "shortened fluctuation," "ultra-shortened fluctuation," and "long fluctuation," mean that the three effect patterns 70a fluctuate independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" also means a variation mode (anticipatory performance) that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other performance symbols 70a change. For example, when the combination of three performance symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot, the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbols 70a change in the center area.

Note that "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a sways slightly or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped). On the other hand, a stopped display of the performance pattern 70a refers to a state in which it is completely stopped. Note that a stopped display of the special pattern TZ also refers to a state in which it is completely stopped.

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and this is the reach (first expected performance) with the lowest chance of winning the jackpot.

In addition, "SP Reach" and "Special SP Reach" are super reach effects (second expectation effects) that have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and are executed after a normal reach. For example, the two effect patterns 70a shrink and move to the corners of the main display device 70, and a special reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the main display device 70.

The "SPSP Reach" is a special reach effect (third expected effect) that has a higher chance of winning than the Super Reach, and is executed after the Super Reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the main display device 70, and a more special reach effect than the "SP Reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the main display device 70.

The "full rotation reach" is a reach effect (fourth expected effect) that guarantees a big win, and is executed after a normal reach. For example, the main display device 70 goes black after the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a all move at a slow speed while remaining identical, and a more special reach effect than the "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the main display device 70.

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 9 is that the type of special chart variation pattern that is determined is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

The second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 9 is that the selection ratio of each special chart variation pattern is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

(Pre-judgment table)
Figure 10 (a) is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during the non-time-saving state, and Figure 10 (b) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 10, the advance judgment table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole), the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, the random number value for reach judgment, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment, the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the look-ahead specification command indicating the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" can be said to be something that can identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol change pattern that is planned to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in FIG. 10, and determines the planned special symbol variation pattern based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead command corresponding to the planned special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

(Various storage areas in the main RAM)
11 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing a special chart judgment information storage area in which special chart judgment information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and/or the second starting hole 47 is stored, FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special chart judgment information storage area, FIG. 11(c) is a normal chart judgment information storage area in which normal chart judgment information acquired when a game ball passes through the normal chart gate 44 is stored, and FIG. 11(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal chart judgment information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the special chart determination information storage area is divided into a first special chart determination information reserve memory area in which special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored, a second special chart determination information reserve memory area in which special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored, and a special chart determination information storage area in which special chart determination information during variable display is stored, and the first special chart determination information reserve memory area and the second special chart determination information reserve memory area are each divided into a first memory section to a fourth memory section.

The first memory unit, second memory unit, third memory unit, and fourth memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserved memory area correspond to the first display unit 70B1, second display unit 70B2, third display unit 70B3, and fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, respectively. Also, the first memory unit, second memory unit, third memory unit, and fourth memory unit of the second special pattern reserved memory area correspond to the first display unit 70D1, second display unit 70D2, third display unit 70D3, and fourth display unit 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively.

The number of special pattern judgment information (first reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special pattern judgment information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to these special pattern judgment information will be displayed in the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B. Also, the number of special pattern judgment information (second reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special pattern judgment information becomes the second reserved number (U2), and the number of reserved icons corresponding to these judgment information will be displayed in the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D.

The 0th memory unit, which is the special chart determination information execution memory area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. The icon corresponding to the special chart determination information stored in the 0th memory unit is then displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for determining a jackpot for storing random numbers for determining a jackpot, a random number memory area for determining a special symbol for storing random numbers for determining a special symbol, a random number memory area for determining a reach for a chance for storing random numbers for determining a reach for a chance ...

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest numbered memory section in the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest numbered memory section in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored.

When the start condition for the variable display of the first special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and is referenced to execute the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to be referenced to execute the variable display of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), the normal map judgment information storage area is divided into a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal map gate 44 is stored, and a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map judgment information reserve storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section. Note that the number of normal map reserves is the number of normal map judgment information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the normal map judgment information reserve storage area.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for hit determination for storing random number values for hit determination, a random number memory area for normal pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern determination, and a random number memory area for normal pattern variation pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern variation pattern determination.

When the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and normal map judgment information is acquired, the acquired normal map judgment information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the normal map judgment information reserve memory area in which no normal map judgment information is stored.

When the conditions for starting the display of changes in the normal pattern are met, the 0th memory unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution memory area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the 1st memory unit of the normal pattern determination information reserve memory area, and the information is referenced to execute the display of changes in the normal pattern.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 12. Fig. 12 is a flow chart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, in step S10, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the process includes preparations for starting game control and initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for determining the special symbol and the random number value for determining the reach, and in step S51, updates the initial random number value for determining the jackpot, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the hit, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a determines whether a voltage drop detection signal indicating a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from 24 volts to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160. If a voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if a voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process proceeds to step S54. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a momentary power outage has occurred, in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just a moment, and the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to the payout control board 120 to notify it that the power cutoff process has begun. As a result, the payout control board 120, which has received the power cutoff designation command, sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c to be paid out.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57. If a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the payout number in a payout counter set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described below, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control board 120.

In step S59, the main CPU 110a clears the output port. This initializes the output state of the output port and stops the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids).

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a specified area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform an abnormality determination of the data in the gaming RWM area using the checksum the next time the power is turned on.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access and waits thereafter until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 begins, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of operating power resumes following a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is being performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process will not be executed, so the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 13. Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S12, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S15, sends a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S17 assuming that power has been restored, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time or that power has been restored irregularly.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the gaming RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program). Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process is performed to change (update) the setting value, which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination). The setting change process will be described in detail later. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step S21; if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step S22.

If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that this is the first time the power has been turned on or that the power has been restored irregularly as described above, and the checksum is determined to be abnormal, and processing proceeds to step S22.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that it is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that it is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs an irrecoverable error process (game program). Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to execute an irrecoverable error notification indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Irrecoverable error notification" refers to displaying an irrecoverable error screen ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings") on the main display device 70 to notify the user that an irrecoverable error has occurred, turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, and outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform RWM clearing, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S26.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process (game program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the set value area of the game RWM area) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a. The details of the RWM clear process will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves to step S31. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the main display device 70 when the power is turned on to notify the player that the game control state has been initialized, or turning on the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting from the audio output device 9 a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized.
In addition, when notifying the user that the power has been turned on, instead of displaying the initial screen on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71, a display may be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to notify the user that the RWM area has been cleared.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S30 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during play) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113. The setting confirmation process will be described in detail later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area for when power is restored, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end setting confirmation notifications, etc., and to execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state before the power outage.

A "power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen on the main display device 70 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to notify the player that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from a power outage).

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols on hold, and also performs processing to display the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the main display device 70.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S32, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S33, it starts controlling the progress of the game (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) by allowing all interrupts, and ends this initial setting process.

In other words, from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a pre-start state before game progress control begins, and after the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a playable state in which game progress control is performed.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, making it difficult to change settings, clear the RWM, or confirm settings, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent activity and improve the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, by having more conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation than for the RWM clear operation or the setting check operation, it is possible to increase security for the event in which fraudulent activity is most likely to occur (setting changes), and to effectively prevent fraudulent activity.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including when the backup flag has not been saved), an unrecoverable error process is executed to stop the game from progressing, preventing the gaming machine from performing unexpected operations that cause trouble for gaming facilities and players, and improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power outage may have occurred while the settings were being changed, an unrecoverable error process is executed and game progress is halted even if the checksum is normal. This prevents game play from progressing with a setting value that the gaming facility did not intend, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, when the settings are being changed (in setting change mode) or confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the settings are being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation indicator 68, main display device 70, sub display device 71, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 74, and on the back (rear side) it is possible to know that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

The conditions for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. This increases the number of conditions, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities and further improve the security of the gaming machine.

The power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status. However, after transmitting the power-on command or power restoration command, a game status command indicating the current game status may be transmitted.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but it is also possible to calculate the checksum of the entire RWM area, or to calculate the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area separately, and transition to unrecoverable error processing if either checksum is abnormal.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 is a flow chart showing the setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, it starts outputting a setting change signal (security signal) indicating that a setting change is in progress from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Note that the setting change signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and even after the setting change is completed, it continues to be output for 200 ms before terminating the output.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that a setting change is being made is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED on the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This allows the gaming store staff to know that a setting change is being made by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S19-3, the main CPU 110a sends a setting change command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to carry out processing to execute a setting change notification to notify the user that the setting value is being changed.

A "setting change notification" is a notification in which a setting change screen is displayed on the main display device 70 or sub display device 71 to indicate that the setting value is being changed, or the frame lighting device 10 or board lighting device 74 is fully lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. In addition, a setting change notification sound ("setting change in progress") indicating that the setting is being changed may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game store staff to know that the setting is being changed by checking the main display device 70, sub display device 71, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, or audio output device 9.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a setting value from the setting value area, and in step S19-5, it determines whether the acquired setting value is within the appropriate range (1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value is within the appropriate range, it proceeds to step S19-7, and if it is determined that the setting value is not within the appropriate range, it updates the acquired setting value to "1" in step S19-6.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a displays the setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, the acquired setting value (1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the gaming store staff to check the information display 113 and ascertain the setting value before the change.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from an OFF state to an ON state. If a setting value update operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-9. If a setting value update operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-12.

The main CPU 110a updates the acquired setting value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs a setting value correction process in step S19-10. Specifically, if the acquired setting value is "5", the main CPU 110a performs a process to correct the acquired setting value to "1".

In step S19-11, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, the updated acquired setting value (1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the gaming store staff to know the setting value before it is confirmed by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S19-12. Specifically, it performs processing to initialize the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are to be operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses until the setting change mode ends. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources during the setting change mode will be described later.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the setting value is considered to have been confirmed (setting change mode is terminated) and processing proceeds to step S19-14. If a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the setting value is considered to be updated and processing proceeds to step S19-8.

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a saves the updated acquired setting value in the setting value area, in step S19-15 ends the display of the setting value on the information display 113, and in step S19-16 ends the display on the status confirmation display 68.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) all areas of the game RWM area in the main RAM 110c except for the setting value area. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S19-18, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, it performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. If another security signal is being output from the security signal terminal, it starts outputting the RWM clear signal (security signal) after the output period of the currently output security signal has ended.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting change mode ends with the setting value confirmation operation, and then ends this setting change process.

In this way, even if the setting value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the setting value, which prevents an indefinite value from being set and causing the gaming machine to perform unexpected operations, thereby preventing inconvenience to gaming facilities and players, and making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, when the setting is being changed (in setting change mode), the gaming store staff can know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation indicator 68, main display device 70, sub display device 71, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 74 on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1, and can know that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back (rear side). In other words, it is possible to know whether the setting is being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

In the above description, the setting value confirmation operation is defined as the setting key switch 112a changing from ON to OFF, but it may also be defined as the RWM clear switch 111a changing from OFF to ON, or a dedicated switch changing from OFF to ON, or a signal from the touch sensor 15a may also be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a changes from OFF to ON, or a detection switch (such as the general winning port detection switch 43a) provided at a specific winning port (including the starting port) changes from OFF to ON, or the opening detection switch 31a changing from OFF to ON.

In addition, a setting change command is sent when the setting change process starts, and a power-on command is sent after the setting change process ends, but it is also possible to send a setting change start command instead of the setting change command, and a setting change end command instead of the power-on command. In this case, the setting change end command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or after the setting change process ends.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clear process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing the RWM clear process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear preparation command to the performance control board 130 and transitions to the RWM clear preparation mode. This causes the performance control board to carry out processing to notify the RWM clear preparation.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" is a notification that displays a clear preparation screen on the main display device 70 to notify the user that preparation for RWM clear is in progress, and outputs an audio notification from the audio output device 9 for a specified period of time saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again."

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, it performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are to be operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is ON. If an RWM clear approval operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24-4 to end the RWM clear preparation mode and perform RWM clear; if an RWM clear approval operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S24-2.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c except for the setting value area. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and then ends the current RWM clear processing.

Note that the RWM clear preparation command is sent when the RWM clear process starts, and the power-on command is sent after the RWM clear process ends, but the RWM clear command may be sent instead of the power-on command. In this case, the RWM clear command may be sent at the end of the RWM clear process, or after the RWM clear process ends.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S27-1, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, it starts outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that setting confirmation is in progress from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Note that the setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being confirmed, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, it continues to be output for 200 ms before terminating the output.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status indicator on the status indicator 68 indicating that a setting change is in progress. Specifically, one LED on the status indicator 68 is turned on. This allows the gaming store staff to know that a setting check is in progress by checking the status indicator 68.

In step S27-3, the main CPU 110a sends a setting confirmation command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to execute a setting confirmation notification to notify the user that a setting confirmation is being performed.

A "setting confirmation notification" is a notification in which a setting confirmation screen is displayed on the main display device 70 or sub display device 71 to indicate that the setting is being confirmed, or the frame lighting device 10 or board lighting device 74 is fully lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) during the setting confirmation. In addition, a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming setting values") indicating that the setting is being confirmed may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows the gaming store staff to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the main display device 70, sub display device 71, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, or audio output device 9.

In step S27-4, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (during play) area and displays a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the setting value on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 113. This allows game store staff to know the current setting value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S27-5. Specifically, it performs processing to initialize the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that the main control board 110 will operate as the game progresses until the setting confirmation mode ends. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S27-6 whether or not a confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a confirmation end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28-6, and if a confirmation end operation has not been performed, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

In step S27-7, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting values on the information display 113, and in step S27-8 ends the display on the status confirmation display 68. In step S27-9, as the setting confirmation mode ends due to the confirmation end operation, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operation of the various drive sources, and ends the current setting confirmation processing.

Note that the setting check command is sent when the setting check process starts, and the power recovery command is sent after the setting check process ends. However, it is also possible to send a setting check start command instead of the setting check command, and a setting check end command instead of the power recovery command. In this case, the setting check end command may be sent at the end of the setting check process, or after the setting check process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. In this way, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, making it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine.

In addition, from the start of power supply until the game is ready to play (pre-start state) when game progress control (timer interruption of the main control board 110) is performed, the presence or absence of signal input from input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and setting key switch 112a (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning hole detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start hole detection switch 45a, second start hole detection switch 47a, first large winning hole detection switch 50a, second large winning hole detection switch 56a, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if a game ball enters any of the winning holes (including the start hole), the winning is invalidated and the game ball is not paid out. Also, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, the winning is invalidated, the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 do not display the variation of the special symbol, and the big win game is not executed. Also, even if a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the passage is invalidated, the normal symbol display 62 does not display the variation of the normal symbol, and the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to imagine that a player will play before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, even if a situation occurs in which various errors may occur, no error notification is performed. This makes it possible to avoid performing unnecessary processing before game progress control begins, a situation in which it is difficult to imagine that fraudulent activity will occur, and to reduce the processing load.

In addition, the setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals rather than from a common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt process is executed after the main processing initialization process is completed, by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110, and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and in step S110, it performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric roles.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process (game program) in step S120. Specifically, it updates the random number value for determining a big win, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, it performs a process of updating each random number value and the random number counter by adding +1. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), it resets the random number counter to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the revolution, it sets the corresponding initial random number value as a new initial value for the revolution and updates the random number value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process (game program). Specifically, similar to step S30, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the initial random number value for determining a big win, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing (game program) in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a, and performs processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the large prize hole (first large prize hole 50, second large prize hole 56), and setting the game state. Details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the normal symbol fluctuation, and opening and closing the second starting hole 47 (auxiliary game).

The types of winning and losing normal symbols determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol and normal power control process remain the same regardless of the setting value. This prevents the game from becoming too complicated, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratios of various winning normal symbols and various losing normal symbols, which are determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol/normal power control process, are fixed and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (game program). Specifically, it refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs a process to send a payout number designation command corresponding to the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first start port 45, second start port 47, first large winning port 50, second large winning port 56) to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (game program). Specifically, it determines whether various errors have occurred (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning the second start port 47 when not in auxiliary play or a game ball winning the large winning port when not in special play, an abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls winning the various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which the magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, a radio wave error in which the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time, a door opening error in which the opening detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an operation error in which the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the game progress control is being performed), and performs processing to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify the error.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (game program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to create data such as external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize opening opening/closing data output to the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, special pattern display data output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs port output processing to output signals such as external information data, start gate opening/closing data, and large prize gate opening/closing data created in step S700, display output processing to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and performs processing to send a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when an information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using the CALL command.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to count game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game performance information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be used to understand the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a normal base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, it calculates the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, and performs a process of saving the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place in the first area of the base memory area set in the information RWM area.

The play section is initially updated when the total number of outs during normal play reaches 300, and thereafter is updated whenever the total number of outs during normal play reaches 60,000. The base memory area is provided with a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the normal base values for the four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds. The performance display data setting process will be described in detail later.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

In step S880, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program). Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S870 above.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing for returning to the game program. Specifically, it performs processing to return the flag register from the game RWM area, permit interrupts, and return to the game program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode), timer interrupts are not executed, so the number of payouts and outs are not counted, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, which reduces the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first large prize opening detection switch 50a or the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 50 or the second large prize opening 56, and then performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as a process to obtain and store special game determination information. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as processing to obtain and store special chart determination information.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and performs processing to obtain and store normal play determination information. When this processing ends, the current input control processing ends.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is a flow chart showing the first start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for the 3 prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4. If the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first reserved number (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special symbol storage command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the first special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the main display device 70 displays the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first reserved number (U1).

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the first special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S230-3 in the available storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a non-time-saving state (normal game state). If the game is currently in a non-time-saving state, the process proceeds to step S230-9 to perform pre-reading processing of the special symbol determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45, and if the game is not currently in a non-time-saving state, the process proceeds to step S230-9 to perform pre-reading processing of the special symbol determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45, and ends the current first start hole detection switch input processing.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-determination process). In this first look-ahead process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 10 is referenced, and the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the first special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern).

This "first look-ahead specification command" is information that can identify the planned variation pattern of the special symbol, so the performance control board 130 can also identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, and the type of special symbol by using the first look-ahead specification command.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first pre-reading designation command generated in step S230-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a look-ahead notice (a look-ahead continuous performance, an icon change performance) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more display changes, even before the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead command starts to change.

In addition, the second start hole detection switch input process is also processed in the same way as the first start hole detection switch input process, so the first start hole detection switch 45a, 3 prize ball counter, first reserved number (U1), first special chart determination information reserved memory area, non-time-saving state, first look-ahead process, and first look-ahead designation command can be read as second start hole detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counter, second reserved number (U2), second special chart determination information reserved memory area, time-saving state, second look-ahead process, and second look-ahead designation command.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved number (U1) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reserved information may not be stored by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the first special pattern determination information storage area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reserved memory may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the second special pattern determination information storage area.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special symbol special electric control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, the display of the special symbol changes based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special symbol judgment information) is started, the change time is set, and a special symbol memory judgment process (step S310) is executed to perform processing for sending start commands (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130 and processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "1". Details of the special symbol memory judgment process will be described later.

If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, the display of the special pattern is stopped as the change time elapses, the stop time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set, and special pattern change processing (step S320) is executed to perform processing for sending a stop command (pattern determination command) to the performance control board 130 and processing for changing the special pattern special electric processing data to "2", etc.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, then after the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a jackpot special symbol, the opening time of the jackpot game is set, and a process is executed to send an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "3".

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to perform a process for starting a round game as the opening time of the jackpot game elapses and sending a round designation command to the performance control board 130, a process for setting the ending time of the jackpot game based on the end of the final round game and sending an ending designation command to the performance control board 130, and a process for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "4".

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 4, the jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to end the jackpot game due to the passage of the ending time, a process to set the game state after the jackpot ends (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number of times, number of time-saving times), a process to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "0", etc.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special pattern determination information storage area, shifting the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S319-1.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a updates the first reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first reserved number (U1) and the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted in priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second reserved number is subtracted in priority over the first reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole (the first reserved number and the second reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first reserved number is subtracted in priority over the second reserved number).

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, the special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is compared with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 7 to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred. In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is compared with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8 to perform a process to determine the type of special symbol to be stopped.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a compares the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, with the special pattern change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 to perform a process of determining the special pattern change pattern (change time), which is the change pattern of the special pattern.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S800, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. Note that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbol changing display and special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirement may also include that the normal symbol changing display and auxiliary game are not being executed.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this special symbol memory determination process. This causes the customer waiting state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demo performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 22. Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing the performance display data setting process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c is a display switching value of "0" in order to determine whether the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is to be switched. If the display switching value is "0", the process proceeds to step 850-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 will be switched, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 will not be switched. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is set to the display switching value of "0".

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether a lighting confirmation flag has been saved in the information RWM area to determine whether lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed. If the lighting confirmation flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S850-4 with the intention of displaying the normal base value on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S850-3 with the intention of checking whether the information display 113 is lit. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a determines display data for lighting confirmation to light all segments (including the decimal point) of the four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) that make up the information display 113.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a obtains a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from a base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained; if the data selection counter value is "1", the normal base value saved in the second area of the base storage area is obtained; if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is obtained; and if the data selection counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown) to determine the display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the information display 113 based on the interval counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out count counter, and the obtained normal base value.

In step S850-6, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in the output data area of the information RWM area as display information for the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 described above is referenced, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. The display information of the information display 113 in each play area will be described later.

In step S850-7, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above, and in step S850-8, it determines whether the display switching time counter is greater than an upper limit value (e.g., 5 seconds). If it is not greater than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time to switch the display on the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process moves to step S850-15. If it is greater than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 has elapsed, and in step S850-9, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized).

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned lighting confirmation flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the lighting confirmation flag is present, processing proceeds to step S850-12. If the lighting confirmation flag is not present, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmation flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S850-12, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the data selection counter described above, and in step S85-13, it determines whether the data selection counter is greater than an upper limit (e.g., 3). If it is not greater than the upper limit, it moves to step S850-15, and if it is greater than the upper limit, it clears (initializes) the data selection counter to 0 in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the registers that were saved to the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c during the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S850-16, it restores the game stack pointers that were saved to the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c during the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and ends this performance display data setting process.

In this way, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all segments of the four seven-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed), making it possible to check whether the information display 113 is malfunctioning and which segments are malfunctioning, etc.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence, making it possible to compare the performance information (normal base value) of the most recent four play sections, and to confirm the actual performance of the gaming machine and to grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of the information display in each game area)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to Fig. 23. In the table of display information in Fig. 23, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the current play section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section one period before, "b2.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and "b3.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section three periods before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--", which indicates that no normal base value has been calculated; "00", which indicates that the normal base value is "0" or the normal out count is "0"; "01" to "99", which indicate that the normal out count is "1" or greater and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and "99.", which indicates that the normal base value is "100" or greater. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and it will be displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (it is displayed as a lit light) regardless of the play area or the number of outs during normal play, but the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment changes (it is displayed as a flashing light or a lit light) depending on the play area or the number of outs during normal play (whether or not a calculated normal base value is present, and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth play zones, when displaying the identification information of a play zone in which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, in the second play zone and onwards, when displaying the identification information of the current play zone ("bL."), if the period in which the reliability of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of normal outs is between 0 and 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In all other cases, the identification information will be displayed in a lit manner.

Here, as an example of the display on the information display 113, if the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, the data selection counter value is "0", and the normal base value stored in the first area of the base memory area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 will flash "bL." and the numeric segment will light up and display "35".

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment does not use the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "00" to "99", whereas when the normal base value is "100" or more, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment uses the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "99.", making it easier to know that the normal base value is abnormal.

Also, when the base value is normally less than "10", a "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numeric segment, resulting in a two-digit display (e.g. "01"), making it possible to effectively use the two seven-segment displays as numeric segments and provide an easy-to-understand display.

In addition, when the normal base value for the current play area is displayed, if the number of normal outs for the current play area is between 0 and 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value, the identification information "bL." displayed in the identification segment will flash, making it easier to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is unreliable information.

In addition, if no normal base value has been calculated, a non-numeric "- - " will be displayed in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that no normal base value has been calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment.

In addition, rather than executing the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process as information programs, it is also possible to execute one or two of them as game programs (for example, execute the game ball counting process within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while executing the rest as information programs.

In addition, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program, rather than by the output control process, which is the game program.

In addition, instead of using the out ball detection switch 39a to detect out balls consisting of game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first start hole 45, the second start hole 47, the first large winning hole 50, and the second large winning hole 56, and game balls that have flowed into the out hole 39, the out ball detection switch 39a may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out hole. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs, number of outs during normal play) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, and the second large winning hole detection switch 56a.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flowchart of the main processing in the performance control unit 130m.

First, the sub-CPU 130a disables all interrupts in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting internal registers in step E2, and allows access to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E3.

In step E4, the sub-CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub-RAM 130c, in step E5 it starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step E6 it enables all interrupts.

In step E7, the sub-CPU 130a performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update the various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the performance control unit 130m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters required for the execution of the performance.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to analyze the commands (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols and special games (jackpot games) are not being executed, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether or not the customer waiting time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, and performs processing to execute a customer waiting performance to stimulate the player's desire to play based on the elapse of the customer waiting time.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for executing a jackpot notice performance. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for executing a jackpot notice performance that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot game being played (that gives the player hope that a jackpot game will be played) based on the execution information for the jackpot notice performance that was set in the sub-RAM 130c in the jackpot notice performance determination process described later.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for executing a light-emitting effect when a player wins a prize. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for executing a light-emitting effect when a player wins a prize, which indicates the likelihood of a big win being played (provides the player with the expectation that a big win will be played) based on the execution information for the light-emitting effect when a player wins a prize that was set in the sub-RAM 130c in the light-emitting effect determination process when a player wins a prize, which will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process in step E700. Specifically, it determines whether or not an update condition (change in game state, winning a mode update lottery, execution of a SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss, etc.) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that specifies the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the sound output device 9, main display device 70, sub display device 71, etc., has been met, and if the update condition has been met, it performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of multiple presentation modes.

The "presentation modes" include presentation modes A to C, which are set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), presentation modes D to E, which are set in the probability variable game state (high probability time-saving game state), and presentation mode F, which is set in the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state). Note that the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the normal game state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the settings, clearing the RWM, or checking the settings) is always presentation mode A, the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the probability variable game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode D, and the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the time-saving game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode F.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a restores the registers that were saved to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis process of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302; if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step E302, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change command. If it is a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E303. If it is not a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E304.

In step E303, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in a transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting change notification.

In step E304, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation command. If it is a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E305. If it is not a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E306.

In step E305, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting check notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting check notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting check notification.

In step E306, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power restoration command. If it is a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E307. If it is not a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E308.

In step E307, the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process. Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, the sub-CPU 130a sets a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power restoration command, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a power-on notification or a power restoration notification, and processing for executing an initial operation for operating the first movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), the second movable performance device 75, and the sub-display device 71 in a predetermined manner, an initial light emission for emitting light from the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined manner, etc. are performed.

In step E308, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related command. If it is an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E309. If it is not an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E310.

"Error-related designation commands" include an irrecoverable error designation command, an illegal winning error designation command, an abnormal winning error designation command, a magnetic error designation command, a radio wave error designation command, a door opening error start designation command, a door opening error end designation command, an operation error designation command, a tray full error designation command, and a payout abnormality designation command. The priority order for each error is payout abnormality = tray full error < operation error < door opening error < radio wave error = magnetic error < abnormal winning error = illegal winning error < irrecoverable error.

In step E309, the sub-CPU 130a performs an error notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to execute an error notification (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification, tray full error notification, abnormal payout notification, etc.) according to the type of error specification command received. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. Note that various error notifications are performed using at least one of the following: output of an error sound, error light emission of a lamp, and display of an error image. Specifically, in the tray full error notification, there is no error light emission of the lamp, and in the abnormal payout notification, there is no output of an error sound, but in the other error notifications, output of an error sound, error light emission of a lamp, and display of an error image are all performed.

In step E310, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E312.

In step E311, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game state setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to update the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to a game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage command. If it is a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E313. If it is not a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E314.

In step E313, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved number update process. Specifically, the process updates the reserved number of special drawings stored in the sub-RAM 130c and sets a performance instruction command to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the main display device 70. This causes the performance instruction command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the main display device 70.

In step E314, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a look-ahead command. If it is, the sub-CPU 130a sets the received look-ahead command (special chart planned variation pattern) in a look-ahead memory area of the sub-RAM 130c (described later) and then proceeds to step E315. If it is not, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E318.

The "look-ahead memory area" is divided into a first look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing look-ahead information (such as a planned special chart change pattern) based on a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing pending information based on a second look-ahead designation command, and a memory section (the 0th memory section) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the change display (change performance) currently being executed, and the first look-ahead memory section and the second look-ahead memory section are each divided into the 1st to 4th memory sections.

The first to fourth memory sections of the first look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the first special symbol determination information reservation memory area described above, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the first reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth memory sections of the second look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the second special symbol determination information reservation memory area described above, respectively, and when a second look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the second reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

This memory unit (the 0th memory unit) corresponds to the special pattern determination information execution memory area described above, and when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the first pre-reading memory unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the second pre-reading unit is stored.

In step E315, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect that suggests the expectation (possibility) of a special game being executed by displaying the pending icon or the icon displayed on the main display device 70 in a special display mode (special icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon), and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed. Details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316-A, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the winning light-emitting effect. Specifically, when the game ball enters the starting hole, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to perform a winning light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by lighting up the top lamp 10b located at the top center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 in a special light-emitting mode that is different from the normal light-emitting mode, and the mode of the winning light-emitting effect to be performed.

In step E316-B, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to execute a winning vibration effect, which indicates the likelihood of a special game being played, by driving the button drive device 17b for a predetermined time (e.g., about 1 second) when the game ball enters the starting hole.

In step E317, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of determining the look-ahead continuous performance. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead continuous performance that creates the expectation that a jackpot game will be played (indicates the possibility that a jackpot game will be played) by executing a predetermined performance over the variable display (variable performance) of one or more special symbols, and determines the type of look-ahead continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. The details of the look-ahead continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E319. If it is not a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E320.

In step E319, the sub-CPU 130a performs a pattern data determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the effect patterns to be displayed on the main display device 70 as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the effect patterns to be displayed on a predetermined pay line.

In step E320, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special chart variation pattern designation command. If it is a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E325.

In step E321, the sub-CPU 130a performs a variable performance pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the contents of the received special chart variable pattern designation command, the variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the main display device 70, is determined, and a performance instruction command indicating the variable performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance.

In step E322, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining the jackpot advance notice effect. Specifically, based on the variable effect pattern determined in step E321, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a jackpot advance notice effect that suggests the likelihood of a special game being played (raising the expectation that a jackpot game will be played), determines the presentation mode (pattern) of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed, and sets execution information for the jackpot advance notice effect in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c. Details of the jackpot advance notice effect determination process will be described later.

In step E323, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, and to change the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed.

In step E324, the sub-CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous performance execution process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a performance instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous performance determined in the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in step E317 or for changing the performance mode in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance.

In step E325, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a pattern determination command (stop command). If it is a pattern determination command (stop command), the process proceeds to step E326. If it is not a pattern determination command (stop command), the process proceeds to step E327.

In step E326, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of stopping the effect symbols. Specifically, the process performs a process of setting an effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to stop the display of the effect symbols that are in a temporarily stopped state and end the variable effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process of ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game command. If it is a special game command, the process proceeds to step E328. If it is not a special game command, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process.

"Special game designation commands" include opening designation commands, round designation commands, big win ending designation commands, etc.

In step E328, the sub-CPU 130a performs a special game presentation determination process. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a presentation instruction command for determining an opening presentation for a jackpot game and executing the opening presentation is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of a round designation command, a process is performed in which a presentation instruction command for determining a round presentation for a round game and executing the round presentation is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed in which a presentation instruction command for determining an ending presentation for a jackpot game and executing the ending presentation is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the presentation instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the opening presentation, round presentation, or ending presentation.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E315-3. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E315-7, assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead command will not be performed.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be performed" refers to a period during which a jackpot game is not being played, a non-time-saving state (normal game state) when a first look-ahead command based on a win at the first start port 45 is received, and a time-saving state (high probability game state or time-saving game state) when a second look-ahead command based on a win at the second start port 47 is received.

In step E315-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received look-ahead specification command), that is, whether or not a change scenario has been set in the look-ahead information storage area. If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead specification command will not be executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), and in step E315-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 28) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E315-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 28 and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the type of look-ahead specification command (planned change pattern) and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode. In addition, in this process, when the final icon display mode is determined, the light emission color (final light emission color) of the start exit lamp 76 is determined according to the determined final icon display mode. For example, if the final icon display mode is "red", the light emission color (final light emission color) of the start exit lamp 76 will also be "red".

In step E315-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (either a blue icon, a red icon, or a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a special icon that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 29) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears until it becomes the icon and finally disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved memory number counter. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 29 is referenced, and one change scenario is determined from among multiple change scenarios based on the icon final display mode, the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. When a change scenario is determined in this process, the change mode of the light color of the starter lamp 76 is determined according to the determined change scenario. For example, if "Scenario 01" in FIG. 29 is determined, it will emit "white" when a win is won, emit "white" one change before, and emit "blue" when the change occurs.

In step E315-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is first displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for this winning icon (and the start port lamp illumination command) in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change presentation determination process.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), the start gate lamp 76 lights up in a display mode (e.g., blue, red) corresponding to the start gate lamp illumination command, and a predetermined sound effect (a first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and a second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending memory number counter.

In step E315-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends this icon change presentation determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), the start gate lamp 76 lights up in a display mode (e.g., white) corresponding to the start gate lamp illumination command, and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, an icon change effect (pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but an icon change effect may be executed when the advance hold does not perform a reach effect, and an icon change effect may not be executed when the advance hold performs a reach effect. In this way, no change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is executed, and a change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is not executed, so that the icon change effect will not hinder the reach effect, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the advance holds include ones that perform reach effects, the icon change effect may be executed, but it may be configured so that the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (executed at a higher rate) when the advance holds do not include ones that perform reach effects than when the advance holds include ones that perform reach effects. In addition, it may be configured so that the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (executed at a higher rate) when the advance holds do not include ones that perform a specific reach effect (SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) than when the advance holds include ones that perform a specified reach effect (normal reach effect, etc.), or vice versa.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 28 is an icon final display mode determination table for determining the icon final display mode in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the type of special pattern corresponding to the look-ahead command, the type of look-ahead command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the performance content of the planned change pattern corresponding to the look-ahead command is also listed.

The final icon display modes include normal icons (white icons whose shapes are set for each presentation mode) that do not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, and special icons (blue, red, and rainbow icons whose shapes are common to multiple presentation modes) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. The likelihood of a jackpot associated with the special icons increases in the following order: blue icon < red icon (guaranteed SP reach or higher) < rainbow icon (guaranteed jackpot).

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 29 shows a change scenario determination table for determining an icon change scenario in the icon change performance determination process of step E315 described above.

The change scenario determination table associates the final display mode of the icon, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The change scenarios include scenarios (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), scenarios (e.g., scenario 02, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and scenarios (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state (icon with a first special symbol) or a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol). For example, in a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change may be higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to a prior change (e.g., 20:80 or 0:100). Also, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change may be higher in a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol) than in a normal game state (icon with a first special symbol).

(Change Pattern Determination Table)
FIG. 30 shows a change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the reserved/relevant icon in the icon display mode update process of step E323 described above.

Figure 30 (a) is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a pending icon that is referenced when determining the change pattern of the pending icon, and Figures 30 (b) and (c) are diagrams showing change pattern determination tables for the icon that are referenced when determining the change pattern of the icon.

The change pattern determination table associates the manner in which the reserved/relevant icon change occurs in this change performance, the change performance pattern, the selection rate of each reserved/relevant icon change pattern, and the type of reserved/relevant icon change pattern that will be selected, and for reference, the timing at which the reserved/relevant icon change performance occurs and the change stage for each reserved/relevant icon change pattern are also listed.

The reserved/relevant icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes with the output of a sound effect, a character A effect change pattern in which a trigger performance is performed by character A displayed on the main display device 70 to cause the reserved/relevant icon to change and the display mode of the reserved/relevant icon to change, a character B effect change pattern in which a trigger performance is performed by character B displayed on the main display device 70 to cause the reserved/relevant icon to change and the display mode of the reserved/relevant icon to change, a character C effect change pattern in which a trigger performance is performed by character C displayed on the main display device 70 to cause the icon to change and the display mode of the icon to change, and a character D effect change pattern in which a trigger performance is performed by character D displayed on the main display device 70 to cause the icon to change and the display mode of the icon to change.

The timing of the change in the pending icon is classified according to the progress of the variable performance, and there are times when the variable performance starts and during normal variable performance, which are classified as the pre-reach performance period executed at the beginning of the variable performance, and times during normal reach and after normal reach, which are classified as the reach performance period that may be executed after the pre-reach performance period.

As for the change in the reserved icon, "1UP" means that the probability of a jackpot will be displayed in a one-level higher display mode, for example, a white icon will change to a blue icon, or a blue icon will change to a red icon, etc. "2UP" means that the probability of a jackpot will be displayed in a two-level higher display mode, for example, a white icon will change to a red icon, or a blue icon will change to a rainbow icon, etc. Also, "SP suggestion" means that a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed by the character that performed the trigger effect.

The first feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 28 to 30 is that in a normal reach variation presentation, which has a lower chance of winning than a SP reach variation presentation, the chance of winning is higher when an icon change presentation targeting this normal reach variation presentation is executed than when an icon change presentation targeting this normal reach variation presentation is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not a look-ahead presentation (here, an icon change presentation) will be executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 28 to 30 is that, when a jackpot game is played, the rate at which a normal reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played is higher than the rate at which a normal reach-changing presentation is performed without an icon change presentation (hold notice), the rate at which an SP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played is higher than the rate at which a normal reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played, and the rate at which an SPSP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played is higher than the rate at which an SP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation; and, when a jackpot game is not played, the rate at which an SP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played is lower than the rate at which a normal reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation, and the rate at which an SPSP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played is lower than the rate at which an SP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations about whether or not a look-ahead presentation (here, an icon change presentation) will be performed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 28 to 30 is that when a normal reach variation presentation, SP reach variation presentation, or SPSP reach presentation is executed, the icon change presentation is executed (is more likely to occur) at a higher rate during the pre-reach presentation period than during the reach presentation period. This makes it less likely that the reach presentation and the icon change presentation will interfere with each other, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that when an SP reach variation presentation or SPSP reach presentation is executed, the icon change presentation is executed (is more likely to occur) at a higher rate during the normal reach than after the normal reach (during the SP reach presentation, during the SPSP reach presentation), but it is also possible not to execute the icon change presentation after the normal reach.

A fourth feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 28 to 30 is that when a normal reach variation presentation, SP reach variation presentation, or SPSP reach presentation is performed, the reserved icon change presentation is performed (is more likely to occur) at a higher rate during the pre-reach presentation period than during the reach presentation period. This makes it less likely that the reach presentation and the reserved icon change presentation will interfere with each other, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. Note that when an SP reach variation presentation or SPSP reach presentation is performed, the icon change presentation is performed (is more likely to occur) at a higher rate during the normal reach than after the normal reach (during the SP reach presentation, during the SPSP reach presentation), but it is also possible not to perform the icon change presentation after the normal reach.

A fifth feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 28 to 30 is that the type of suggestive effect (the character that triggers the change in the reserved icon) that suggests a change in the reserved icon varies depending on the change in the reserved icon (character A when the icon changes from white to blue, character B when the icon changes from blue to red). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestive effect will be executed, thereby making the game more interesting.

A sixth feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 28 to 30 is that the type of suggestive effect (the character that triggers the icon change) that suggests that the icon will change varies depending on the change in the icon (character A for white → blue, character B for blue → red, character C for white → red, character D for blue → rainbow). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestive effect will be executed, making the game more interesting.

A seventh feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 28 to 30 is that when the icon changes to a red icon, a suggestive effect (SP suggestion) can be executed, which suggests that an SP reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than a normal reach effect, will be executed, but when the icon is a red icon, an SP reach effect can be executed regardless of whether or not a suggestive effect (SP suggestion) has been executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's joy at the execution of an SP reach effect, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Preview read-ahead continuous performance decision processing of the performance control unit)
The look-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E317-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process for determining the look-ahead continuous performance is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E317-4. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E317-6, assuming that the look-ahead zone performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the expectation of a special game being executed by using background images, text information, and color information (expectation value information) by performing in-zone effects (displaying a look-ahead zone background image, displaying a blue zone image or a red heat zone image, and outputting zone BGM or heat zone BGM) across one or more variable effects, and is a type of look-ahead continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed" includes a period when there is no pre-emption that executes the look-ahead zone effect, when a jackpot is not being played, etc. Note that the look-ahead zone effect may be executable in the normal game state and the look-ahead zone effect may not be executable outside the normal game state, or the look-ahead zone effect may not be executable in the normal game state and the look-ahead zone effect may be executable outside the normal game state.

In step E317-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 31) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone performance. Details of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32, and determines one look-ahead zone performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead zone performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of look-ahead designation command (planned change pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario.

In step E317-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead zone presentation as a presentation scenario in which the look-ahead zone presentation is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead zone performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead zone performance.

In step E317-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead effect performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead effect performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-9. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead effect performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-11, assuming that the look-ahead effect performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "pre-reading effect effect" is an effect (a light-emitting effect image is displayed around the three effect patterns 70a that start the changing display and an effect sound is output for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one second)) that is executed over one or more changing effects (including a changing effect that results in a jackpot) to intermittently indicate the likelihood of a special game being executed by using light-emitting effect images and sound information (light-emitting display effect at the start of the change), and is a type of pre-reading continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed" refers to a period during which there is no pre-emption that executes the look-ahead effect, a jackpot game is not being played, etc. Note that the look-ahead effect can be executed in the normal game state and cannot be executed outside the normal game state, or the look-ahead effect can be executed outside the normal game state and cannot be executed, respectively.

In step E317-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead effect performance. Details of the look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a look-ahead effect performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33, and determines one look-ahead effect performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead effect performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of planned variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each performance scenario.

In step E317-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead effect performance as a performance scenario in which the look-ahead effect performance is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead effect performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead effect performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead effect performance. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous performance determination process ends.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead zone presentation scenario in the look-ahead continuous presentation determination process of step E317 described above.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the performance scenario of the selected look-ahead zone performance, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

"Zone" refers to the execution of normal zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image, output of zone background music), while "hot zone" refers to the execution of heat zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone background music) which have a higher chance of winning than normal zone effects.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), a scenario in which the zone performance is not executed during pre-change but is executed during the change (e.g., scenario 01), and a scenario in which the zone performance is executed during both pre-change and the change (e.g., scenario 02).

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that it sets a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone does not progress (change) to a performance mode with a high expectation of special play, and a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone progresses (changes) to a performance mode with a high expectation of special play. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the performance mode of the performance during the zone will progress (change), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation is more likely to progress (change) in the subject change than in the advance change. This makes it easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to a peak in the subject change, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Note that it may also be possible to make it easier for the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation to progress (develop) in the subject change than in the advance change.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario decision table)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead effect performance scenario in the look-ahead continuous performance determination process of step E317 described above.

The look-ahead effect scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead effect performance, and the performance scenario of the look-ahead effect performance that will be selected, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead effect performance in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The "blue effect" refers to the display of a blue light-emitting effect image around the performance pattern 70a and the output of a blue effect sound, and the "red effect" refers to the display of a red light-emitting effect image, which has a higher probability of winning than the blue effect image, around the performance pattern 70a and the output of a red effect sound.

The look-ahead effect performance scenarios include non-execution scenarios in which look-ahead effect performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), scenarios in which effect performance is not executed during pre-changes but is executed during the change (e.g., scenario 01), and scenarios in which effect performance is executed during both pre-changes and the change (e.g., scenario 02).

The first feature of the look-ahead effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that it sets a presentation scenario in which the presentation mode of the effect effect does not progress (change) to a presentation mode with a high expectation of special play, and a presentation scenario in which the presentation mode of the effect effect progresses (changes) to a presentation mode with a high expectation of special play. In this way, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the presentation mode of the effect effect will progress (change), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the presentation mode of the look-ahead effect production is more likely to progress (change) in the subject change than in the advance change. This makes it easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to a peak in the subject change, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Note that it may also be possible to make it easier for the presentation mode of the look-ahead effect production to progress (develop) in the subject change than in the advance change.

In addition, as a presentation mode for the look-ahead effect presentation, an effect image of a type that confirms the execution of a jackpot game (for example, a rainbow effect) may be provided, or an effect image of a type that has a lower expectation of a jackpot than a blue effect image (for example, a white effect) may be provided.

In addition, while it is possible to execute the look-ahead effect presentation in the normal game state, it is also possible not to execute the look-ahead effect presentation in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability variation game state) in which the right-hit image is displayed.

In addition, while the look-ahead effect presentation is not executed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect presentation may be executed in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability bonus game state) in which a right-hit image is displayed.

In addition, in the pre-reading effect performance, instead of displaying a light-emitting effect image around the three performance patterns 70a, a light-emitting effect image may be displayed only around the performance pattern 70a in one of the left, middle, and right columns (for example, the center column).

In addition, when displaying a light-emitting effect image in a pre-reading effect performance, the frame lighting device 10 may be made to emit light in an effect light-emitting mode (for example, the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image displayed around the performance pattern 70a).

(Jackpot notice performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The big win advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flowchart showing the big win advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E322-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variation presentation pattern executed in the current variation presentation, and in step E322-2, determines the line preview pattern using a line preview presentation determination table (see FIG. 35) for determining the preview pattern of the line preview presentation executed during the pre-reach presentation period (during normal variation). Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35 and determines the line preview pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation presentation pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each line preview pattern.

The "dialogue preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which, in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during a valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) that occurs during the pre-reach performance period (normal variation), a dialogue image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the main display device 70 and sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9. Note that the dialogue preview effect is a button operation effect that executes a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed when the valid period has elapsed even if the effect button 17 is not operated.

In step E322-3, the sub-CPU 130a sets execution information for the dialogue preview effect corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information for the dialogue preview effect is referenced in the big win preview effect execution process in step E500, and the dialogue preview effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines the feature preview pattern using a feature preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(a)) for determining the preview pattern of the feature preview performance executed during the pre-reach performance period (during normal fluctuation). Specifically, the feature preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(a) is referenced, and the feature preview pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current fluctuation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each feature preview pattern.

The "gimmick preview performance" is a type of jackpot preview performance that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot by the first movable member 73a performing a predetermined action (a small or large descent, described below) at a predetermined timing during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation).

In step E322-5, the sub-CPU 130a sets the execution information of the feature preview performance corresponding to the feature preview pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This feature preview performance execution information is referenced in the big win preview performance execution process in step E500, and the feature preview performance is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the feature preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a blackout presentation. Specifically, it determines whether the variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern in which a reach presentation of a normal reach or higher is executed. If the variable presentation pattern is capable of executing a blackout presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-7, and if the variable presentation pattern is not capable of executing a blackout presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-9, assuming that a blackout presentation will not be executed.

In step E322-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the blackout presentation pattern using a blackout presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(b)) for determining the presentation pattern of the blackout presentation executed during the reach presentation period (normal reach). Specifically, the blackout presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(b) is referenced to determine the blackout presentation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable presentation pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each blackout presentation pattern.

A "blackout effect" is a type of big win preview effect in which the main display device 70 goes dark during a reach effect period (normal reach), and depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (e.g., 2 seconds) that occurs during the dark period, a development effect is executed that suggests whether or not the effect will progress to a SP reach effect. Note that the blackout effect is a button operation effect that executes a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed when the valid period has passed even if the effect button 17 is not operated.

In step E322-8, the sub-CPU 130a sets execution information for the blackout effect corresponding to the blackout effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information for the blackout effect is referenced in the big win preview effect execution process in step E500, and the blackout effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the blackout effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern capable of executing a cut-in presentation. Specifically, it determines whether the variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern in which a SP reach presentation is executed. If the variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern in which a cut-in presentation is executed, the process proceeds to step E322-10, and if the variation presentation pattern is not a variation presentation pattern in which a cut-in presentation is executed, the process proceeds to step E322-12, assuming that a cut-in presentation will not be executed.

In step E322-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines the cut-in performance pattern using a cut-in performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(c)) for determining the performance pattern of the cut-in performance executed during the SP reach performance. Specifically, the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(c) is referenced to determine the cut-in performance pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each cut-in performance pattern.

A "cut-in effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which a development suggestion effect is executed, suggesting whether or not the effect will develop into an SPSP reach effect, depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (for example, 1 second) that occurs during the SP reach effect. Note that the cut-in effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect is executed that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed when the valid period has elapsed even if the effect button 17 is not operated.

In step E322-11, the sub-CPU 130a sets execution information for a cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information for the cut-in effect is referenced in the big win preview effect execution process in step E500, and the cut-in effect is executed. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

Note that although the "dialogue preview effect", "blackout effect", and "cut-in effect" are executed when the valid period has elapsed even if the effect button 17 is not operated, there is no problem if you do not want them to be executed.

In step E322-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a deciding presentation. Specifically, it determines whether or not the variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. If the variable presentation pattern is capable of executing a deciding presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-13, and if the variable presentation pattern is not capable of executing a deciding presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-15, assuming that a deciding presentation will not be executed.

In step E322-13, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final performance pattern using a final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(d)) for determining the performance pattern of the final performance executed during the SPSP reach performance. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the final performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(d) and determines the final performance pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each final performance pattern.

The "decisive effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which a result suggesting effect is executed to suggest (inform) whether or not a jackpot game will be executed, depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during a valid period (e.g., 4 seconds) that occurs during a SPSP reach effect. Note that the decisive effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect is executed to encourage the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed when the valid period has elapsed even if the effect button 17 is not operated. Also, the decisive effect does not have to be executed only during a SPSP reach effect, but may be executed during a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect, etc. In that case, it is preferable to set the execution rate of the decisive effect to be higher in the order of normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

The winning effect includes a successful winning effect in which the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend to the performance position (a large descent, described below), the second movable member 73b moves left and right, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the performance button light-emitting LEDs, etc. emit rainbow colors, and a successful winning image (an image including rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, suggesting that a big win game will be played; and a failed winning effect in which the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b do not descend to the performance position, and a failed winning image (an image not including rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, suggesting that a big win game will not be played.

In step E322-14, the sub-CPU 130a sets execution information for the deciding effect corresponding to the deciding effect pattern in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information for the deciding effect is referenced in the big win notice effect execution process in step E500, and the deciding effect is executed. Details of the deciding effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a fixed presentation. If the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a fixed presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-16. If the current variable presentation pattern is not a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a fixed presentation, the process ends, assuming that a fixed presentation will not be executed.

In step E322-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final presentation pattern using a final presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 37) for determining the presentation pattern of the final presentation executed at a predetermined timing during the variable presentation. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final presentation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable presentation pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each final presentation pattern by referring to the final presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37.

The "determined performance" is a type of jackpot advance performance in which a confirmation sound (ringing ring) is output during the execution of a variable performance that results in a jackpot, definitively notifying the player that a jackpot has been reached, and the launch handle 15 lights up in rainbow colors.

In step E322-17, the sub-CPU 130a sets execution information for the final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information for the final performance is referenced in the big win preview performance execution process in step E500, and the final performance is executed at various times. Details of the final performance pattern determination table will be described later.

(Dialogue preview pattern determination table)
FIG. 35 is a dialogue preview pattern determination table for determining the dialogue preview pattern in the jackpot preview performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The dialogue preview pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each dialogue preview pattern, and the presentation content of each dialogue preview pattern (validity period, dialogue preview presentation content). Note that dialogue preview pattern 01 is a dialogue preview pattern in which no dialogue preview presentation is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light will be displayed during the valid period.
"Non-protruding (white)" in the button status column indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 will remain in a non-protruding state (normal state) and will emit white light to promote operation.

"Normal Line (Black)" in the line content column indicates that one of multiple normal lines, which may or may not result in a jackpot game, is displayed in black text.
"Chance (black)" indicates that one of a number of chance lines suggesting that a big win game may occur is displayed in black text.
"Reach (black)" indicates that one reach line, which confirms that a reach effect will be executed, is displayed in black text.
"Reach (red)" indicates that one reach line, which indicates that a reach effect will be executed, is displayed in red text.
"Hot (red)" indicates that one hot line is displayed in red text, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a big win will be played.
"Super Hot (Gold)" indicates that one super hot line, suggesting that there is a strong possibility that a big win will be played, is displayed in gold letters.
"Confirmed (rainbow)" indicates that a confirmation line, which confirms that a big win game will be played, is displayed in gold letters.

The likelihood of winning for each line is set in the following order: normal line < chance line < reach line (black letters) < reach line (red letters) < hot line (red letters) < super hot line (gold letters) < confirmed line (rainbow letters).

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when a line is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the validity period has elapsed.
"Weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that when a line is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed, the effect button 17 vibrates at a weak intensity for only 1 second.
"Medium vibration (1 second)" indicates that when dialogue is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed, the effect button 17 will vibrate at medium intensity for only 1 second.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that when dialogue is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed, the effect button 17 vibrates at a strong intensity for only 1 second.

The probability of winning for each vibration is set to increase in the following order: weak vibration < medium vibration < strong vibration.

(Gem preview pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(a) is a reel prediction pattern determination table for determining a reel prediction pattern in the jackpot prediction performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The bonus feature preview pattern determination table associates the big win determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each bonus feature preview pattern, and the bonus feature preview content (execution timing, operation mode) of each bonus feature preview pattern. Note that bonus feature preview pattern 01 is a bonus feature preview pattern in which the bonus feature preview performance is not executed.

"Small descent" in the operation mode column indicates that the movable performance device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly lower than the standby position and then returns to the standby position.
"Big descent" indicates that the movable performance device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to a performance position lower than the intermediate position, and then returns to the standby position.

The probability of winning for each operation mode is set to increase in the order of small drop < large drop. Note that the timing for the special feature preview performance is set to be only when the fluctuation starts, but the special feature preview performance may also be executed at other times.

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when an effect image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed.
"Yes (for 1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that when the fluctuation starts, the performance button 17 will vibrate for 1 second along with the operation of the movable performance device 73.

(Blackout effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(b) is a blackout presentation pattern determination table for determining the blackout presentation pattern in the big win preview presentation determination process of step E322 described above.

The blackout effect pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern, and the effect content of each blackout effect pattern (validity period, blackout effect content). Note that blackout effect pattern 01 is a blackout effect pattern in which a blackout effect is not executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light will be displayed during the valid period.
"Non-protruding (white)" in the button status column indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 will remain in a non-protruding state (normal state) and will emit white light to promote operation.

"Failed development" in the performance image column indicates that a failed development performance will be executed, suggesting that the development to an SP reach performance has failed and the performance will end in a normal reach.
A "weak development effect" indicates that a weak development effect will be executed, which suggests that the development to an SP reach effect has been successful and that an SP reach effect will be executed.
A "strong development effect" indicates that a weak development effect will be executed, which suggests that the development to an SP reach effect has been successful and that the SP reach effect will be executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when an effect image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed.
"Yes (for 3 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds when an effect image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed.

The probability of winning for each effect image is set in the following order: failure to develop < weak development effect < strong development effect.

(Cut-in performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(c) is a cut-in effect pattern determination table for determining the cut-in effect pattern in the big win advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The cut-in effect pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the effect content of each cut-in effect pattern (validity period, cut-in effect content).

"None" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 will not be displayed during the validity period.
"Non-protruding (dark)" in the button status column indicates that the effect button 17 remains in a non-protruding state (normal state) and does not emit light during the valid period.

"Weak cut-in" in the effect image column indicates that a weak cut-in image is displayed, which suggests that a big win game may be executed.
"Strong cut-in" indicates that a strong cut-in image is displayed, which suggests that a big win game may be executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when an effect image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed.

The probability of winning for each effect image is set in the order of weak cut-in < strong cut-in.

(Decisive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(d) is a deciding effect pattern determination table for determining a deciding effect pattern in the big win advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The deciding effect pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each deciding effect pattern, and the effect content of each deciding effect pattern (validity period, deciding effect content). Note that deciding effect patterns 01 and 02 are deciding effect patterns in which a deciding failure effect is executed, and deciding effect patterns 11 and 12 are deciding effect patterns in which a deciding success effect is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light will be displayed during the valid period.
"Protruding (white)" indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed.
"Protruding (rainbow)" indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state (specific aspect) that emits rainbow light will be displayed during the valid period.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button status column indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 will remain in a non-protruding state (normal state) and will emit white light to promote operation.
"Protruding (white)" indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 will be in a protruding state (specific state) and will emit white light to promote operation.
"Protruding (rainbow)" indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 will be in a protruding state (specific state) and will emit rainbow-colored light to promote operation.

The probability of winning for each button image and button state is set to increase in the following order: non-protruding (white) < protruding (white) < protruding (rainbow).

The "failure image" in the performance image column indicates that a failure image is displayed, which suggests that a big win game will not be executed (i.e., a miss).
The "success image" indicates that a successful decision image is displayed to notify that a big win game will be executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when an effect image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed.
"Yes (for 5 seconds)" indicates that when a success image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed, the effect button 17 will vibrate at a strong intensity for only 5 seconds.

Even if a failure image is displayed, a revival effect may be executed afterwards, and a jackpot game may be announced, so the display of a failure image does not necessarily mean that you have lost.

(Determined performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 37 shows a fixed presentation pattern determination table for determining a fixed presentation pattern in the big win preview presentation determination process of step E322 described above.

The confirmed performance pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern, and the execution timing of the confirmed performance in each confirmed performance pattern. Confirmed performance pattern 01 is a confirmed performance pattern in which a confirmed performance is not executed. The shaded areas in the column for the execution timing of confirmed performance (for example, the hatched areas in the columns for the start of a normal reach, during performance, effective 2, development performance, etc. in the (super) shortened variation row) represent performance content that is not executed (does not exist) in the corresponding variable performance pattern.

In addition, "Valid 1" in the column for the execution timing of the confirmed effect indicates the effective period of the line preview effect that may be executed during normal fluctuation (pre-reach effect).
"Valid 2" indicates the validity period of a blackout effect that may be executed during a normal reach effect.
"Valid 3" indicates the validity period of a cut-in effect that may be executed during a SP reach effect.
"Valid 4" indicates the valid period in the deciding effect executed during the SPSP reach effect.
The "○" indicates that it is time for a confirmed effect to be executed.

The first feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that in the variable presentation, after the confirmation presentation is executed (after the confirmation sound is output), a successful decision presentation based on the operation of the presentation button 17 is executed (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move), and there are also cases where a successful decision presentation based on the operation of the presentation button 17 is executed (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move) without the confirmation presentation being executed. This can give the player a sense of security and excitement, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A second feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that the execution mode (execution rate, execution timing) of the final presentation differs between an SP reach fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed after a normal reach presentation, and an SPSP reach fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed after a normal reach presentation, and then an SPSP reach presentation is executed, and the final presentation can be executed at multiple times during the fluctuation presentation, but the final presentation is not executed during the effective period of a jackpot advance presentation (dialogue advance presentation, blackout presentation, cut-in presentation, deciding presentation) that involves operation of the presentation button 17. This prevents inconveniences such as a final presentation being executed when trying to operate the presentation button 17, reducing the desire to operate the presentation button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

A third feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that in the variable presentation, the manner in which the big win preview presentation (dialogue preview presentation, blackout presentation, cut-in presentation, and deciding presentation) that involves the operation of the presentation button 17 and the execution rate of the deciding presentation differ depending on whether or not the first movable member 73a moves due to the role preview presentation, and the deciding presentation can be executed at multiple times during the variable presentation, but the deciding presentation is not executed during the effective period of the big win preview presentation (dialogue preview presentation, blackout presentation, cut-in presentation, and deciding presentation). This prevents the inconvenience of a deciding presentation being executed when trying to operate the presentation button 17, which reduces the desire to operate the presentation button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, among the above-mentioned big win preview effects (dialogue preview effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, and deciding effect), the deciding effect may be executed during the valid period of the cut-in effect during which the operation prompting effect is not executed.

A fourth feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that in variable effects, a confirmation effect can be executed before a deciding effect is executed, and a role preview effect that operates the first movable member 73a is more likely to be executed when a line preview effect with a high probability of winning is executed than when a line preview effect with a low probability of winning is executed. This makes it easier to build up the player's sense of anticipation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The feature preview performance can be executed not only at the start of the variable performance, but also at the start of the reach performance, or at a timing between the start of the variable performance and the start of the reach performance. In this case, the timing for executing the feature preview performance can be determined by lottery (feature preview pattern).

A fifth feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that in a variable presentation that results in a jackpot, the presentation button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (second state) when an effective period (effective period of the dialogue preview) occurs during a reach presentation than when an effective period (effective period of the deciding presentation) occurs before the reach presentation. This makes it easier to heighten the player's sense of anticipation during the reach presentation than before the reach presentation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that during the effective period of the line preview effect executed before the reach effect, the effect button 17 is not set to a protruding state, but the effect button 17 may be set to a protruding state at a lower rate than during the effective period of the final effect. In this case, the effect button 17 may be set to a protruding state at a predetermined rate only when a jackpot is reached, or the effect button 17 may be set to a protruding state at a lower rate when a miss is reached than when a jackpot is reached.

A sixth feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that the effect button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state during the effective period in a deciding effect that is executed in the second period (during the SPSP reach effect) that follows the first period of the reach effect than in a blackout effect that is executed in the first period of the reach effect (during the normal reach effect). This makes it easier to heighten the player's sense of anticipation in the second period that follows the first period of the reach effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that during the valid period of the blackout effect executed in the first period of the reach effect, the effect button 17 is not set to a protruding state, but the effect button 17 may be set to a protruding state at a lower rate than during the valid period of the final effect. In this case, the effect button 17 may be set to a protruding state only in the case of a jackpot, or the effect button 17 may be set to a protruding state in the case of a miss at a lower rate than in the case of a jackpot.

A seventh feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that the big win preview effects that can be executed at multiple times during the variable performance include specific effects (dialogue preview effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, and deciding effect) that are executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17, and the specific effects include a first effect (cut-in effect) that can be executed at multiple times during the variable performance and is executed by operating the effect button 17, and a second effect (dialogue preview effect, blackout effect, and deciding effect) that is executed even if the effect button 17 is not operated, and the execution of the first effect is restricted at a different timing (from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach performance) before the execution of the specific effect during the execution of the specific reach variable performance (SP reach variable performance). By doing so, the effect of the specific reach performance can be improved, and the interest in the game can be increased.

As the specific effects described above, in addition to non-operation-required effects such as dialogue preview effects and deciding effects that are executed even without operating the effect button 17, operation-required effects such as cut-in effects that are not executed without operating the effect button 17 may be provided, and the execution of operation-required effects may be restricted at a different timing before the execution timing of a specific effect during the execution of a developing effect such as an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect that develops from a normal reach effect (for example, during the developing effect but before the execution of the deciding effect), and in the case of a variable effect that results in a jackpot (a variable effect pattern designation command that results in a jackpot has been received), a specific effect as an operation-required effect may be executed at a different timing before the execution timing of a specific effect during the execution of the developing effect. Also, the execution of operation-required effects may be restricted by a predetermined lottery at a different timing before the execution timing of a specific effect during the execution of a developing effect.

The eighth feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that there are multiple dialogue preview presentations with different presentation modes (dialogue content, button vibration modes), and when the second jackpot game (full spin reach presentation), which is the most advantageous to the player, is played, a special mode (dialogue preview pattern 7, Super Hot (Gold)) dialogue preview presentation may be played, but when the first jackpot game (SPSP reach presentation), which is less advantageous to the player than the second jackpot game, is played, the special mode dialogue preview presentation is not played. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the second jackpot game is played, and to increase the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the general CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, it performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting the built-in registers, grants access to the general RAM 141c, initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate timer interrupts, and so on, and then in step T3, permits all interrupts.

In step T4, the general CPU 141a performs an adjustment mode switching process. Specifically, by referring to an input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a gaming store staff member, the general CPU 141a performs a process for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71), as well as switching the adjustment mode related to the volume and light intensity adjustment (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the light intensity can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

The volume and light intensity can be set (adjusted) using the changeover switch 22 at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is powered on (after the general control unit 141 has been started).

The overall CPU 141a performs a volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sounds output from the audio output device 9 based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

In step T6, the overall CPU 141a performs a light intensity adjustment process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process to adjust the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the display devices (main display device 70, sub display device 71) based on the detection signals (down button detection signal, up button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a, which detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light value using the cross key 19 is restricted (regulated/limited) at the start of the variable performance and at the end of the variable performance (stop of the performance pattern 70a). In addition, restrictions are imposed (regulated/limited) during the period from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the game progress control starts (specifically, during the period from when a timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110 during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, and during the initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500), during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over a full tray error and a payout abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality warning sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality warning sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction.

In step T7, the general CPU 141a performs an eco mode control process. Specifically, the general CPU 141a performs a process to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces the amount of light in the backlights of the display devices (main display device 70, sub display device 71) to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m has been received. If a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11. If a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

In step T9, the overall CPU 141a performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process of determining an animation pattern from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and setting (setting) the animation pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

In step T10, the overall CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines a sound pattern from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the sound pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

In step T11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the overall RAM 141c, indicating that it is time to update the frame display image on the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71). If the frame switching flag is set, the process proceeds to step T12, and if the frame switching flag is not set, the process proceeds to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set by the V blank interrupt process, which is executed every time the general control unit 141 receives a V blank signal sent from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the time it takes for the drawing and display of one frame of the performance image to be completed). Therefore, the processes in steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

In step T12, the general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c, and in step T13 performs scene update processing. Specifically, the general CPU 141a refers to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step T9, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The overall CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, in accordance with the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, it generates a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs processing to instruct the drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also performs processing to display the images (performance images, abnormality notification images) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display devices (main display device 70, sub display device 71). In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start and end timing of various performances (image display and sound output such as hold display, variable performance, big win notice performance, and pre-reading performance) performed on the main display device 70 and sub display device 71. Note that performances directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and lamp control unit 150 (hold display by the sub-first hold display device 83 and sub-second hold display device 84, performance operation of the movable performance device 73) may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

In step T15, the general CPU 141a performs audio control processing. Specifically, it generates an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputs this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing to output various special sounds and notification sounds based on the audio control commands from the audio output device 9. When this processing ends, the process proceeds to step T4.

In this way, when the variable presentation starts and ends (when the presentation pattern 70a stops), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player are restricted (regulated and limited). This makes it difficult for players to miss important points such as the start and end of the variable presentation, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be given priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by game store staff, but there are restrictions (restrictions and limitations) on volume and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the game store in adjusting the volume and light intensity while avoiding the inconvenience of a player not noticing the occurrence of an abnormality when trying to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormality notification sound due to the various sound effects, and ensures the security of the gaming machine.

Note that while an abnormality is being notified (an alarm sound is being output), it may be impossible to set (adjust) the volume value or light intensity value using the cross key 19 that the player can operate, or the adjustment range of the volume value or light intensity value may be limited to between 0 and 2, for example.

(Initial processing of the lamp control unit)
The role initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing the role initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed within a timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control unit 150 at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) has been received from the main control board 110. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102; if a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each process of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return process for the reels (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, and performance button 17).

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R105, assuming that the origin return process of the reel is not executed. If the initial processing number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104, and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the process performs operations such as returning the reel (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) to the origin position based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, and setting the initial processing number to "2". The origin return process will be described in detail later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the current reel initial processing is terminated without executing the initial operation processing of the reel, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the initial operation and initial light emission are performed to check whether the reel is operating normally, and the initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

In this way, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 39, the origin return processing for returning the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operation processing for performing the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not executed at the same time. Therefore, the return operations of the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not mixed, and it becomes possible to check the return operations separately from the initial operations and initial light emission.

In addition, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 39, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various reels perform their initial operation from the origin position, making it easier to determine whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various reels.

(Origin return process of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number indicating the progress of the origin return status of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is "0". If the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-3. If the board role processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the first movable performance device 73 is set as the drive target to be returned to the origin, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "1". If the board role processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R105-12. If the board role processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the sub display device 71, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "2". If the board role processing number is not "2", the process proceeds to step R105-14. If the board role processing number is "2", in step R105-6, the second movable performance device 75 is set as the drive target to be returned to the origin, and the process proceeds to step R105-7.

In step R105-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the target reel is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects whether each reel is in the origin position. If the target reel is not in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-8. If the target reel is in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-13.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor to move the target board part so that the target board part returns to its origin position, and in step R105-9, it updates by +1 the board part abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board part does not return to its origin position within a specified time.

In step R105-10, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the board role to be driven and proceeds to step R105-11. If the board role abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it proceeds to step R105-14.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a sets in the lamp RAM 150c the return abnormality information (first movable performance device return abnormality information, second movable performance device return abnormality information, sub display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board role object to be driven, and in step R105-10, clears the board role object abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to drive the sub display device 71, if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to drive the second movable performance device 75, if the board role processing number is "2", the board role processing number is updated to "3" to end the process of returning the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) to the origin.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the frame role (performance button 17), is "0". If the frame role processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R105-15, and if the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-22.

In step R105-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the performance button 17 is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the performance button 17 is in the origin position. If the performance button 17 is not in the origin position, it moves the process to step R105-16, and if the performance button 17 is in the origin position, it moves the process to step R105-21.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor to move the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to its original position, and in step R105-17, updates by +1 the frame role object abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the effect button 17 does not return to its original position within a specified time.

In step R105-18, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it proceeds to step R105-19 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, and if the frame role object abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it ends the current origin return process.

In step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a sets recovery abnormality information indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-20, it clears the frame role object abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame role (performance button 17) to its origin.

In step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "3" and the frame role processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-23, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-23, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R105-24, sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to "2" to execute the initial operation processing of the role, and ends this return to origin process.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 40, when the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71, whose performance positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on, are not in the origin position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), but are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (in the order of the first movable performance device 73 → the sub display device 71 → the second movable performance device 75). This makes it easier to check whether various board roles have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 are in contact with each other in a way that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent the two roles from applying load to each other, and to prevent the inconvenience of both roles being damaged at the same time.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 40, the return operation of the board role objects (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role object (performance button 17) to the origin position can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of the various roles can be shortened, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various roles to be executed next.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 40, an upper limit is set on the time for each reel to return to its origin position. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the return action of various reels never finishing. This makes it possible to avoid situations where various reels are performing a return action during a variable performance, resulting in no performance action being performed, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 40, when both the return operation of the board role objects (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) to their origin positions and the return operation of the frame role object (performance button 17) to their origin positions are completed, a process is performed to transition to the initial operation process. As a result, the return operation of the various roles to their origin positions and the initial operation of the various roles are no longer performed simultaneously, making it possible to check the return operation and initial operation of the various roles separately.

The first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 are returned to their original positions in a predetermined order (first movable performance device 73 → sub display device 71 → second movable performance device 75), but they may also start to return to their original positions at the same time. In this way, the time required for the return operations of the first movable performance device 73, the sub display device 71, and the second movable performance device 75 can be shortened, and a smooth transition to the initial operation of the various props to be executed next can be made possible.

(Initial Operation Processing of Lamp Control Unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board feature processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operation status of the board feature, is "0". If the board feature processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R107-2, and if the board feature processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information for the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board role will be performed, and if return abnormality information is set, in step R107-3, the board role processing number is set to "2" assuming that the initial operation of the board role will not be performed, and the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role. Details of the board role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board role (movable performance device 73, sub display device 71) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, it refers to the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of return abnormality information.

In step R107-6, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board feature processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board feature processing number is "0", the board feature processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board feature.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "1". If the board role processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R107-9. If the board role processing number is "1", in step R107-8, the initial operation of the board role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board role set in the lamp RAM 150c.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed, the board role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the board role.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the frame role (performance button 17), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-12, and if the frame role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information for the effect button 17 has been set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information has not been set, the process moves to step R107-14, assuming that the frame role object will perform its initial operation. If the return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-13, the frame role object processing number is set to "2", assuming that the frame role object will not perform its initial operation, and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role. Details of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role object (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, it refers to the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command.

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame role object processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "0", the frame role object processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role object.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number is "1". If the frame role processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the frame role processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the initial operation of the frame role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame role set in the lamp RAM 150c.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-21. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "1", the frame role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the frame role.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

In step R107-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R107-23, it clears the initial processing number described above, and ends this initial operation processing.

In this way, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial operation of each role can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the performance operation of each role during play from being hindered.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 that constitute the board role, the initial operations of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board role from completely breaking down or being damaged by forcibly initializing the board role that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, if there is a recovery abnormality in the effect button 17 that constitutes the frame role object, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as a complete failure or damage of the effect button 17 caused by forcibly performing the initial operation of the effect button 17 that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, even if the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the part where a return abnormality has not occurred.

In addition, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation processing ends when both the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) have been completed. This prevents a situation in which it is unclear whether the board role or the frame role is performing an initial operation or a performance operation, such as when the other is performing a performance operation while the other is performing an initial operation.

(Table for determining initial operation pattern of board role)
Fig. 42 is a diagram showing a board role initial operation pattern determination table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71). In Fig. 42, for convenience, the first movable performance device 73 is described as movable performance device 1, and the second movable performance device 75 is described as movable performance device 2.

The initial operation pattern determination table for the board role-playing device associates the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are also listed.

The initial operation patterns include patterns 01-04, which are determined when a power-on command is received, patterns 05-08, which are determined when a first power restoration command is received, indicating that the machine is waiting for customers, and patterns 09-12, which are determined when a second power restoration command is received, indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or a third power restoration command is received, indicating that a jackpot is being played.

"Movement of movable performance device 2" refers to the operation of tilting the second movable performance device 75 from the standby position to the performance position, and "return to origin of movable performance device 2" refers to the operation of returning the second movable performance device 75 to the standby position.

"Small descent of movable performance device 1" refers to the movement (descent) of the first movable performance device 73 from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly lower than the standby position, "large descent of movable performance device 1" refers to the movement (descent) of the first movable performance device 73 from the standby position to a performance position lower than the intermediate position, and "return to origin of movable performance device 1" refers to the movement of the first movable performance device 73 returning to the standby position.

"Sub display device movement" refers to the operation of the sub display device 71 rising from the standby position to the performance position, and "sub display device return to origin" refers to the operation of the sub display device 71 returning to the standby position.

"Movable performance device 1 LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided on the first movable performance device 73, "Movable performance device 2 LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided on the second movable performance device 75, and "Sub-display device LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-display device 71.

Note that the color of the first movable member LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 06, and initial operation pattern 10. This is because the LED of the movable performance device 1 flashes red to indicate an abnormality when the first movable member 73a returns to its original position.

In addition, the lighting color of the sub display device LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 07, and initial operation pattern 11. This is because the sub display device LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality when the sub display device 71 recovers.

In addition, the lighting color of the movable performance device 2 LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 04, initial operation pattern 08, and initial operation pattern 12. This is because the movable performance device 2 LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality when the second movable performance device 75 returns to normal.

The first feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the board role.

The same initial action means that at least the movement pattern of the board parts in each step is the same, and the action time in each step may be the same or different.

In addition, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of all of the initial operations of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 may be different. In this way, it becomes possible to easily determine whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

In addition, when the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 and/or the second movable performance device 75 and/or the sub display device 71 is made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be executed by the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed by the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting for customers state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 42 is that while the light emission pattern of the LEDs of the movable performance devices 1 and 2 is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting for customers state, the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The light emission pattern of the initial light emitted by the LEDs of the movable performance devices 1 and 2 is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, but the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted by the sub-display device LED is different. Conversely, the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted by the LEDs of the movable performance devices 1 and 2 may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, but the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted by the sub-display device LED may be the same.

In addition, both the light emission pattern of the LEDs of the movable performance devices 1 and 2 and the light emission pattern of the sub display device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting for customers state. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot game is played. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the initial light emission pattern during the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is different when power is restored to restore the waiting state and when power is restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore the waiting state, or during the display of the special symbol or during a jackpot game.

When the power is restored during the display of the changing special symbols or during a jackpot game, both the movable performance device 1, 2 LEDs and the sub display device LED are turned off, but the movable performance device LED and the sub display device LED may be lit in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, if the first movable performance device 73 has a recovery abnormality and the second movable performance device 75 and the sub display device 71 do not have a recovery abnormality, the first movable performance device 73 is not initialized and the second movable performance device 75 and the sub display device 71 are initialized; if the second movable performance device 75 has a recovery abnormality and the first movable performance device 73 and the sub display device 71 do not have a recovery abnormality, the first movable performance device 73 and the sub display device 71 are initialized without the second movable performance device 75 being initialized; if the sub display device 71 has a recovery abnormality and the first movable performance device 73 and the second movable performance device 75 do not have a recovery abnormality, the first movable performance device 73 and the second movable performance device 75 are initialized without the sub display device 71 being initialized. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation depending on whether or not there is a recovery abnormality.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (performance button 17).

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are listed.

"Performance button big rise" refers to the action of the performance button 17 rising from the standby position (initial position) to the performance position (upper position), and "performance button return to origin" refers to the action of the performance button 17 returning to the standby position.

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 43 is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is set to an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the performance button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame device, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 43 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The LED on the effect button is set to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game, but the LED on the effect button may be set to light up in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is different from the number of colors emitted in the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on includes a color of light that is not included in the color of light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during an operation effect that is executed by operating the effect button 17 during an effective period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is during the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is executed by overlapping with the initial operation of the effect button 17, which detects whether it is at the origin position. This makes it possible to check the operation of the effect button 17 and the button vibration motor at the same time, thereby shortening the time required for operation check.

(Example of when there is no recovery error in various parts after power is turned on)
Fig. 44 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is no recovery abnormality in various parts (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c. Note that, for the sake of convenience, in Figs. 44 to 62, first movable performance device 73 is described as movable performance device 1, and second movable performance device 75 is described as movable performance device 2.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

When the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 is completed, the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 begins.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on (lights white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T8, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T10, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying the changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the sub display device has a recovery error after power is turned on)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a recovery abnormality occurs in the sub-display device 71 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the sub display device 71, the sub display device LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

When the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 is completed, the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 begins.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub display device LED ends, the sub first change display device 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub first hold display device 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when first movable performance device 73 has a recovery abnormality after power-on)
Figure 46 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in first movable performance device 73 after power-on which involves initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when a recovery abnormality occurs in the first movable performance device 73 and the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the movable performance device 1 LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 2 LED and the sub display device LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved indicator 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 1 LED ends, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when second movable performance device 75 has a recovery abnormality after power-on)
Figure 47 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in second movable performance device 75 after power-on which involves initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice "RAM is cleared." Note that, since FIG. 47 assumes that there has been a recovery abnormality in the second movable performance device 75, after the movable performance device 2 LED goes out, it flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

Although a return abnormality occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to the origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the movable performance device 2 LED continues to flash red (abnormality notification mode) and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED and the sub display device LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved indicator 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 2 LED ends, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button does not return to normal after power is turned on)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 ends and the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 starts, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 does not start. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination.

In addition, not starting the initial operation of the effect button 17 corresponds to not executing the "big rise" of the initial operations shown in FIG. 43, and does not include the "continuous vibration (for 2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (for 2 seconds)" of the initial operations shown in FIG. 43. In other words, even if there is a recovery abnormality in the effect button 17, the "continuous vibration (for 2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (for 2 seconds)" will be executed. In other words, the above-mentioned "continuous vibration (for 2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (for 2 seconds)" are executed for a predetermined time when a predetermined timing is reached regardless of the position of the effect button 17 (whether it is the origin position or the big rise position).
For example, if "continuous vibration (for 2 seconds)" or "intermittent vibration (for 2 seconds)" is executed in conjunction with the operating position of the effect button 17 (the big rise position, the origin position returned from the big rise position), even though the effect button 17 can be vibrated without problem, there is a concern that it cannot even be confirmed that the effect button 17 can be vibrated without problem due to the fact that the effect button 17 cannot be moved to the big rise position or the origin position returned from the big rise position.
In response to this, as shown in FIG. 48, even if there is a recovery abnormality in the effect button 17, only the initial operations "continuous vibration (for 2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (for 2 seconds)" are executed for a predetermined time when a predetermined timing is reached, thereby eliminating the above concerns.

At time T5, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 begins, and at time T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and they turn on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (e.g. 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when no abnormality occurs in various parts after power is restored)
Figure 49 shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in the various parts (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, and performance button 17) after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial illumination, the sub display device LED lights up in blue as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up in blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on (lights white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T8, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying the changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the sub display device has a recovery error after power is restored)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a recovery abnormality occurs in the sub-display device 71 after power recovery without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the sub display device 71, the sub display device LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process starts, starting the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub display device LED ends, the sub first change display device 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub first hold display device 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the first movable performance device has a recovery abnormality after power recovery)
Figure 51 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in first movable performance device 73 after power is restored without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when a recovery abnormality occurs in the first movable performance device 73 and the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the movable performance device 1 LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, and the sub display device LED and the performance button LED light up blue as an initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 2 LED and the sub display device LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 1 LED ends, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the second movable performance device has a recovery abnormality after power recovery)
Figure 52 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in second movable performance device 75 after power is restored without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent. Note that since FIG. 52 assumes that there has been a recovery abnormality in the second movable performance device 75, after the movable performance device 2 LED goes out, it flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

Although a return abnormality occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to the origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the movable performance device 2 LED continues to flash red (abnormality notification mode) and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED alternately lights up blue and white as an initial light emission, and the sub display device LED and the performance button LED light up (emit) blue as an initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED and the sub display device LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 2 LED ends, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button has a recovery error after power is restored)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power is turned on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 ends and the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 starts, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 does not start. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the sub display device LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.
As regards the fact that the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not started, this is the same as that described in the explanation of Figure 48, so the explanation here will be omitted.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 starts, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the state after power recovery is that the special pattern is changing and there is a reserved memory)
FIG. 54 shows a specific example of the state after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c when the special pattern is changing (missing change display) and there is pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the second power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, the main display device 70 displays a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play," and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number = 3, second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the main display device 70 displays a recovery screen, so the reserved numbers are not displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second reserved indicator 84 changes to a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At time T5, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at time T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 begins, and at time T7, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

When a special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the main display device 70 displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the stop sound "Bang ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state in which it is possible to display a background image or other presentation image (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icons are not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "2", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying the changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "2".

In addition, if the state after power is restored is during the special pattern changing display (missing change display) and there is no hold memory, the basic flow of operations from timing T1 to timing T8 described above is the same, except that at timing T2, the sub-1 hold display 83 displays "0", and at timing T9, a customer waiting state designation command is received and the change performance does not start.

(Example of when the power restoration command is not received properly when the power is turned on)
FIG. 55 shows a specific example of a case where the power restoration command is not normally received when the power is turned on.

The power restoration command cannot be received normally if power is being supplied to the performance control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, if the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, or if the connector on the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state), etc.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, if the performance control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, but receives a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0), the main display device 70 will maintain the initial screen displayed, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED will maintain their lights off.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the main display device 70 maintains the initial screen displayed, but the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T4, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the main display device 70 will momentarily display the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped (static) state, and then the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ changing, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) will begin.

At this time, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying the changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

In addition, specific examples of cases where the power-on command cannot be received properly when the power is turned on are similar to the specific examples of cases where the power-on command cannot be received properly described above.

(Example of when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 56 shows a specific example of a case where power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return process and initial operation process have already been completed.

Examples of cases where power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted include cases where the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact due to an external factor, and cases where the connectors of the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected (including a half-inserted state) and then become connected.

At the timing of T1, the machine is in a customer waiting state after the various reels have already completed their return operations, initial operations, and the output of the initialization notification sound. The main display device 70 displays the second standby screen or customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles has ended and the machine is in a state of waiting for customers, the main display device 70 will display a waiting screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a waiting for customers demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, sub general map hold display 86) also maintain the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after a customer waiting state designation command is received regardless of whether or not the variable performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, sub general map hold display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on (lights white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent.

In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance, jackpot variable performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, or during the execution of a jackpot game (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the main display device 70 until the power-on command is received as the power-on command at timing T4 is the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it will be the same as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the customer waiting state.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 45 to 48.

Next, we will explain what happens when the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues.

When the machine is in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of the various reels have already been completed, the main display device 70 displays the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the second waiting screen in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, when the machine is in a waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance that was performed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have ended, the main display device 70 will display a standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a miss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

After that, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, sub general map hold display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, processing is performed to restore the game control state. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map change display 85, sub normal map hold display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after a customer waiting state designation command is received regardless of whether or not the variable performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the audio output device 9 is muted.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 starts. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

When the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, starting the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

After that, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and it turns on (lights white) while waiting for customers, and when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

Then, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the power restoration command is received during the execution of a change performance (miss change performance, big win change performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, that is, while the change performance screen is being displayed on the main display device 70, the same will occur after timing T2 in the specific example shown in Figure 54.

In addition, if a power restoration command is received during execution of a jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operations and initial operations of various reels and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, that is, when the opening presentation screen, round presentation screen, or ending presentation screen is being displayed on the main display device 70, the situation will be the same as that after timing T2 in the specific example shown in FIG. 54, except for the display content on the main display device 70.

Specifically, the main display device 70 displays a special jackpot presentation screen instead of the normal jackpot presentation screen, and maintains the display of the special jackpot presentation screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. Note that the display of the special jackpot presentation screen may be maintained until the jackpot game ends.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 45 to 48.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, when the game control state is initialized, a first initial performance pattern ("135") is displayed in which the identification characters (numbers, letters, etc.) in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a first combination, and when the game control state is restored, a second initial performance pattern ("753") is displayed in which the identification characters in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a second combination. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, when the game control state is restored, it is possible to display a specific display suggesting the resumption of power supply before displaying the performance pattern 70a on the main display device 70, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the main display device 70 after restoration to the customer waiting state (only display of the initial screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display displayed on the main display device 70 during the variable display of special patterns and after restoration to no reserved memory/reserved memory (display of the initial screen + recovery screen). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, it is possible to display the number of reserved memories in the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) and the sub reserved indicators (first sub reserved indicator 83, second sub reserved indicator 84), and when the power supply that was stopped while there are reserved memories is resumed and the game control state is restored, the reserved icon display area does not display the reserved memories when the main display device 70 is displaying a specific display suggesting the resumption of power supply, but the sub reserved indicator can display the reserved memories. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, it is possible to know the number of reserved memories before the specific display ends, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demo performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demo performance screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped (statically displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the state before the power supply was stopped was during the customer waiting demo performance or not, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, the sub-variable display devices (sub-first variable display device 81, sub-second variable display device 82) are configured not to display (blink) a variable signal during the display of the special symbol even if the display of the variable signal of the special symbol is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed) after the game control state is restored. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the game control state is restored and the special symbol variable display is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed), the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) may display a variable display (blinking display). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the special symbol variable display is being executed when the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, the sub-reserved indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) are configured to display the number of reserved balls from the time when the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70 (before the sub-variable indicator displays a variable display and when the special symbol storage command is received). By doing this, the player can immediately grasp the number of reserved balls after the game control state is restored, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When the sub-variation indicators (sub-first variation indicator 81, sub-second variation indicator 82) are performing a variation display (flashing display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the main display device 70, the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reservation indicator 83, sub-second reservation indicator 84) may be set to a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in synchronization with the start of this variation display. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variation display of the special pattern is being performed when the game control state is restored, and the number of reserved balls at that time.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, from the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (the timing when the initial screen ends). By doing this, the control for the return operation of the various reels does not become complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for the return operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, during the recovery operation of the various roles (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17), the light-emitting parts of the various roles (movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, performance button LED) are turned off. This makes it possible to distinguish from the initial operation of the various roles, and to know that the recovery operation is in progress.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, if any of the various reels have a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the reel that has the return abnormality will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the user of the abnormality. By doing this, it becomes possible to identify the reel that has the return abnormality.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, when an abnormality is notified by flashing the light-emitting part of a reel that has a return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification continues until the next variable performance starts. By doing this, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the reel that has a return abnormality.

If a reel has a return abnormality, a return operation may be performed to return the reel that had the return abnormality to its original position when the next variable performance begins. Also, if an abnormality is notified by causing the light-emitting part of the reel that had the return abnormality to flash red, the abnormality notification may be cancelled when the performance button 17 is operated.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, when the power supply that was stopped during the waiting state is resumed and the game control state is restored, the initial operation of the various roles (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) is performed from the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed if the recovery operation is completed immediately), but when the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special pattern is resumed and the game control state is restored, the initial operation of the various roles is performed from the timing before the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (while the recovery screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the various roles at an appropriate timing depending on the state when the power supply occurs.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, the board parts (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) are configured to perform their initial operation after the sub reserve indicators (sub first reserve indicator 83, sub second reserve indicator 84) have switched to a display mode showing the number of reserved items when the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70 (during the variable display of the special pattern and before the display of the performance pattern 70a). By doing this, the initial operation of the board parts can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reserved items (future game progress), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, the frame role (effect button 17) is configured to perform its initial operation after the sub reserve indicators (sub reserve first indicator 83, sub reserve second indicator 84) have switched to a display mode showing the number of reserved balls when the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70 (while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and before the performance pattern 70a is displayed). By doing this, the initial operation of the frame role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reserved balls (future game progress), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, from the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed if the return operation is completed immediately). By doing so, the control for the initial operation of the various reels does not become complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for the initial operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, even if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the stopping sound of the performance pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the stopping sound of the performance pattern 70a may not be output.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, if the power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed and the recovery operations, initial operations, and initial light emission of the various parts are not performed. By doing this, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power-on commands cannot be received.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, a winning sound is output when a special symbol storage command based on the winning of a gaming ball into the starting hole is received from the main control board 110. By doing this, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a gaming ball has won into the starting hole even when the initial screen is displayed.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, when a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110, the fluctuation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing this, the start of the fluctuation performance is executed without delay, and it is possible to execute the fluctuation performance from start to finish within the fluctuation time range of the special pattern.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, when a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110, the fluctuation performance is executed without executing the return operations or initial operations of the various reels. By doing this, it is possible to execute a performance using various reels without being hindered by the return operations or initial operations during the execution of the fluctuation performance.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, even if the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various props have already been completed and the show is in a waiting state for customers, if a power-on command or power-restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various props will be executed again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, even if the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various reels have already been completed and a change presentation (miss change presentation, jackpot change presentation) is in progress or a jackpot game is in progress (opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation), if a power-on command or power-restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 after it has been stopped, the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various reels are executed again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 44 to 56, even if the machine is in a waiting state for customers after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, such as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, even if the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished and a variable performance (miss variable performance, big win variable performance) or a big win game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) is in progress, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound will be output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

When a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the audio output device 9 may simply output an initialization notification sound rather than performing the recovery operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various parts.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 44 to 56, even if the recovery operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various parts have already been completed, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, even during a change presentation (miss change presentation, big win change presentation) or big win game (opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

(Modification when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 57 shows a modified example in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the machine is waiting for customers (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return process and initial operation process have already been completed.

Examples of cases where power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted include cases where the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact due to an external factor, and cases where the connectors of the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected (including a half-inserted state) and then become connected.

At the timing of T1, the machine is in a customer waiting state after the various reels have already completed their return operations, initial operations, and the output of the initialization notification sound. The main display device 70 displays the second standby screen or customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles has ended and the machine is in a state of waiting for customers, the main display device 70 will display a waiting screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a waiting for customers demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, sub general map hold display 86) also maintain the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after a customer waiting state designation command is received regardless of whether or not the variable performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the words "Loading" instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, and sub general map hold display 86) are hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in place of the initial screen, in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on (lights white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent.

In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance, jackpot variable performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, or during the execution of a jackpot game (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the main display device 70 until the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at timing T3 is the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), the same as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the customer waiting state.

Next, we will explain what happens when the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues.

When the machine is in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of the various reels have already been completed, the main display device 70 displays the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the second waiting screen in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, when the machine is in a customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have ended, the main display device 70 will display a standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a miss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

After that, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, sub general map hold display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, processing is performed to restore the game control state. At this time, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, and sub general map hold display 86) are hidden.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in place of the initial screen, in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 starts. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

When the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, starting the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

After that, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and it turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

Then, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

In addition, even if the power supply (excluding backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped while the main display device 70 is displaying the power supply screen and the power supply to the main control board 110 is then resumed, the main display device 70 will display an initial screen containing the text "Loading", and when the power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command is then received by the performance control board 130, the return and initial operations of the various roles will be performed. At this time, the main display device 70 will display a recovery screen containing the text "Please resume play" instead of the initial screen, and will maintain the display of the recovery screen until the next special symbol determination command is received.

Also, during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, that is, when the main display device 70 is displaying either the opening performance screen, the round performance screen, or the ending performance screen, the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the text "Loading", and then when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return operation and the initial operation of various roles are executed. At this time, the main display device 70 displays a special jackpot performance screen instead of the normal jackpot performance screen, and maintains the display of the special jackpot performance screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. Note that the display of the special jackpot performance screen may be maintained until the jackpot game ends.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the performance pattern 70a is displayed is switched to an initial screen that is different from the standby screen. By doing this, it becomes possible to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 57, when the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are turned off while the initial screen is being displayed. By doing this, it becomes easier to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (that there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial operation of the various reels when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, the initial operation of the various reels may be started when the initial screen is switched to or between the time when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen when a power-on command is received. In this case, the initial operation of the various reels may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at any time between when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial operation of the various reels may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

In addition, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed (when a power-on command is received), rather than switching from the standby screen to the initial screen, the standby screen may be switched to a non-display state and then the initial screen may be displayed. In this case, the initial operation of the various reels may be started from the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or from the timing between switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or the initial operation of the various reels may be started when switching from the initial screen to the standby screen.

(Modification when the sub display device has a recovery abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a modified example in which a recovery abnormality occurs in the sub-display device 71 after power-on involving initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the main display device 70.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the sub display device 71, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the performance button LED lights up (emits light) in the order red → green → blue as an initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and it turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operations of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the change in performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends, the sub-first change display 81 starts displaying changes, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

In addition, even if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71 when the power is turned on, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality, and the initial operation process will end without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 being executed.

Even when the power is restored, if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the initial operation process will end without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 being executed.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 58, if there is a return abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the initial operation is not performed not only for the movable member with the return abnormality, but also for the movable members without the return abnormality. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of a movable member without a return abnormality colliding with a movable member with a return abnormality and breaking down. It is also possible to prevent the movable member (especially the movable member without a return abnormality) from ceasing to operate during the execution of a game (variable performance, jackpot game), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 58, if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED will flash red to notify of the recovery abnormality. By doing this, it becomes easier to know that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to when only the movable member LED provided on the movable member having the recovery abnormality flashes red.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 58, even if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the initial operation is performed for the performance button 17 that is not at risk of colliding with the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71. By doing this, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 17 and to grasp the abnormality in the performance button 17.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 58, even if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71, the performance button LED provided on the performance button 17 will emit an initial light without flashing red to notify of a recovery abnormality. This makes it easier to know that there is no recovery abnormality in the performance button 17.

In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the initial operation process may be terminated without executing the initial operation for the performance button 17 as well. In this case, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED may be made to flash red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17, the initial operation process may be terminated without executing the initial operation for the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71. In this case, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED may be made to flash red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

Next, using Figures 59 to 62, we will explain the initial operation modes and performance operation modes of the various parts described in Figures 42 to 58 (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub-display device 71, and performance button 17).

(Specific examples of initial operation modes and required times of the first movable member)
Figure 59 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation of first movable performance device 73 (movable performance device 1) and the required time.
First, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of first movable performance device 73, "B" indicates the first initial operation position of first movable performance device 73, and "C" indicates the second initial operation position of first movable performance device 73. Note that the first initial operation position of "B" is the same position as the first performance position in Fig. 78 described below, and the second initial operation position of "C" is the same position as the second performance position in Fig. 60 described below. Note that hereinafter, they will simply be referred to as "A", "B", and "C".
Note that Figure 59 explains the initial operation of first movable performance device 73 (movable performance device 1) when a variable display is being performed when power is restored.

(a) shows the form of "movable performance device 1 small descent" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "movable performance device 1 small descent", first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "B" in about "0.25 S (seconds)" (= about one cycle of fluctuation). In this movement, it moves from "A" to "B" in one go without stopping or the like on the way.
In addition, in (a) to (f), the movable performance device 1 LED of the first movable performance device 73 is turned off (see Figure 42).
Note that the "cycle fluctuation" described in Figures 59 to 62 refers to the varying display that occurs on the special pattern display during the "0.25S (seconds)" that the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "B," and details are explained in Figure 69.

(b) shows the state in which the first movable performance device 73 is stopped at "B" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). In other words, when the first movable performance device 73 moves to "B", it stops (stays) at "B" for about "1S" (= about 4 cycles of fluctuation).

(c) shows the state of "return of movable performance device 1 to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "return of movable performance device 1 to origin", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "B" to "A" in about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycles of fluctuation). During this movement, it moves from "B" to "A" in one go, without stopping along the way.

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 performs a small descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time taken to move from "B" to "A" is longer than the time taken to move from "A" to "B". In addition, in accordance with this, the number of cycle changes made while moving from "B" to "A" is greater than the number of cycle changes made while moving from "A" to "B".
In particular, since the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a part that moves downward (vertically) from "A", by making the time required for the movement from "B" to "A", which is a movement against the vertical direction, longer than the time required for the movement from "A" to "B", the initial operation can be performed without putting a strain on the driving source of the first movable performance device 73.
Also, if we compare the time spent stopped at "B" as well, the time spent stopped at "B" is the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "B" to "A", and then the time spent moving from "A" to "B".
This allows, for example, a worker (factory worker, game store staff) to use the time that the first movable performance device 73 is stopped at "B" to check whether there is any malfunction or the like occurring with the first movable performance device 73.

(d) shows the state of "movable performance device 1 large descent" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "movable performance device 1 large descent", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "C" in about "0.8S" (= about 3 cycles of movement).

(e) shows the state in which the first movable performance device 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). In other words, when the first movable performance device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for about "2S" (= about 8 cycles of fluctuation).

(f) shows the state of "return of movable performance device 1 to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "return of movable performance device 1 to origin", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "C" to "A" in about "1.6S" (= about 6 cycles of fluctuation).

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 makes a large descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "C" to "A" is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "C." In addition, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "C" to "A" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "A" to "C."
In particular, since the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a part that moves downward (vertically) from "A", by making the time required for movement from "C" to "A", which is a movement against the vertical direction, longer than the time required for movement from "A" to "C", the initial operation can be performed without putting a strain on the driving source of the first movable performance device 73.
Also, if we compare the time spent stopped at "C" as well, the time spent stopped at "C" is the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "C" to "A", and then the time spent moving from "A" to "C".
This allows, for example, a worker (factory worker, game store staff) to use the time that the first movable performance device 73 is stopped at "C" to check whether there is any malfunction or the like occurring with the first movable performance device 73.

Note that Figure 59 uses the example of power restoration for explanation, but the same thing can be said about powering on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, recovery operations and initial operations will not be performed. As such, not all "power outages" will result in the event shown in Figure 59, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Specific examples of performance operation modes and required times of the first movable performance device)
Figure 60 is a diagram showing specific examples of the manner in which the performance operation of first movable performance device 73 takes place and the time required.
First, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of first movable performance device 73, "B" indicates the first performance position of first movable performance device 73, and "C" indicates the second performance position of first movable performance device 73. Note that the first performance position of "B" is the same as the first initial operation position in FIG. 59 described above, and the second performance position of "C" is the same as the second initial operation position in FIG. 59 described above. Note that hereinafter, these will simply be referred to as "A", "B", and "C". Also, it is assumed that the operation during the movement process is the same as the initial operation mode in FIG. 59.

(a) shows the performance mode of the above-mentioned "gimmick preview". That is, it shows that "movable performance device 1 small descent" is performed when the performance pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner.
In this "part preview," the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "B" over a period of approximately "0.5S (seconds)" (= approximately 2 cycles of fluctuation).
In addition, in (a) to (c), the movable performance device 1 LED of first movable performance device 73 lights up (emits) red and white alternately.

(b) shows that first movable performance device 73 has moved to "B". Then, when first movable performance device 73 moves to "B", it is positioned (stays) at "B" for about "3S" (= about 12 cycles of fluctuation).
This type of presentation operation mode is intended to increase the sense of expectation regarding the award of a big win game.

(c) shows the "return of movable performance device 1 to origin" during "game preview." In other words, when the first movable performance device 73 is positioned at "B" for approximately "3S," it takes approximately "0.8S" (= approximately 3 cycles of movement) to move from "B" to "A."

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 performs a small descent related to the performance operation and returns to the original position, the time it takes to move from "B" to "A" is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "B".
In particular, since the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a part that moves downward (vertically) from "A", by making the time required for movement from "B" to "A", which is a movement against the vertical direction, longer than the time required for movement from "A" to "B", the performance operation can be performed without putting a strain on the driving source of the first movable performance device 73.

Also, if we compare the time spent stopped at "B" as well, the time spent stopped at "B" is the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "B" to "A", and then the time spent moving from "A" to "B".
This makes it possible to draw attention to the first movable presentation device 73 located at "B," thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation for winning a big win.

Furthermore, compared to the initial movements in Figure 59, the performance movements are longer than the initial movements in all three aspects: the movement time from "A" to "B", the stopping time at "B", and the movement time from "B" to "A".
The reason for adopting such a time relationship is to take into consideration the circumstances of each action scene.
For example, when an initial action is performed, it is only necessary for a worker (a factory worker, a game store clerk) to focus on the initial action, so even if the initial action is activated in a shorter time than the performance action, there is little chance that the worker (a factory worker, a game store clerk) will overlook the initial action.
On the other hand, when a performance operation is performed, for example, in addition to the role announcement, various big win announcement performances may be performed simultaneously in a complex manner, and the range that the player focuses on is also wide on the game board 5. Therefore, if it is operated for the same time as the initial operation or for a shorter time than the initial operation, there is a concern that it may take a while for the player to realize that the big win announcement performance using the first movable performance device 73 is being performed.
Therefore, by operating the initial operation in a shorter time than the performance operation, the time required for the initial operation is shortened, while by operating the performance operation in a longer time than the initial operation, the concern that there may be a delay in realizing that a jackpot prediction performance is being executed using the first movable performance device 73 is being executed is eliminated.

Furthermore, compared to the initial operation of Figure 59, in terms of the number of cyclic variations performed during the movement time from "A" to "B", the number of cyclic variations performed during the stop time at "B", and the number of cyclic variations performed during the movement time from "B" to "A", the number of cyclic variations executed is greater in the performance operation than in the initial operation.
Therefore, for example, when the first movable effect device 73 performs an initial action during a variable display, the player may mistake this for an effect action, but because of the difference in cycle variation as described above, if the player visually checks the number of cycle variations performed on the special symbol display device, it becomes easier to distinguish whether an initial action has been performed or an effect action has been performed. This can eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

Note that, due to the effects described above, it is not necessary to have the performance action execute a greater number of cycle changes than the initial action, and it is also acceptable for the initial action to execute a greater number of cycle changes than the performance action. In this case, it is preferable to make each movement time and stop time longer for the initial action than for the performance action.

(d) shows the presentation mode of the big win notification in the above-mentioned "decisive presentation". That is, it shows that "the movable presentation device 1 is greatly lowered".
In announcing a big win in this "decisive performance", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "C" in about "1S (second)" (= about 4 cycles of fluctuation).
In addition, at a position (main display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the first movable performance device 73 which has moved to "C", an effect image EF which was not displayed during the initial operation (Figure 59) is displayed, emphasizing that a jackpot has been reached.
Also, as the first movable performance device 73 starts to move from "A" to "C", the movable performance device 1 LED lights up (emits light) in a rainbow. That is, the lamp CPU 150a drives the movable performance device 1 drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75, to move the first movable performance device 73 from "A" to "C", and also lights up (emits light) the movable performance device 1 LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 74, in a rainbow. The rainbow lighting (light emission) mode is a lighting (light emission) mode that definitely notifies that a jackpot has been hit.

(e) shows a state in which first movable performance device 73 stops at "C." That is, when first movable performance device 73 moves to "C," it stops (stays) at "C" for about "5S" (= about 20 cycles of fluctuation).
Even when this "stop" is being performed, the movable performance device 1 LED of the first movable performance device 73 is lit up (emits light) in a rainbow color, and an effect image EF is displayed at a position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable performance device 73 (main display device 70).

(f) shows the manner in which the movable effect device 1 returns to the origin when the big win is announced in the "decisive effect." In other words, after stopping at "C" for "5S," the first movable effect device 73 moves from "C" to "A" over a period of approximately "2S" (= approximately 8 cycles of movement).

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 makes a large descent for the performance operation and returns to the original position, the time it takes to move from "C" to "A" is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "C".
In particular, since the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a part that moves downward (vertically) from "A", by making the time required for movement from "C" to "A", which is a movement against the vertical direction, longer than the time required for movement from "A" to "C", the performance operation can be performed without putting a strain on the driving source of the first movable performance device 73.

Also, if we compare the time spent stopped at "C" as well, the time spent stopped at "C" is the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "C" to "A", and then the time spent moving from "A" to "C".
As a result, for example, when the first movable presentation device 73 is stopped at "C", the player can be given a sense of satisfaction for hitting the jackpot, and when it is moving from "C" to "A", the movement can be made to take longer than moving from "A" to "C", allowing the player to bask in the afterglow of hitting the jackpot and providing the player with an even greater sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, compared to the initial movements in Figure 59, the performance movements are longer than the initial movements in all three aspects: the movement time from "A" to "C", the stopping time at "C", and the movement time from "C" to "A".
The reason for this time relationship is roughly the same as that described in (a) to (c) above, however, since (d) to (f) are jackpot announcements, by making the stopping time at "C" and the movement time from "C" to "A" longer than the initial action, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for hitting the jackpot and to allow the player to bask in the afterglow of hitting the jackpot.
60(d) to (f) are described as an example of a scene of a big win notification of the "decisive performance", but the scene is not limited to this and may be applied to other scenes. For example, it may be applied to a scene of notifying that a high probability game state is given, or that a time-saving game state is given.

Furthermore, compared to the initial operation of Figure 59, in terms of the number of cyclic variations performed during the movement time from "A" to "C", the number of cyclic variations performed during the stop time at "C", and the number of cyclic variations performed during the movement time from "C" to "A", the performance operation executes a greater number of cyclic variations than the initial operation.
Therefore, for example, when the first movable effect device 73 performs an initial action during a variable display, the player may mistake this for an effect action, but because of the difference in cycle variation as described above, if the player visually checks the number of cycle variations performed on the special symbol display device, it becomes easier to distinguish whether an initial action has been performed or an effect action has been performed. This can eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

Note that, due to the effects described above, it is not necessary to have the performance action execute a greater number of cycle changes than the initial action, and it is also acceptable for the initial action to execute a greater number of cycle changes than the performance action. In this case, it is preferable to make each movement time and stop time longer for the initial action than for the performance action.

Note that the required times shown in Figures 59 and 60 are merely examples and may be changed as appropriate.
In addition, the time relationships described in Figures 59 and 60 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "A" to "B" may be the same as the travel time from "B" to "A", or the travel time from "A" to "B" may be longer than the travel time from "B" to "A".
Also, the stopping (staying) time was set to be the longest at "B" and "C", but it may be set to be the shortest, or stopping (staying) at "B" or "C" is not necessary.

(Specific examples of times required for the initial operation mode and the performance operation mode of the second movable performance device)
Figure 61 is a diagram showing specific examples of the initial operation of second movable performance device 75 and the time required for each performance operation.
First, "D" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the second movable performance device 75, and "E" indicates the initial operating position (= performance position) of the second movable performance device 75, and in the following, they will simply be referred to as "D" and "E".
Note that (first a), (first b), and (first c) in Figure 61 explain the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 (movable performance device 2) when a variable display is being performed when power is restored.

(First a) shows the form of "movable performance device 2 movement" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "movable performance device 2 movement", second movable performance device 75 moves from "D" to "E" in about "0.5S (seconds)" (= about 2 cycles of fluctuation). In this movement, it moves from "D" to "E" in one go without stopping or the like along the way.
In addition, in (first a) to (first c), the movable performance device 2 LED of the second movable performance device 75 is turned off (see Figure 42).

(First b) shows the state in which the second movable performance device 75 is positioned (stopped) at "E" (the "stopped" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the second movable performance device 75 moves to "E", it is positioned (stopped) at "E" for about "0.25S" (= about 1 cycle of fluctuation).

(First c) shows the state of "returning movable performance device 2 to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "returning movable performance device 2 to origin", the second movable performance device 75 moves from "E" to "D" in about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycles of fluctuation). During this movement, it moves from "E" to "D" in one go, without stopping along the way.

In this way, when the second movable performance device 75 performs the movement associated with the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "D" to "E" and the time it takes to move from "E" to "D" are the same (both are approximately 0.5 seconds). In addition, the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "E" to "D" are the same (both are approximately 2 cycle changes).

(Performance a) shows the performance mode of the "weak development performance" of the above-mentioned "blackout performance". That is, it shows that "movable performance device 2 movement" is performed when the performance pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ is displayed variably.
In this "weak development performance," the second movable performance device 75 moves from "D" to "E" over a period of approximately "0.5S (seconds)" (= approximately two cycles of fluctuation).
It should be noted that in (Performance a) to (Performance c), the movable performance device 2 LED of the second movable performance device 75 is lit (illuminates) green.

(Performance b) shows that the second movable performance device 75 has moved to "E". Then, when the second movable performance device 75 moves to "E", it remains at that "E" for approximately "0.25S" (= approximately one cycle of movement).

(Performance c) shows the manner in which the movable performance device 2 returns to the origin in a weakly developed performance. In other words, when the second movable performance device 75 is positioned at "E" for approximately "0.25 S", it takes approximately "0.5 S" (= approximately 2 cycles of movement) to move from "E" to "D".

In this way, when the second movable performance device 75 performs the movement related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "D" to "E" and the time it takes to move from "E" to "D" are the same (both are approximately 0.5 seconds). In addition, the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "E" to "D" are the same (both are approximately 2 cycle changes).

Also, when comparing (First a)-(First c) with (Performance a)-(Performance c), the time it takes to move from "D" to "E" is the same for both the initial movement and the performance movement, the time spent at "E" (stop time) is the same, and the time it takes to move from "E" to "D" is the same. Accordingly, the number of cycle changes made during the movement from "D" to "E" is the same for the initial movement and the performance movement (both are about 2 cycle changes), the number of cycle changes made during the stop time at "E" is the same for the initial movement and the performance movement (both are about 1 cycle change), and the number of cycle changes made during the movement from "E" to "D" is the same for the initial movement and the performance movement (both are about 2 cycle changes).

In this way, unlike the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75 has the same movement time and stopping time (as well as the number of cycle variations performed during these) for the initial operation and the performance operation.
In particular, the second movable performance device 75 is smaller in size and has a narrower range of motion than the first movable performance device 73, and is not a performance device that can be operated for a ``final performance'' like the first movable performance device 73.
Therefore, it can be said that this is a presentation device that attracts less attention from players than the first movable presentation device 73. As a result, it can be said that the first movable presentation device 73 is less likely to have an impact on players by misunderstanding whether it is an initial action or a presentation action. In such a movable presentation device, by standardizing the initial action and the presentation action, it is possible to standardize data for driving the second movable presentation device 75.

Note that the initial operation in Figure 61 is explained using the example of power restoration, but the same applies when the power is turned on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, the recovery operation and initial operation will not be executed. In this way, not all "power outages" will result in the event shown in Figure 61, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Specific examples of times required for the initial operation mode and the rendering operation mode of the sub display device)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing specific examples of the required times for aspects of the initial operation and aspects of the performance operation of the sub display device 71.
First, "F" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the sub-display device 71, and "G" indicates the initial operating position (= performance position) of the sub-display device 71; hereinafter, these will simply be referred to as "F" and "G".
Note that (initial a), (initial b), and (initial c) in Figure 62 explain the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 when a variable display is being performed when the power is restored, as an example.

(First a) shows the mode of "sub display device movement" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "sub display device movement", the sub display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" in about "0.6 S (seconds)" (= about 2.5 cycles of fluctuation). In this movement, it moves from "F" to "G" in one go without stopping midway.
In addition, in (first a) to (first c), the sub-display device LED of the sub-display device 71 is turned off (see FIG. 42).

(First b) shows the state in which the sub display device 71 is positioned (stopped) at "G" (this "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the sub display device 71 moves to "G", it remains positioned (stopped) at "G" for about "3S" (= about 12 cycles of fluctuation).

(First c) shows the mode of "returning the sub display device to its original position" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "returning the sub display device to its original position", the sub display device 71 moves from "G" to "F" in about "0.3S" (= about 1.25 cycle fluctuation). During this movement, it moves from "G" to "F" in one go, without stopping along the way.

In this way, when the sub display device 71 returns to the origin position after moving according to the initial operation, the time it takes to move from "F" to "G" is longer than the time it takes to move from "G" to "F." In addition, along with this, the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "F" to "G" is greater than the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "G" to "F."
In particular, since the sub-display device 71 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a part that can move upward from "F" (in a direction against the vertical direction), by making the time required for the movement from "F" to "G", which is a movement against the vertical direction, longer than the time required for the movement from "G" to "F", it is possible to perform the initial operation without putting a strain on the drive source of the sub-display device 71.
Also, if we compare the time spent at "G" as well, the time spent stopped at "G" is the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "F" to "G", and then the time spent moving from "G" to "F".
This allows, for example, a worker (factory worker, arcade staff) to check whether there is a malfunction or the like occurring with the sub-display device 71 by using the time that the sub-display device 71 is stopped at "G."

(Performance a) shows the performance mode of the "strong development performance" of the above-mentioned "blackout performance". That is, it shows that "sub display device movement" was performed when the performance pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ was displayed in a variable manner.
In this "strong development effect," the sub display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" in about "0.8S (seconds)" (= about 3 cycles of fluctuation).
In addition, in (Performance a) to (Performance c), the sub-display device LED of the sub-display device 71 lights up (emits light) in green.

(Performance b) shows that the sub display device 71 has moved to "G". Once the sub display device 71 has moved to "G", it remains at that "G" for approximately "4S" (= approximately 16 cycles of fluctuation).

(Performance c) shows the "return of the sub display device to its original position" during the "strong development performance." In other words, when the sub display device 71 is positioned at "G" for about "4S," it moves from "G" to "F" in about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycles of movement).

In this way, when the sub display device 71 makes a movement related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "F" to "G" is longer than the time it takes to move from "G" to "F". In addition, along with this, the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "F" to "G" is greater than the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "G" to "F".

Furthermore, when comparing (First a) to (First c) with (Performance a) to (Performance c), the performance movements are longer than the initial movements in both the movement time from "F" to "G", the stopping time at "G", and the movement time from "G" to "F".
The reason for adopting such a time relationship is to take into consideration the circumstances of each action scene.
For example, when an initial action is performed, it is only necessary for a worker (a factory worker, a game store clerk) to focus on the initial action, so even if the initial action is activated in a shorter time than the performance action, there is little chance that the worker (a factory worker, a game store clerk) will overlook the initial action.
On the other hand, when a performance operation is performed, for example, in addition to the blackout performance, various big win notice performances may be performed simultaneously in combination, and the range that the player focuses on is wide on the game board 5. Therefore, if it is operated for the same time as the initial operation or for a shorter time than the initial operation, there is a concern that it may take a while for the player to notice that the big win notice performance using the sub display device 71 is being executed.
Therefore, by operating the initial operation in a shorter time than the presentation operation, the time required for the initial operation is shortened, while by operating the presentation operation in a longer time than the initial operation, the concern that there may be a delay in realizing that a jackpot prediction presentation using the sub-display device 71 is being executed is eliminated.

Furthermore, when comparing (First a) to (First c) with (Performance a) to (Performance c), the number of cycle variations performed during the movement from "F" to "G", the number of cycle variations performed during the stop at "G", and the number of cycle variations performed during the movement from "G" to "F" are all related in that the number of cycle variations performed is greater in the performance movement than in the initial movement.
Therefore, for example, when the sub display device 71 performs an initial operation during a variable display, the player may mistake this for a performance operation, but because of the difference in cycle variation as described above, if the player visually checks the number of cycle variations performed on the special symbol display device, it becomes easier to distinguish whether the initial operation has been performed or the performance operation has been performed. This can eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

Note that, due to the effects described above, it is not necessary to have the performance action execute a greater number of cycle changes than the initial action, and it is also acceptable for the initial action to execute a greater number of cycle changes than the performance action. In this case, it is preferable to make each movement time and stop time longer for the initial action than for the performance action.

Note that the required times shown in Figures 61 and 62 are merely examples and may be changed as appropriate.
In addition, the time relationships shown in Fig. 62 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "F" to "G" may be the same as the travel time from "G" to "F", or the travel time from "G" to "F" may be longer than the travel time from "F" to "G".
Also, the stopping (staying) time is the longest at "G", but it may be the shortest, or it is not necessary to stop (stay) at "G".

Note that the initial operation in Figure 62 is explained using the example of power restoration, but the same applies when the power is turned on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, the recovery operation and initial operation will not be executed. In this way, not all "power outages" will result in the event shown in Figure 62, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during a setting change will be described with reference to Fig. 63. Fig. 63 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during a setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON and RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before the control of the progress of the game is started.

At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. In addition, a setting change notification is started to indicate that the settings are being changed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of the setting change screen, and alternating output of the setting change voice "Settings are being changed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoid"). In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the time T2, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

If, at time T10, the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is terminated, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also terminated. Then, the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the recovery and initial operations of the various gimmicks (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub-display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 start, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various gimmicks end after checking whether they are on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the game goes into a pre-start state before the progress control of the game starts.

At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that preparations are being made to clear the RWM, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. In addition, an RWM clear preparation notification starts (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating output of the notification voice saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and the initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoid") to indicate that preparations are being made to clear the RWM and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At time T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources will end, and the main control board 110 will transition from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the recovery and initial operations of the various gimmicks (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub-display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 begin, and all 7-segment displays 113a-113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends after confirmation of the illumination of the information display 113 has ended.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 65. Fig. 65 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts a setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. Also, a setting confirmation notification is started to inform the user that the settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to confirm the operation of the various drive sources (display of the setting confirmation screen, alternating output of the setting confirmation voice "Settings are being confirmed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoid"). Also, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

If, at time T10, the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification end, and the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 also ends. Then, the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power restoration notification described above begins. In addition, the recovery and initial operations of the various gimmicks (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 begin, and all 7-segment displays 113a-113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends after confirmation of the illumination of the information display 113 has ended.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (an RWM clear preparation notification to indicate that RWM clear is being prepared and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources, and a setting confirmation notification to indicate that a setting confirmation is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources). This allows the worker (factory worker, game store employee) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 to be informed that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, and allows the worker to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized in the setting change modes (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), so there is no need to create multiple states in the pre-start state before the game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the pre-start state ends with a setting value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This means that the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed to a playable state, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the operation of the various drive sources with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of various drive sources is performed to operate movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game, and in the playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 that does not affect the outcome of the game is performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, an open signal is not output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1, collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is turned on until the control of the progress of the game begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, so that the current setting value can be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In this embodiment, the setting change notification, RWM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification do not display text such as "Initial operation of drive source" or "Please check the operation of the solenoid" to encourage visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources, but such text may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are fully lit to check whether they are lit, but after the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, or setting check mode, the lighting check may not be performed.

(Modification of Initial Operation of Various Driving Sources)
A modified example of initializing the various drive sources will be described below with reference to the drawings. This modified example differs from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation is performed after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode is completed.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting change notification described above is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various gimmicks (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 begin, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 light up to begin confirmation that they are on. Note that the initial operations of the various gimmicks end after confirmation that the information display 113 is on has ended.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the game goes into a pre-start state before the progress control of the game starts. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed at timing T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of the various drive sources is started. At this time, an initial operation notification is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoids").

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the recovery and initial operations of the various gimmicks (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub-display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 start, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various gimmicks end after checking whether they are on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example in the modified example when initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned ON) is performed, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are ended, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) start on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above starts. In addition, the recovery and initial operations of the various gimmicks (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub-display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 start, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 light up to start checking whether they are on. The initial operations of the various gimmicks end after checking whether they are on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the control of the game progress is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the gaming machine 1 (including only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the gaming facility (including replacement of only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a hidden (inactive) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initialized after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is finished, so it is possible to appropriately check the operation without having to do complex operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation).

In addition, according to this modified example, after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game begins after an operation standby time has elapsed. This allows for ample time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the checking of the operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, the same initial operation notification is made regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome is after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode has ended. This simplifies the control of the initial operation notification, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the first movable performance device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is turned on until the control of the progress of the game begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, making it possible to properly notify the current setting value and ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In addition, according to this modified example, the information display 113 is designed not to display setting values or performance information about the gaming machine during the initial operation of the various drive sources, so that the attention of the employees of the gaming establishment can be focused on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to accurately determine failures of the various drive sources.

(Example of special symbol display)
Using Figure 69, we will explain display examples of the special pattern display devices (first special pattern display device 60, second special pattern display device 61).

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the special symbol display shows a losing special symbol with the rightmost LED lit as the initial display mode after power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols begins, the display mode changes to one in which the two LEDs from the left end are lit, as shown in Figure 69 (b), and thereafter (32 ms later), the display mode changes to one in which the lit positions of the LEDs change every 32 ms, as shown in Figures 69 (c)-(i). Specifically, the corresponding LED is controlled to light up every 4 ms, which is the timer interrupt period, and this continues for eight timer interrupts, so that the same LED remains lit for 32 ms.

Then, a cycle of change in the display mode of Fig. 69(b)-(i) is carried out multiple times (=256 ms), and when the time for changing the special symbol has elapsed, one of the special symbols of Fig. 69(j)-(m) (miss special symbol, first jackpot special symbol, second jackpot special symbol, third jackpot special symbol) is displayed stationary for the stop time (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, when the display of the next special symbol begins after the pause time has elapsed, multiple cycles are performed from the display state of FIG. 69(b), and one of the special symbols of FIG. 69(j) to (m) is displayed statically for the pause time (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In the cycle variation, two LEDs are turned on and their lighting positions are changed (moved), but it is also possible to turn on one LED and change its lighting position, or to turn on three or more LEDs and change their lighting positions.

In addition, in the case of cyclic fluctuation, eight types of display modes are considered to be one cycle, but two types of display modes (for example, all lights on and all lights off) may be considered to be one cycle, or three or more types of display modes may be considered to be one cycle. Even in this case, it is preferable that the time of one cycle is shorter than the stop time of the special pattern (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In addition, in this embodiment, a small win game that keeps the variable winning section open for 1.8 seconds is not executed, but when executing a small win game, it is preferable to stop the display of the small win special symbol after performing multiple cycle fluctuations. In this case, the stop time of the small win special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time of one display mode in the cycle fluctuation (32 ms).

(Examples of each production mode)
Using Figure 70, we will explain examples of display performances (pre-change actions, etc.) for each performance mode.

In presentation mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70(a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the first form (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The first mode of the performance pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing performance, but as a pre-changing action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, the pattern appears to float upward from the stopping position for 0.75 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the first state (hexagon). The normal icon in the first state is configured to perform a swinging motion (performance motion) that repeats at one cycle of 2 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70, from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, through a second position tilted to the right, and then back to the first position.

In presentation mode B (normal gameplay state), as shown in FIG. 70(b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the second form (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The second mode of the performance pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing performance, but the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size for 0.5 seconds as a pre-changing operation before the scrolling display (update operation) begins.

In addition, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second state (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second state is configured to perform a swinging motion (performance motion) that goes from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, through a second position tilted to the right, and then back to the first position, with one cycle repeated every two seconds while it is displayed on the main display device 70.

In presentation mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70(c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the third form (a rectangular base image BG with rounded edges, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image with rounded edges), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The third mode of the performance pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing performance, but before this scrolling (update and changes) begins, the performance pattern 70a is enlarged and displayed for 0.5 seconds as a pre-change action.

In the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), normal icons are displayed in the third state (star shape). A normal icon in the third state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the specific apex is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In presentation mode D (high probability game state), as shown in FIG. 70(c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The fourth mode of the performance pattern 70a scrolls downwards (updates and changes) during the changing performance, but as a pre-changing action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, the pattern appears to float upwards from the stopping position for 0.4 seconds.

In the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth state (round). The normal icon in the fourth state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the internal black dot is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the black dot has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In presentation mode E (high probability game state), as shown in FIG. 70(e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

The fourth mode of the performance pattern 70a scrolls downwards (updates and changes) during the changing performance, but as a pre-changing action that indicates the start of this scrolling display, the pattern appears to float upwards from the stopping position for 0.4 seconds.

In the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth state (round). The normal icon in the fourth state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the internal black dot is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the black dot has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In presentation mode F (time-saving play state), as shown in FIG. 70(f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (numeric image) common to all presentation modes.

The fourth mode of the performance pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing performance, but the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size for 0.4 seconds as a pre-changing action that indicates the start of this scrolling display.

In addition, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth form (pentagon). The normal icon in the fifth form rotates from a first position (initial position) in which a specific apex is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In addition, in performance modes A to F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the special icon is displayed in a common form (round) common to all performance modes. The special icon in the common form rotates from a first position (initial position) in which a specific part is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific part has moved, and then returns to the first position again, a rotational movement (performance movement) that is always repeated at one cycle of 2.5 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In addition, in performance modes A to F, the special symbol TZ displayed in a common manner (number image) is scrolled downwards (update change) without performing any pre-change action during the change performance, and the update action of repeatedly updating the number images 1 to 9 is repeated in one cycle of 0.9 seconds. Note that the update change of the special symbol TZ suggests that the change performance is being executed.

In this way, the effect of the reserved icon changing between the first and second positions during its performance (swinging and rotating) is repeatedly executed at a period (2 or 3 seconds) that differs from the period (32 ms) during which the lighting state of the LED in the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) changes and the period of one cycle (256 ms). This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the reserved icon is performing a performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

In addition, the effect of the pending icon changing between the first and second positions during its performance (swinging and rotating) is repeatedly performed at a cycle (2 or 3 seconds) different from the blinking cycle (1 second) of the LED on the sub-first change display 81 (sub-second change display 82). This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the pending icon is performing a performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

In addition, during the change performance, the performance pattern 70a executes one of several types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). This improves the performance effect of the change performance, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on which of the multiple types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the performance pattern 70a performs during the change performance, the time until the performance pattern 70a scrolls (update change) may differ. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the change performance and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the performance pattern 70a executes any of the multiple types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) during the change performance, the start order of the pre-change actions and scrolling display (update change) of the three performance patterns 70a may be the same (left → center → right).

In addition, depending on which of the multiple types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the performance pattern 70a performs in the changing performance, the start order of the pre-change actions and scroll display (update change) of the three performance patterns 70a may be varied (floating display: left → center → right, enlarged display: center → left → right, reduced display: right → center → left, etc.).

In addition, multiple types of pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a may be provided for each performance mode so that the likelihood of winning is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the reserved icon may be limited to one type for each performance mode, so that there is no likelihood of winning.

(Examples of each production mode)
An example of a display effect (pre-stop operation, etc.) for each effect mode will be described with reference to Fig. 71. Note that a description of parts that overlap with Fig. 70 will be omitted.

In presentation mode A (normal gameplay state), the presentation pattern 70a in the first mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop action indicating that this scrolling display is ending, the character image CG of the presentation pattern 70a is displayed shaking its head at the pattern stopping position (see Figure 79) for 0.9 seconds.

In presentation mode B (normal gameplay state), the presentation pattern 70a in the second mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop operation before this scrolling display (update operation) ends, the presentation pattern 70a is reduced in size at the pattern stop position and then displayed normally for 0.5 seconds.

In presentation mode C (normal gameplay state), the third mode presentation pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop action before this scrolling (update and change) ends, the presentation pattern 70a rotates for 0.7 seconds at the pattern stop position.

In presentation mode D (probable chance game state), the fourth mode presentation pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the change presentation, but as a pre-stop action indicating the end of this scrolling display, the pattern floats upward from the stop position and then bounces downward for 0.4 seconds. Note that the bounce display has a similar presentation to the floating display described above, but the movement speed of the presentation pattern 70a is faster and the height at which it floats is lower in the bound display.

In presentation mode E (high probability game state), the presentation pattern 70a in the fourth mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop action indicating that the scrolling display is about to end, the presentation pattern 70a rotates (small) for 0.4 seconds at the pattern stop position.

In presentation mode F (time-saving play state), the fourth mode presentation pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop action indicating that the scrolling display is ending, a bound (small) display that floats upward from the pattern stopping position is displayed for 0.4 seconds.

In this way, in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a executes one of several types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking to normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, bouncing (small) display). This can improve the presentation effect of the variable presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the time until the performance pattern 70a stops may differ depending on which of the multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking to normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, bouncing (small) display) the performance pattern 70a performs during the variable performance. This can improve the performance effect of the variable performance and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the performance pattern 70a executes multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking → normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, bouncing (small) display) in the variable performance, the order of pre-stop actions and temporary stops of the three performance patterns 70a may be made the same (left → right → center).

In addition, depending on which of the multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking → normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, bouncing (small) display) the performance pattern 70a executes in the variable performance, the order of pre-stop actions and temporary stops of the three performance patterns 70a may be made different (head shaking display: left → right → center, rotating display: left → center → right, etc.).

In addition, multiple types of pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a may be provided for each performance mode so that the likelihood of winning is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the reserved icon may be limited to one type for each performance mode, so that there is no likelihood of winning.

(Example of displaying the number of reserved calls)
Using Figure 72, an example of the display of the number of reserved balls on the main display device 70 will be described.

First, when the number of pending calls is "0" and a customer is waiting, as shown in FIG. 72(a), no icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C, and "0" is displayed in the first pending call number display area SA and the second pending call number display area SB.

After that, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first reserved number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. 72(b), the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in one frame of non-animation in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the reserved icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the performance action (swinging action) starts from there.

Then, when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the display of the first special pattern begins to change, as shown in FIG. 72(c), a 20-frame animation begins in which the reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts (decreases, changes) toward the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decreases) to "0" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the reserved icon HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (swaying action) continues.

After that, when the shifting display of the hold icon HI ends, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a larger size than the hold icon HI and in an opaque state, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first reserved number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. 72(e), a 20-frame animation is started in which the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a performance operation (swaying operation) so as to be synchronized with the other icons in the normal display mode (the icon TI in this case), and is enlarged from a translucent extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image. In other words, when the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the reserved icon HI may not start displaying from the first position (initial position).

Then, when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is finished, as shown in FIG. 72(f), the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first reserved number becomes "2", and it is decided that an icon change effect will be executed, as shown in FIG. 72(g), a 20-frame animation is started in which the reserved icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "2" in one non-animated frame. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a performance operation (rotation operation) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (the icon TI in this case) from the first position (initial position) in which the specific part is located at the top, and is enlarged and displayed from a semi-transparent extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the first special mode (blue) is finished, as shown in FIG. 72(h), the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the first special mode (blue) is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (rotation action) continues.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and stops, a 20-frame animation starts in which the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, as shown in FIG. 72(i). At this time, the icon TI that is erased becomes gradually more transparent and is erased, accompanied by an effect image, but even during the erased display, a performance action (shaking action) is performed.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol begins, as shown in FIG. 72(j), a 20-frame animation is started in which the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decreased) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the two reserved icons HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (swaying action, rotation action) continues.

Then, when the shifting display of the two hold icons HI ends, as shown in FIG. 72(k), the hold icon HI in the normal display mode that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed as the icon TI in a size larger than the hold icon HI and opaque, and the performance action (swaying action) continues. Also, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode that was displayed in the second display section of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed in the first display section in the normal size and opaque, and changes to the second special display mode (a type of special icon) by the icon change performance, but the performance action (spinning action) continues.

In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first reserved number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. 72(l), a 20-frame animation is started in which a reserved icon HI in normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased) in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased) to "2" in one non-animated frame. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a presentation operation (shaking operation) so as to be synchronized with the other icons in normal display mode (the icon TI in this case), and is enlarged from a translucent tiny size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

After that, when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode ends, as shown in FIG. 72(m), the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

In this state, when the first special symbol stops changing and stops, a 20-frame animation starts in which the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, as shown in FIG. 72(n). At this time, the icon TI that is erased becomes gradually more transparent and is erased, accompanied by an effect image, but even during the erased display, a performance action (shaking action) is performed.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol begins, as shown in FIG. 72(o), a 20-frame animation is started in which the two reserved icons HI that were being displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B during the performance operation are shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decreased) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the two reserved icons HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) continues.

At this time, if the conditions for switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B are met, as shown in FIG. 72(p), a blocking image (blackout image, whiteout image, etc.) is displayed on the entire screen of the main display device 70, and while the pending numbers in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB remain visible, visibility of the icons in the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C is restricted.

Then, in the rear layer of the occlusion image, as shown in FIG. 72(q), the display mode and presentation action (rotation action) of the icon TI are maintained, and the hold icon HI is switched to a hold icon HI in a normal display mode corresponding to presentation mode B. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the presentation action (swinging action) starts from there.

Then, when the occlusion image is erased, as shown in FIG. 72(r), it becomes possible to see the hold icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon TI in the second special display mode displayed in the icon display area 70C.

When multiple hold icons are displayed in the normal display mode, the device performs a presentation operation to synchronize multiple hold icons in the normal display mode, just as it performs a presentation operation to synchronize the hold icon in the normal display mode and the icon in the normal display mode.

In addition, while the above explanation mainly focuses on examples of hold display in presentation mode A, the display format of the hold icon and the operational presentation format differ in other presentation modes, but the number of holds is basically displayed in a similar manner (including when switching presentation modes).

The first feature of the presentation examples in Figures 70 to 72 is that when the number of reserved balls increases (changing from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the non-animated increase display of the reserved numbers and reserved icons is executed in the shortest possible time of one frame. By doing this, the change presentation (decreasing display of reserved numbers and reserved icons) can be performed immediately without dragging on, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A second feature of the examples of effects in Figures 70 to 72 is that when the reserved number decreases (changing from "1" to "0"), the reserved number is displayed as being decreased without animation (1 frame), and the reserved icon is animated (20 frames) to change (display the decrease) (starting at the same frame update timing). By doing this, the player can be sure that the reserved number has decreased, making the game more interesting. Note that the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the decrease in the reserved number starts may be earlier (for example, one frame before) than the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the change in the reserved icon to the reserved icon starts (display of the reserved icon shifting to the reserved icon).

A third feature of the examples of effects in Figures 70 to 72 is that the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the decrease in the reserved numbers is completed is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the change in the reserved icon to the icon in question (the display of the reserved icon shifting to a reserved icon) is completed. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the reserved number has decreased due to the reserved number while still presenting the change in the reserved number, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Note that the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the decrease in the reserved number is completed may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier) than the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the change in the reserved icon to the icon in question (the display of the reserved icon shifting to a reserved icon) is completed.

A fourth feature of the examples of effects in Figures 70 to 72 is that, if the reserved number increases while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the reserved number is displayed without animation (1 frame) and the reserved icon is displayed with animation (20 frames) (starting at the same frame update timing). By doing this, the player can be sure that the reserved number has increased, making the game more interesting. Note that the timing at which the reserved number display starts (frame update timing) and ends (frame update timing) may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier) than the timing at which the reserved icon display starts (frame update timing).

A fifth feature of the examples of presentation in Figures 70 to 72 is that the timing at which the display of the increase in the reserved numbers is completed (frame update timing) is earlier than the timing at which the additional display (increasing display) of the reserved icons is completed (frame update timing). By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the reserved number has increased due to the reserved number while still presenting the appearance of a change in the reserved number, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A sixth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 70 to 72 is that when the number of reserved balls increases during the variable display of special symbols (variable presentation), additional display (increased display) of reserved icons is executed for a longer period (longer number of frames) compared to when the number of reserved balls increases while waiting for customers. By doing this, it is possible to reliably let the player know that the number of reserved balls has increased, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A seventh feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that the presentation operation mode (operation while expanding) when the display of the increasing number of reserved icons begins (display start) is different (partly different) from the presentation operation mode (operation while maintaining size) after the display of the increasing number of reserved icons is completed (display start). By doing this, the player can understand that the number of reserved icons has increased, making the game more interesting. Note that instead of only some of the operations being different at the start of the display of the increasing number of reserved icons and after the display of the increasing number is completed, all of the operations may be different.

The eighth feature of the examples of presentation in Figures 70 to 72 is that the display mode at the start of the display of the increase in reserved icons (semi-transparent) is different (partially different) from the display mode after the display of the increase in reserved icons is completed (opaque). By doing this, the player can understand that the reserved icons have increased, making the game more interesting. Note that instead of just changing the transparency between the start of the display of the increase in reserved icons and the end of the display, the shape, etc. may also be different.

A ninth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that, during the variable display of the special pattern (presentation pattern), it is possible to execute a presentation action (swinging action, rotation action, etc.) in which the reserved icon and the icon repeatedly change between a first position and a second position. In this way, the presentation effect can be improved by the reserved icon and the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A tenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that in the presentation action (swinging action, rotation action) in which the reserved icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first and second positions, the time it takes to change from the first position to the second position is constant every time. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the reserved icon and the icon becoming difficult to see, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that if the control load of the drawing process is large when the reserved icon and the icon change from the first position to the second position, causing a processing slowdown (one frame's worth of drawing cannot be completed), the time it takes to change from the first position to the second position will not be constant only at that time, but will be approximately constant.

An eleventh feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that, during the variable display (variable presentation) of the special pattern, multiple icons (pending icons, and the pending icon and the icon in question) displayed in the normal display mode perform presentation actions in synchronization. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the presentation actions of the icons and enhance the presentation effect, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game. The timing at which the presentation action of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new start winning is synchronized with the presentation actions of the other pending icons may be at the start of display, a predetermined time after the start of display, at the start of shift display, or at the completion of shift display.

A twelfth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 70 to 72 is that when a special symbol (presentation symbol) is displayed in a stopped state, the icon is erased, but the reserved icon continues to perform a presentation action repeatedly from the time the special symbol (presentation symbol) is displayed in a stopped state until the next variable display (variable presentation) begins. By doing this, the reserved icon lets the player know that the number of reserved balls is not "0", which makes the game more interesting.

A thirteenth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 70 to 72 is that when a special symbol (presentation symbol) is displayed and stopped, the transparency of the presentation symbol does not change, but the transparency of the icon increases before it is erased. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt when the icon is erased, allowing the icon to be erased naturally, making the game more interesting.

A fourteenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that the time (scale) of one cycle of the presentation action of the reserved icon (the icon in question) is the same in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and between presentation modes C to F). This makes it possible to make the presentation action of the reserved icon (the icon in question) easier to see, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A fifteenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that the cycle in which the reserved icon (the icon) changes from the first position to the second position and then back to the first position is the same in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and between presentation modes C to F). This makes it easier to see the presentation of the reserved icon (the icon), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A 16th feature of the examples of presentation in Figures 70 to 72 is that in the reserved number display area, the size (area) of the area in which the reserved number is displayed does not change depending on whether the reserved number increases or decreases, but in the reserved icon display area, the size (area) of the area in which the reserved icon is displayed changes depending on whether the reserved number increases or decreases (if there is a single reserved number, the reserved icon is displayed in a first area, and if there are multiple reserved numbers, the reserved icon is displayed in a second area larger than the first area). This allows the player to recognize the reserved number while also being able to understand the increase or decrease in the reserved number, making the game more interesting.

A 17th feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that the reserved icon displayed in the normal display mode (normal icon) can repeatedly execute a presentation action of changing between the first and second positions in a first cycle (2 or 3 seconds), and the reserved icon displayed in the special display mode (special icon), which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal display mode, can repeatedly execute a presentation action of changing between the first and second positions in a second cycle (2.5 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. This makes it easier to distinguish between the reserved icon in the normal display mode and the reserved icon in the special display mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 18th feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that the special symbol can update (scroll, switch) the number image from 1 to 9 in a first cycle (0.9 seconds), and the reserved icon can change between the first and second positions in a second cycle (2 or 3 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. This prevents the player from mistaking the update of the special symbol and the presentation of the reserved icon for each other, making the game more interesting.

A 19th feature of the presentation examples in Figures 70 to 72 is that the number of reserved balls is displayed decreasing as the display of the special pattern begins, and while the reserved numbers displayed in the reserved ball number display area do not move during this decrease, the reserved icons displayed in the reserved ball icon display area do move (before the reserved ball number is decreased, the reserved icons are displayed in a second area larger than the first area, and after the reserved ball number is decreased, the reserved icons are displayed in the first area). This allows the player to recognize the number of reserved balls while also understanding the decrease in the reserved ball number, making the game more interesting.

A twentieth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 70 to 72 is that the movement direction (downward) of the update action of the presentation pattern (special pattern) is different from the movement direction (left and right, etc.) of the presentation action (swaying action) of the reserved icon. By doing this, it becomes easier to distinguish and recognize the update fluctuation of the presentation pattern (special pattern) and the presentation action (swaying action) of the reserved icon, which enhances the presentation effect of the change presentation and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the number of reserved balls increases (changing from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the reserved icon is displayed as an increment with one frame of non-animation, but it may be displayed as an increment with multiple frames of animation (e.g., five frames) so that it continues longer than the increase in the reserved number. This makes it easier for players to grasp the increase in the number of reserved balls, making the game more enjoyable.

The reserved icon is also designed to perform a presentation action while the special symbol (presentation symbol) is stopped, but the reserved icon may stop its presentation action while the special symbol (presentation symbol) is stopped, and resume its presentation action after the reserved icon shifts as the next special symbol begins to change (the number of reserved symbols decreases). In this way, the player can know whether or not a special symbol is being changed based on whether or not the reserved icon is performing a presentation action, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when resuming the presentation action of the reserved icon after the reserved icon has been shifted, the reserved icon may be made to resume the presentation action from its initial position at the position after the shift (reserved icon display area, the icon display area). In this way, it is possible to impress upon the player that a new variable display of the special pattern has begun, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the special symbol (performance symbol) is frozen and the icon is erased, the icon continues to perform the performance action, but the performance action may be terminated by the frozen display of the special symbol (performance symbol). In this way, it is possible to reduce the load related to display control.

In addition, multiple icons displayed in normal display mode (pending icons, and pending icons and the icon in question) are configured to perform their performance in sync, but rather than performing their performance in perfect sync, they may be configured to perform their performance in approximately sync. Note that the timing at which the performance of a pending icon displayed in normal display mode based on a new start winning approximately syncs with the performance of other pending icons may be when the display starts, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display starts, when the shift display starts, or when the shift display ends.

(Example of when a variable performance starts from a waiting state)
Using Figures 73 to 75, we will explain a specific example of when the variable performance starts from the waiting for customers state.

Figure 73 is a timing chart when the variable presentation starts from the waiting state, and Figures 74 to 75 are diagrams showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 73. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 73, the machine is in a customer waiting state in which the special symbol change display has not been performed since the power was turned on, and the performance mode A and volume value "3" are set. At this time, the first special symbol display 60 displays the initial symbol when the power is turned on, which is a losing special symbol (only the rightmost LED is lit), and the main display device 70 displays a change standby screen waiting for the execution of the change performance. Specifically, the mode A background image is scrolling horizontally (performance operation), and the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are in a state where the initial symbol when the power is turned on, "135", is displayed frozen (see FIG. 74(a)). Note that the mode A background image has been scrolling horizontally since the timing when the change standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at the timing T1 in FIG. 73, when the up or down button on the directional pad 19 is operated to adjust the volume, a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "3" is displayed on the main display device 70, partially overlapping the front side of the right performance pattern 70a, and a confirmation sound for the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 74 (b)).

When the up button on the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume at the timing T2 in Fig. 73, the volume value changes from "3" to "4." At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating a volume value of "4," and the audio output device 9 outputs a confirmation sound (for 0.5 seconds) for the volume corresponding to the volume value "4" (see Fig. 74(c)).

After that, at the timing T3 in FIG. 73, when the changeover switch 22 is operated to lower the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3." At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating a volume value of "3." However, because of the volume adjustment by the changeover switch 22, the audio output device 9 does not output a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume value of "3" (see FIG. 74(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 73, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 74 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 73, when the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "0" and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 74(f)).

Furthermore, since a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83 display "1", a non-animated hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the output of the first winning sound begins (see Figure 74 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in Figure 73 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin (see Figure 75 (g)).

The hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a starts to float as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ starts to update and change (scroll display, switch display). Furthermore, volume adjustment and light adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), the volume value image OG is erased, and audible output of the changing BGM starts from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 75(g)).

In addition to starting the audible output of the change BGM when the floating display of the performance pattern 70a begins as a pre-change action, a change start sound (a start sound output for each change, a start sound as a jackpot announcement, etc.) may also be output.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 73 (at the start of the third cycle fluctuation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 75(h)), and at the timing of T8 in FIG. 73 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the reserved icon HI ends and the icon is displayed as TI (white icon), after which the scrolling display (updated fluctuation) of the performance patterns 70a begins (see FIG. 75(i)), and at the timing of T9 in FIG. 73, high-speed fluctuation of all the performance patterns 70a begins (see FIG. 75(j)). If the fluctuation start sound is to be output, it is recommended that the output of the fluctuation start sound ends at this timing (after the output of the winning sound ends).

If the performance control board 130 does not receive the start command properly while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is executed, but the variable performance is not executed, so the volume value image OG is not erased and the display period is extended, and the state where volume adjustment and light adjustment are possible using the cross key 19 is maintained.

In addition, when a light quantity value image is displayed by operating the left or right button of the cross key 19 instead of the volume value image OG, the operation is basically the same as when the volume value image OG is displayed.

In this way, when the variable presentation starts during the waiting state (the period during which volume and light intensity adjustments can be made using the cross key 19), volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted for a specified period (1 second). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of players missing the important aspect of the start of the variable presentation because they are concentrating on adjusting the volume or light intensity, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, if the variable presentation starts while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased) even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. Therefore, the variable presentation is not hindered by the volume value image OG, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the volume value is adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed. However, if the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed regardless of whether the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 or the changeover switch 22. This allows the player to grasp the newly set volume value, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a performs pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarging display, reducing display) before starting the scrolling display (updating display), but the special pattern TZ starts updating (scrolling display, switching display) without performing pre-variation actions. Therefore, the pre-variation actions of the performance pattern 70a can enhance the performance effect of the variable performance, and the special pattern TZ can let the player know that the variable display of the special pattern has started, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable presentation, the special pattern TZ starts updating (scrolling display, switching display) before the presentation pattern 70a starts scrolling (updating and changing). This allows the player to understand that the special pattern TZ has started to change the display, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the reserved display (reserved icon and reserved number on the main display device 70, and LED reserved display on the sub-1 reserved display device 83 and the sub-2 reserved display device 84) is updated in response to the start of the display of the changing special symbols. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the variable presentation, the pending icon starts to shift display (change to the icon TI) before the presentation pattern 70a starts scrolling display (update change). This allows the player to notice early on that the pending memory has decreased, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the display pattern 70a starts scrolling (updating) during the variable performance, the shift display of the reserved icon (changing to the icon TI) ends. This makes it easier for the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the variable performance (scrolling display of the display pattern 70a) is performed as the reserved memory is reduced, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even before the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling (updating and changing) (while the effect pattern 70a is stopped and in pre-changing motion), the reserved icon HI performs a performance action (swinging action, rotating action). This makes it possible to improve the performance effect while appealing to the player that there is reserved memory, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the scrolling display (update change) of the effect pattern 70a starts, the icon TI performs an effect action (swinging action, rotating action). This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the icon TI and to appeal to the player that the change effect will start, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, even when the pre-changing action (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the performance pattern 70a starts, the background image (background image corresponding to each performance mode, zone background image described later) performs a performance action (horizontal scrolling, scene change, action of the character included in the background image, etc.). Therefore, the effect of the changing performance can be enhanced together with the performance pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a starts, the background image (background image corresponding to each performance mode, zone background image described later) performs a performance action (horizontal scrolling, scene change, character action included in the background image, etc.). Therefore, the performance effect of the changing performance can be enhanced together with the performance pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable performance starts from the waiting state, the audible output of the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each performance mode) starts when the pre-variation action (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the performance pattern 70a starts. This allows the player to recognize that the variable performance has started, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, when the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a starts, the changing BGM (BGM corresponding to each performance mode) is already being audibly output. Therefore, the performance effect of the changing performance can be improved even before the scrolling display of the performance pattern 70a starts, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a in the change performance starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the change of the special pattern (after the start timing of the first cycle change and after the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This makes it possible to add depth to the game performance and increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the change display of the special pattern and the start timing of the scrolling display of the performance pattern 70a, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the special pattern in a varying manner, the scrolling display (update variation) of the performance pattern 70a in the varying performance begins at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variation (after the start timing of the second or third cycle variation and before the start timing of the fourth cycle variation). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variation with the start timing of the scrolling display of the performance pattern 70a, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern varying display for the start timing of the scrolling display of the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, after the first cycle of change is completed, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance symbol 70a begins. Therefore, by gradually starting the display of the changing special symbol and the scrolling display of the performance symbol 70a, the performance effect of the game can be enhanced, making it possible to increase interest in the game. In addition, the player can be informed that the special symbol is the main symbol and the performance symbol 70a is the secondary symbol, making it possible for the player to recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the update and change (scroll display, switching display) of the special pattern TZ starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the changing special pattern (after the start timing of the first cycle change and before the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the display change of the special pattern and the start timing of the update and change (scroll display, switching display) of the special pattern TZ, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern, the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the special pattern TZ starts at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cyclic change (before the end timing of the first cyclic change and before the start timing of the second cyclic change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cyclic change and the start timing of the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the special pattern TZ, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern display change for the start of the special pattern TZ update change (scroll display, switch display).

In addition, after the first display change in the cyclical variation when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the update variation (scrolling display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ begins, that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the first display change in the cyclical variation with the start timing of the update variation (scrolling display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden. Also, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the master and the special symbol TZ is the slave, making it possible for the player to recognize the specifications of the game machine.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbol changes, the pending display (the pending icon and pending number on the main display device 70, and the LED pending display on the first sub-hold display 83 and the second sub-hold display 84) starts updating at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change (after the start timing of the first cycle change and before the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to strictly match the start timing of the special symbol change display and the start timing of the pending display update, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern changes, the pending display (the pending icon and pending number on the main display device 70, and the LED pending display on the first sub-pending display 83 and the second sub-pending display 84) starts updating at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes (before the end timing of the first cycle change and before the start timing of the second cycle change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes with the start timing of the pending display update, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern change display for the start timing of the pending display update.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle change when the special pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61), the pending display (the pending icon and pending number on the main display device 70, and the LED pending display on the first sub-pending display 83 and the second sub-pending display 84) starts to be updated, that is, the two are intentionally not synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. In addition, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the start of the display of the special pattern and the timing of the update start of the pending display, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden. In addition, the player can be impressed with the flow that the pending display was updated because the display of the special pattern was started, making it possible for the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the special pattern in a variable manner, the display of the reserved icon HI starts shifting at a different timing (after the start of the first cycle variation and before the end of the first cycle variation) from the start of the first cycle variation, in other words, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows for depth to be added to the game presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start of the display of the variable special pattern and the start of the display of the reserved icon HI shifting, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern changes, the shift display of the reserved icon HI starts at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes (before the start timing of the second cycle change and before the end timing of the second cycle change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes with the start timing of the shift display of the reserved icon HI, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern change display for the start of the shift display of the reserved icon HI.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, the shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon HI ends after the first cycle of change ends. This allows the game presentation to have depth, making it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, the player can be impressed with the flow of events in which the reserved icon HI shifts because the display of changing special symbols has begun, allowing the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the reserved icon HI starts to shift to the corresponding icon TI at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (after the start timing of the first cycle variation and before the end timing of the first cycle variation), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the display of the variable special symbol and the start timing of the display of the reserved icon HI shift to the corresponding icon TI, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern changes, the reserved icon HI starts to shift to the corresponding icon TI at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle change (before the start timing of the second cycle change and before the end timing of the second cycle change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle change and the start timing of the reserved icon HI shifting to the corresponding icon TI, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern change display for the start of the reserved icon HI shifting to the corresponding icon TI.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, the display of the reserved icon HI shifting to the icon TI ends after the first display change in the cyclic change is completed. This allows the game presentation to have depth, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, the player can be impressed with the flow of events in which the display of the changing special symbol has started and the reserved icon HI has shifted to the icon TI, making it possible for the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the special symbol changes, the audible output of the specified game sounds (changing BGM, change start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change (before the start timing of the first cycle change, after the start timing of the first cycle change), meaning that the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the special symbol change display and the start timing of the audible output of the specified game sounds, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern variations, the audible output of the specified game sounds (variation background music, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations (before the start timing of the second cycle variations and before the end timing of the second cycle variations). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations with the start timing of the audible output of the specified game sounds, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern variation display for the start of the audible output of the specified game sounds.

In addition, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) starts at a different timing (before and after the start of the first cycle variation) from the start of the first cycle variation when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the varying special patterns, meaning that the two start without intentionally being synchronized. This adds depth to the game presentation and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start of the varying special pattern display and the start of the audible output of the performance BGM, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern variations, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations (before the start timing of the second cycle variation and before the end timing of the second cycle variation). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations with the start timing of the audible output of the performance BGM, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern variation display for the start of the audible output of the performance BGM.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbols in a variable manner, the background image (background image for each display mode, zone background image) starts displaying (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) at a different timing from the start of the first cycle of variation (when the display of the variable waiting screen starts after the power is turned on, before the start of the first cycle of variation, at the end of the customer waiting demo presentation), meaning that the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start of the display of the variable special symbols and the start of the background image presentation, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbol changes, the background image (background image for each display mode, zone background image) performance operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes (when the display of the change waiting screen starts after the power is turned on, before the start timing of the second cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo performance). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes with the start timing of the background image performance operation, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special symbol change display for the start of the background image performance operation.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the changing special symbols, the background image (background image for each performance mode, zone background image) is displayed (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) before the first cycle of change begins (when the display of the change waiting screen begins after the power is turned on). This allows for depth to be added to the game presentation, making it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, for example, it is possible to prevent players from feeling bored while waiting for customers before the changing display of the special symbols begins, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-change action in the change performance (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the number of cycle changes executed by the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) before the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling (updated display) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance depending on the type of pre-change action, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-change action in the change performance (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the number of display changes in the cyclic change executed by the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) before the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling (updated display) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance depending on the type of pre-change action, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when a variable performance starts while the volume value image OG is being displayed, rather than hiding the volume value image OG, the volume value image OG may be changed from being displayed (set) in an upper layer of the performance pattern 70a to being displayed (set) in a lower layer of the performance pattern 70a, so that it is displayed overlapping the rear of the performance pattern 70a, thereby limiting visibility of the volume value image OG.

(Example of a winning start during a variable performance)
Using Figures 76 to 77, we will explain specific examples of when a starting win occurs during a variable performance.

Figure 76 is a timing chart for when a start win occurs during a variable presentation, and Figure 77 is a diagram showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 76. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 76, the first reserved number is in a state of "0" and the first special pattern display 60 is displaying a change (Yth cycle change from the start of the change) of the first special pattern and the sub-first change display 81 is displaying a change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "0". Also, in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display), and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the change BGM is being audibly output (see FIG. 77(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 76, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 77(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 76, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83 display "1." In addition, the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to additionally display the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode in animation, and the first winning sound starts to be output (see FIG. 77(c)).

After that, at timing T3 in Figure 76, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the additional display in the animation of the pending icon HI, the additional display in the animation of the pending icon HI ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends (see Figure 77 (d)).

In this way, if a game ball enters the start hole while the special symbol is being displayed, the additional display of the animation of the reserved icon HI is executed over multiple cycles of change. This allows the player to accurately understand that a game ball has entered the start hole, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, if the game ball enters the start hole while the special symbol is being displayed, the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output over multiple cycles of the change. This allows the player to accurately understand that the game ball has entered the start hole, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole during the variable display of a special symbol and a winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without being reduced. This prevents the variable presentation from being hindered by the winning sound, making the game more interesting.

(Example of continuous variable performance)
Using Figures 78 to 81, we will explain a specific example of executing consecutive variable effects.

Figure 78 is a timing chart for executing variable effects continuously, and Figures 79 to 81 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in Figure 78. Note that the explanation here is for effect mode A, but the explanations for effect modes B to F are omitted as they are basically the same.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 78, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 60 is displaying the change (Nth cycle change from the start of the change) and the sub-first change display 81 is displaying the change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped, the central performance pattern 70a is scrolling (updating and changing) at a low speed, and the special pattern TZ is updating (scrolling display, switching display). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays two reserved icons HI in the normal display mode, and the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is being audibly output (see FIG. 79(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 78 (the start of the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), the left performance pattern 70a, which has been scrolled (updated) and fluctuates temporarily, starts to temporarily stop (see FIG. 79(b)). Then, when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, and the character of the left performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking head) (see FIG. 79(c)).

Note that the "pre-stop action" may refer to any effect that is performed between the provisional stop and the stopped display.
In addition, the pre-stop action may be an action that is performed immediately before a temporary stop, not necessarily after the temporary stop.

Next, at the timing of T1 to T2 in Fig. 78 (the start of the cycle fluctuation after the N+1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), the right performance pattern 70a, which has been scrolled (updated fluctuation), starts to temporarily stop (see Fig. 79(b) to (c)). Then, when the right performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, and the character of the right performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head) (see Fig. 79(b) to (c)).

Next, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 78 (the start of the N+16th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), the middle performance pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated fluctuation) starts to temporarily stop (see FIG. 79(c)). Then, when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, and the character of the middle performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking head), and all the performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 80(c)-(d)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 78, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 78, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the display of the changes on the sub-first change display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the display of the performance pattern 70a ("523") and the special pattern TZ ("523") starts stopping (see FIG. 80(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 78, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 80(f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 78, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol display 60 begins (see FIG. 81(g)).

Then, at the timing of T7 in Figure 78 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "1", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 begins (see Figure 81 (h)).

The two reserved icons HI displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B start to shift (decrease) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-change action, and the special pattern TZ starts to update (scroll, switch) (see FIG. 81(h)).

After that, at timing T8 in Figure 78 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the floating display of the performance pattern 70a, a pre-reading effect performance (start-up light-emitting performance) that is executed only for this fluctuation performance will start, and a blue light-emitting effect image EF will be displayed around the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 81 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 78 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the two reserved icons HI ends, the first reserved icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, after which the scrolling display (update change) of the effect pattern 70a begins (see FIG. 81(i)).

In this way, the change BGM that has been audibly output before the start of the pre-change operation (floating display, enlarging display, shrinking display) of the performance pattern 70a (while the performance pattern 70a is stopped) is audibly output continuously (without interruption) while the pre-change operation is being performed. This makes it possible to create a performance that resembles a combination of multiple change performances, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when an icon change effect is executed at the start of a variation effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the display mode of the icon is not changed from the start of the icon shift display, but is changed when (after) the icon shift is completed. This makes it possible to highlight the change in the icon display mode and enhance the presentation effect of the icon change effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (such as the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) ends, the special pattern and the performance pattern 70a are displayed as stopped. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (such as the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) ends, the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of variation presentation pattern, when the presentation pattern 70a that temporarily stops first (e.g., the presentation pattern 70a on the left) is performing a pre-stop presentation, the presentation pattern 70a that temporarily stops next (e.g., the presentation pattern 70a on the right) may be performing a pre-stop presentation or performing an update variation (scroll display). This can enhance the presentation effect of the variation presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that the presentation modes of the pre-stop presentations of the presentation pattern 70a that temporarily stops first and the presentation pattern 70a that temporarily stops next are the same, but may be different. In addition, in the case of a shortened variation, the pre-stop presentation may not be performed.

In addition, after the pre-stop performance (such as the character of performance pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) ends in the variable performance, the display (update variation) of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 (sub-second variable display 82) ends. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (such as the character of effect pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) has ended during the variable effect, the disappearance display of the icon begins. This makes the progress of the game effect clearer, making it possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in the variable presentation, after the pre-stop presentation (such as the character of presentation pattern 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) ends, presentation pattern 70a stops and then the disappearance display of the icon ends. This makes the progress of the game presentation clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop performance (such as the character of performance pattern 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) ends in the change performance, the change display (update change) of performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and sub-first change display 81 (sub-second change display 82) ends, and then the disappearance display of the icon ends. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a is displayed stopped after executing the pre-stop performance (the character shaking its head), but the special pattern TZ is displayed stopped without executing the pre-stop performance. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance is enhanced by the performance pattern 70a, while the special pattern TZ allows the player to understand the end of the variable display of the special pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a performs a pre-stop action (the character shakes its head) before being displayed as stopped, but even during the pre-stop action or while the presentation pattern 70a is stopped, the background image (the background image corresponding to each presentation mode) continues to perform the presentation action. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the pre-stop action or after the presentation pattern 70a has stopped, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the variable presentation, after the pre-stop presentation (such as the character of presentation pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) has ended, the presentation pattern 70a or special pattern TZ is displayed stopped, but even while the presentation pattern 70a or special pattern TZ is stopped, the background image (the background image corresponding to each presentation mode) continues to perform the presentation action. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the presentation pattern 70a or special pattern TZ has stopped, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a predetermined manner (temporary stop display, stopped display) at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclic fluctuation (before the start timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, before the end timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, after the start timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclic fluctuation) when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the fluctuation of the special pattern. This makes it possible to add depth to the game performance and increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, which makes it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbol in a varying manner, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the final cycle of variation ends. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops and then the display of the special symbol variations ends, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the special symbol TZ is displayed stationary at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical fluctuation when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the fluctuating special symbol (after the start timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, and after the timing of the special symbol being displayed stationary). This makes it possible to widen the range of effects related to the stationary display of the special symbol TZ, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, the reserved icon HI is caused to perform a performance action (swinging action, rotating action) while the variable performance is being performed, and the performance action of the reserved icon HI continues even after the end of the final cycle of variation when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the variable special pattern. Therefore, the reserved icon HI lets the player know that the number of reserved balls is not "0", and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special pattern has stopped being displayed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical fluctuation when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the varying special symbols (after the start timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, and after the stop display timing of the special symbol). This makes it possible to widen the range of effects related to the disappearance display of the icon TI, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends after the cycle of change ends. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the icon TI is erased because the special symbol has stopped being displayed, and this makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays a special symbol, the audible output of a specified game sound (variation background music, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) that was started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation performance) can be ended at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, after the end timing of the last cycle variation, after the stop display timing of the special symbol). This makes it possible to expand the range of performances when the specified game sound is audibly output, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays a special symbol variation, it is possible to end the audible output of a specified game sound (such as a temporary stop sound) that was started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation performance) before the cycle variation ends. This makes it possible to prevent the impression of the previous variation display from being dragged onto the next variation display, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, it is possible to continue to audibly output a specified game sound (changing BGM) that has been output before the last cycle of change even after the cycle of change has ended (during the stopped display). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol has stopped being displayed, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, the background image presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) that was output before the final cycle of change continues to be executed even after the cycle of change ends (during the stopped display). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and increases the interest of the game.

In addition, the look-ahead effects (look-ahead zone effects, look-ahead effect effects) that are executed when the variable effects begin are executed after the first cycle of fluctuations in the case of the variable display of special symbols ends. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the look-ahead effects are executed because the variable display of special symbols has begun, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of when the stop command cannot be received properly and a variable performance starts)
A specific example of a case where a stop command cannot be received normally and a variable performance starts will be described using Figures 82 to 83. Note that, although (a) to (c) are omitted in Figure 83, they are the same as Figures 79 (a) to (c).

Figure 82 is a timing chart for when the stop command cannot be received normally and a variable presentation starts, and Figure 83 is a diagram showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 82. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T2 in Figure 82 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T2 in Figure 78, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timings from T3 onwards.

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 82, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80(d)).

However, since the performance control board 130 was unable to receive the stop command properly, the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, etc., which should have started at timing T4 in Figure 82, did not start, and the variable display period on the sub-first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ were extended.

Next, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 82, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "0", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see FIG. 83(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6 in Figure 82 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will start from the beginning (off) (see Figure 83 (f)).

The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased without animation, and the reserved icon HI displayed in the first display section starts to shift (decrease) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped as the performance starts is displayed in the pattern stop position for just a moment, and then starts to rise as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ that was scrolling (updating) continues to scroll without stopping (see FIG. 83(f)).

After that, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 82 (during the fourth cycle change), the shift display of the pending icon HI ends and the icon is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). After that, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a starts (see FIG. 83 (g)).

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variable performance starts, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends. However, when the third command (next start command) is received while the variable performance has not ended, the current variable performance is forcibly ended and the next variable performance starts. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (next start command) is received, the variable performance ends. In other words, in both cases where the second command is received and where it is not received, the previous variable performance ends while the next variable performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to properly end the previous variable performance by starting the next variable performance, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a start command is received while the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is momentarily displayed at the pattern stop position (in the same manner as if the stop command had been received normally) and then the variable performance (here, a floating display) is started. Therefore, the variable performance can be started in the same manner as if a start command had been received while the performance pattern 70a was stopped, reducing the discomfort felt by the player when the variable performance starts from a temporarily stopped state of the performance pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a start command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI that was being displayed is non-animated, that is, erased in a shorter time than the time required for an animated erase display. Therefore, when the pending icon HI next shifts into the icon display area 70C, the shift display is not impeded, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect.

If the start command is received by the performance control board 130 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormalities or noise, there may be cases where the content of the change pattern of the special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 (for example, a 13.5-second change for a normal reach) differs from the content of the change performance pattern of the change performance executed by the main display device 70 (for example, a 40-second SP reach performance). In such a case, when the special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 60, the main display device 70 will be in a state where a change performance (specifically, an SP reach performance) is being executed, and when the next start command is received in this state, the current change performance will be forcibly ended and the next change performance will be started. In this regard, the same operation applies to gaming machines that send and receive start commands but do not send and receive stop commands.

(Example of when the normal variable performance ends and the machine waits for customers)
Using Figures 84 to 86, we will explain a specific example of when the normal variable performance ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers.

Figure 84 is a timing chart for when the normal variable presentation ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers, and Figures 85 to 86 are diagrams showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 84. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 84, the first reserved number is in the state of "0", and the first special pattern display 60 displays the change (Nth cycle change from the start of the change) and the sub-first change display 81 displays the change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "0". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped, the central performance pattern 70a is scrolled (updated and changed) at a low speed, and the special pattern TZ is updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the change BGM is audibly output. In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed so that it partially overlaps the front side of the right performance pattern 70a (see FIG. 85(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in Figure 84 (during the Nth cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the central performance pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated) is temporarily stopped, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking head), and all performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (see Figure 85 (b)).

Then, at the timing T2 in FIG. 84 (during the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the down button on the cross key 19 is operated to adjust the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3." At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating a volume value of "3," and the audio output device 9 starts outputting a confirmation sound for the volume value "3" (see FIG. 85(c)).

After that, at the timing T3 in FIG. 84 (during the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 85(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 84 (midway through the N+16th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the time for the special symbol to fluctuate has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 85(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 84, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in an animated manner, and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a ("523") and the special pattern TZ ("523") starts. Furthermore, volume adjustment and light adjustment using the cross key 10 are restricted for a predetermined period of time (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the confirmation sound continues to be output (see FIG. 85(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 84, the output period of the confirmation sound has elapsed and the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 86(g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 84, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the animated disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 86(h)).

Next, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 84, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a waiting state for customers and enters a waiting period during which the special symbol is displayed stopped, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

Then, at timing T9 in FIG. 84, when a stop waiting period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the command to specify the waiting state for customers, the output of the variable BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 86(i)), and when a demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the command to specify the waiting state for customers, a waiting demo performance is started to encourage the player to play.

If the display of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) is stopped in response to the receipt of a stop command while the confirmation sound is being output, volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, but the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. The same is true when a variable performance starts; even if the execution of a variable performance starts in response to the receipt of a start command while the confirmation sound is being output, volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, but the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period has elapsed.

In addition, the audible output of the variable background music is stopped (muted) when a specified period of time has passed since the customer waiting state designation command was received, but if the customer waiting state designation command was not received correctly, the audible output of the variable background music is not stopped. For example, the audible output of the variable background music is stopped (muted) the next time a customer waiting state designation command or a jackpot game opening designation command is received.

In this way, when the performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary during a variable performance (the period during which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19), volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted for a specified period (1 second). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player missing the important aspect of the performance pattern 70a being displayed stationary because they are concentrating on adjusting the volume or light intensity, and makes the game more interesting.

When the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state while the volume value image OG is being displayed, even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased) in order to ensure the visibility of the performance pattern 70a that is displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, the visibility of the performance pattern 70a that is displayed in a stopped state is not hindered by the volume value image OG, and the player can confirm the performance pattern 70a that is displayed in a stopped state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if a variable presentation starts or the presentation pattern 70a is stopped during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is restricted, but the volume confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. This allows the player to know that the volume has been adjusted, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the normal variable performance ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers, the audible output of the variable background music continues for a specified period of time. Therefore, players are less likely to want to quit playing compared to when the audible output of the variable background music stops (is muted) immediately after the normal variable performance ends, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a performs a pre-stop operation before being displayed as stopped, but the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) continues to be executed even during the pre-stop operation and the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop operation and the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) ends, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed stopped, but even after the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed stopped, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) continues to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special pattern TZ is displayed stopped, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in normal variable performance, the performance pattern 70a performs a pre-stop action (the character shakes its head) before being displayed as stopped, but when a predetermined time has passed after the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) is stopped. Therefore, the audible output of the performance BGM is continuously played, which prevents the player from being annoyed and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a performs a pre-stop operation before being displayed as stopped, but even during the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a, the player can adjust the volume of the performance BGM being output by operating the cross key 19. This improves the convenience for the player to adjust the volume of the performance BGM, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Note that if various error notification sounds are being output during the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a, the output of the performance BGM is limited (volume reduced or muted).

When the performance pattern 70a is stopped while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG may not be hidden, but may be changed from being displayed (set) in a higher layer than the performance pattern 70a to being displayed (set) in a lower layer than the performance pattern 70a. In this way, the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap the rear of the performance pattern 70a, limiting visibility of the volume value image OG while ensuring visibility of the performance pattern 70a, allowing the player to confirm the stopped-displayed performance pattern 70a.

In addition, when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, a volume confirmation sound is output, and when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during a variable performance, the volume confirmation sound is not output. However, it is also possible to configure the volume confirmation sound not to be output when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, and to output the volume confirmation sound when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during a variable performance.

In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 whether the player is in a state waiting for customers or during a variable performance. However, the volume value image OG may be displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 while in a state waiting for customers, and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during a variable performance.

In addition, even if the display of the performance pattern 70a is stopped in response to the reception of a stop command while the confirmation sound is being output, or if the execution of a variable performance is started in response to the reception of a start command while the confirmation sound is being output, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. However, if the display of the performance pattern 70a is stopped or the execution of a variable performance is started, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. In this way, it is difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the variable start sound or variable stop sound, making the variable start sound and variable stop sound easier to hear, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Example of a case where the end of the normal variation performance is delayed due to the inability to receive the stop command properly)
Using Figures 87 to 88, we will explain a specific example of a case where the end of the normal variable performance is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally.

Figure 87 is a timing chart for when the end of the normal variable presentation is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally, and Figure 88 is a diagram showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 87. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T3 in Figure 87 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T3 in Figure 84, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timings from T4 onwards.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 87 (midway through the N+16th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the time for the special symbol to fluctuate has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed frozen on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 88(e)).

However, because the performance control board 130 was unable to receive the stop command properly, the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, etc., which should have started at timing T5 in Figure 87, did not start. As a result, the variable display period on the sub-first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the period during which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 are extended (see Figure 88 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in Figure 87, the output period of the confirmation sound has elapsed and the output of the confirmation sound ends (see Figure 88 (g)), and at the timing of T7 in Figure 87, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state and a waiting period in which the special pattern is displayed stopped is entered, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 87, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed as disappearing without animation, and the performance pattern 70a ("523") and special pattern TZ ("523") are displayed at the pattern stop position (= stopped and displayed state). Meanwhile, the state in which the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 10 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 88 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 87, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the previous operation of the cross key 19 for volume adjustment) has elapsed, the volume value image OG becomes non-displayed (see FIG. 88(i)), and at the timing of T10 in FIG. 87, when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 88(j)), and when a further predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demo performance is started to entice the player to play.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command sent from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the same is true as when the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive the stop command sent from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, and the variable performance will not be executed, so the state in which volume adjustment is possible using the cross key 19 will remain, and the volume value image OG will not be erased.

In addition, if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the change display on the sub-first change display 81 will not stop, the icon TI will not disappear without animation, and the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ will not be stopped, so the state in which volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 will be maintained and the volume value image OG will not be erased.

In addition, if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ will not be performed, and the audible output of the variable BGM will be maintained even if a specified period (30 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting state was entered.

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variable performance starts, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends. However, when the third command (command to specify a waiting state for customers) is received while the variable performance has not ended, the current variable performance is forcibly ended and the machine enters a waiting state for customers. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (command to specify a waiting state for customers) is received, the variable performance ends. In other words, in both cases where the second command has been received and where it has not been received, the variable performance ends when the machine transitions to a waiting state for customers. Therefore, the variable performance can be ended appropriately by the start of the waiting state for customers, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In this way, if the performance control board 130 cannot properly receive the start command or stop command sent from the main control board 110 (due to a disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, or a loose connector, for example), volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 is not restricted, and a state in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible is maintained. This improves the player's convenience in terms of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the performance control board 130 cannot properly receive the start command or stop command sent from the main control board 110 (due to a disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, a disconnection of the connector, etc.), the display of the volume value image OG will be maintained until the display period of the volume value image OG has elapsed. This improves the convenience of the player with regard to adjusting the volume and light intensity, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

If the start command is received by the performance control board 130 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormalities or noise, there may be cases where the content of the change pattern of the special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 (for example, a 13.5-second change for a normal reach) differs from the content of the change performance pattern of the change performance executed by the main display device 70 (for example, a 40-second SP reach performance). In such a case, when the special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 60, the main display device 70 will be in a state where a change performance (specifically, an SP reach performance) is being executed, and if a customer waiting state designation command is received in this state, the current change performance will be forcibly ended and the state will transition to a customer waiting state. In this regard, the same operation will be performed for gaming machines that send and receive start commands but do not send and receive stop commands.

(Example of when the Miss Normal Reach Variable Performance ends and the customer waits)
Using Figures 89 to 91, we will explain a specific example when the miss normal reach variable presentation ends and the customer waiting state begins.

Figure 89 is a timing chart for when the Miss Normal Reach Variable Presentation ends and the player waits for customers, and Figures 90 and 91 are diagrams showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 89. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 89, the first reserved number is in a state of "0", and the first special pattern display 60 is displaying a change in the first special pattern, and the sub-first reserved display 81 is displaying a change in the first special pattern (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "0". Also, in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally, three performance patterns 70a and three special patterns TZ are updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display). Also, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the changing BGM is being audibly output (see FIG. 90(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in Figure 89, when the normal reach effect begins in which the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern while the central effect pattern 70a scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and output of the normal reach BGM begins (see Figure 90 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 89, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and a blackout effect begins, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompting effect encouraging the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompting sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 90(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in Figure 89, if the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failed development effect is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach effect has failed and will end in a normal reach effect. Specifically, a failed development image SIG is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9 (see Figure 90 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in Figure 89, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect, the normal reach effect is resumed, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is resumed (see Figure 90 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in Figure 89, when the central performance symbol 70a, which has been scrolling (updating and changing) at a slow speed, temporarily stops at "6", the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central performance symbol 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking head), and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the reach miss result ("565"). Also, the output of the normal reach BGM stops, but the audible output of the changing BGM does not resume (see Figure 90 (f)).

After that, at timing T6 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 91 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 89, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 91 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") starts (see FIG. 91 (i)).

After that, at timing T9 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animated disappearance display ends (see FIG. 91 (j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 89, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state and enters a waiting period during which the special symbol is displayed stopped, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. After that, when the demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demo performance is started to appeal to the player to play.

In this way, when the normal reach variable performance is executed, the variable BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output when the normal reach performance starts, so the normal reach performance can be effectively enhanced and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, if the waiting state for customers occurs after a miss normal reach variation performance, the performance BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) will not be output before the normal reach variation performance ends, specifically, from the moment the three performance patterns 70a temporarily stop, so that the customer can immediately know that the normal reach performance has ended or that it has become a miss, which can increase the interest.

In addition, instead of stopping the output of the performance BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) when the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop, the variable BGM may be audibly output instead of the normal reach BGM when the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop. In this way, the player will not be extremely disappointed when the normal reach variable performance, which has a low chance of winning, ends up missing.

(Specific example of when a variable performance is executed after the end of the miss SPSP reach performance)
Using Figures 92 to 94, a specific example will be described in which a variable presentation is executed after a miss SPSP reach presentation has ended.

Figure 92 is a timing chart for when a variable presentation is executed after the end of a miss SPSP reach presentation, and Figures 93 to 94 are diagrams showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 92. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 92, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 60 displays the first special pattern and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays the first reserved number (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2". In addition, three performance patterns 70a (display modes including character images) are scrolled (updated and changed) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, and the special pattern TZ is updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1 in Figure 92, when the normal reach effect starts, in which the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern while the central effect pattern 70a scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM starts.

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 92, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and a blackout effect begins, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompting effect encouraging the main display device 70 to operate the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompt sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 93(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 92, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful development effect is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach effect has been successful and that the SP reach effect will be executed. Specifically, a successful development image HSG is displayed on the main display device 70, and a success sound saying "Good job" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 93(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SP reach effect begins. At this time, the effect pattern 70a changes to a display mode in which only numbers are displayed, and the left and right effect patterns are displayed in the left and right corners at the top of the screen in a reduced size compared to the normal size (see FIG. 93(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the SP reach performance has elapsed, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SPSP reach performance begins. At this time, the three performance patterns 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a smaller size than normal, and the first hold icon display area 70B becomes hidden along with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 93(d)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 92, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped and the deciding performance starts in the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, a prompting image that prompts the player to operate the performance button 17 and the effective period of the performance button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG that imitates the performance button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompting sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 93 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 92, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failed decision effect is executed, indicating that a big win game will not be executed. Specifically, a failed decision image HBG is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the central effect pattern 70a in the upper left corner of the screen temporarily stops at "6", and the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop at the reach failure result ("565") (see FIG. 93(f)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect has elapsed, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed as stopped. Specifically, a shielding image (for example, an eye-catching image including the model name or model-specific characters (see FIG. 131)) that shields the background image and effect pattern 70a is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position and first state before the start of the SP reach effect, and is displayed as temporarily stopped. Also, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 94(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 92, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 94 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 92, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") starts (see FIG. 94 (i)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 92, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 94 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 92, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol display 60 begins (see FIG. 94 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in Figure 92 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "1", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will start from the beginning (off) (see Figure 94 (l)).

The two hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start to shift (decrease) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-change action, the special pattern TZ starts to update (scroll, switch), and the audible output of the change BGM is resumed (see FIG. 94 (l)).

Note that while the SPSP reach variation effects have been explained here, the same applies to the SP reach variation effects, where playback of the normal reach BGM is suspended during the blackout effect, and in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect, the output of the normal reach BGM is not resumed and the SP reach BGM is output.

In addition, although the SPSP reach variation effect has been explained here, the same applies when the SP reach variation effect is a miss. When the effect pattern 70a that is a miss in the SP reach effect is temporarily stopped, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed as stopped, and when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image resumes, and the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size and first state and is displayed temporarily stopped.

In addition, when a look-ahead zone performance is being executed and a reach state is reached while the look-ahead zone background is displayed, and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed, it is similar to the case where a reach state is reached while a normal background image such as the mode A background image is displayed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed, but when the performance pattern 70a that is a miss in the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance is temporarily stopped, a first stop suggestion performance (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will be displayed as stopped, and when the first stop suggestion performance ends, the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image (for example, the mode A background image) before the look-ahead zone background image is displayed is resumed, and the performance pattern 70a returns to its normal size and first state and is displayed as temporarily stopped.

In this way, in the first variable performance (normal reach variable performance) in which a blackout performance (suggestive performance) is executed that suggests whether or not an SP reach performance will be executed, the normal reach BGM continues to play but is muted (silenced) during the blackout performance, and the normal reach BGM that was muted in the normal reach performance after the blackout performance is returned to an audible output, while in the second variable performance (SP/SPSP reach variable performance) in which a blackout performance (suggestive performance) is executed that suggests whether or not an SP reach performance will be executed, the normal reach BGM is stopped from playing during the blackout performance, and the SP reach BGM is output in the SP reach performance after the blackout performance. This makes it possible to reduce the load on audio control when an SP reach performance is executed, and to improve the freedom of audio control.

In addition, when the SP Reach effect is started while the first background image (for example, the Mode A background image, which is the normal background image) or the second background image (the look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the background image is changed to the third background image (the SP Reach background image), which indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal background image, and the effect patterns 70a that form the Reach state and are temporarily stopped are displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. Then, when the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop as a miss, the background image is changed to the first background image (the Mode A background image, which is the normal background image), and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed stopped in the normal size. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the SP Reach effect and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even during the execution of the SP reach effect, in which the display mode of the effect pattern 70a changes, the mode of the effect operation of the reserved icon HI or the icon TI (the content of the operation, the period of the operation, etc.) does not change. This allows the player to concentrate on the SP reach effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the icon TI remains displayed, while the reserved icon HI is hidden. This allows the player to concentrate on the SPSP reach effect, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the SPSP reach effect ends, the display of the reserve icon HI (the reserve icon in the normal display mode, the reserve icon in the special display mode) is resumed. This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the variable performance will be executed again after the variable performance in which the SPSP reach effect was executed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) remains displayed if the SPSP reach performance is not executed after the execution of the SP reach performance, but becomes hidden if the SPSP reach performance is executed, but the special pattern TZ remains displayed regardless of whether the SPSP reach performance is executed after the execution of the SP reach performance. This makes it possible to inform the player that a variable display is in progress, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect ends, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed. This allows the player to understand that the SPSP reach effect has ended and that the effect pattern 70a has stopped, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return the display mode of the effect pattern 70a to the first mode. This reduces the sense of discomfort caused by the change in the display mode of the effect pattern 70a, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return from the SPSP reach background image to the Mode A background image. This reduces the sense of discomfort caused by the change in background image, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that while the hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed during the blackout performance, at least one of the hold icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden and then displayed again when the SP reach performance begins.

In addition, a valid period is generated during the blackout effect, and when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful development effect or a failed development effect is executed, but it is also possible not to generate a valid period. In this case, a successful development effect or a failed development effect may be executed, or the effect may return to a normal reach effect or develop into an SP reach effect without executing a successful development effect or a failed development effect.

In addition, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are left displayed while the SP reach performance is being performed, and the hold icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is left displayed while the SPSP reach performance is being performed, but the hold icon HI may be hidden and the icon TI is left displayed while the SP reach performance is being performed, and the hold icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden while the SPSP reach performance is being performed.

(Specific example of disappearance display of the icon TI by animation)
A specific example of the disappearance display of the icon TI by animation will be described with reference to Figs.

As described in Figures 28 and 29, the final icon display forms of the icon TI include a "white icon," a "blue icon," a "red icon," and a "rainbow icon." Figure 95 shows specific examples of the disappearance animation when these icons are displayed as the icon TI.

Fig. 95 shows, as an example, a specific example of the disappearance display of the icon TI of the "white icon" and the "blue icon" by animation. The "white icon" is the same as Fig. 94(i), so the explanation is omitted.
On the other hand, in the case of a "blue icon," as shown in (h-2) to (j-2), the disappearance display is performed using the same animation as the animation for disappearing the "white icon." This makes it easier for the player to understand that the icon has disappeared and the variable presentation has ended, since the disappearance display is performed using the same animation for both the "white icon" and the "blue icon."

Note that the "blue icon" may be read as a "red icon" or a "rainbow icon." Also, although the "white icon," "blue icon," "red icon," and "rainbow icon" have all been described as disappearing using the same animation, they may each be made to disappear using a different animation. Also, if there are icons (e.g., character icons) not shown in Figures 28 and 29, such character icons may also be made to disappear using the same animation as the "white icon," etc., or only the character icons may be made to disappear using a different animation.

In the example of Figure 95, the "blue icon" is round, which is a different shape from the hexagonal shape of the hold icon HI, but the "blue icon" may also be displayed in the same shape as the hold icon HI (hexagonal in the example of Figure 95).

Figure 96 is a diagram explaining that there are cases where animation is used for the disappearance display and cases where animation is not used. Specifically, Figure 96 (b) shows Figure 92 (b), and when the development image SEG indicating the progression to the SP reach performance is displayed, the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are hidden. In this case, the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are made to disappear (not displayed) without using the animation shown in Figure 95 etc. This allows the player to recognize that the variable performance is still continuing, as the icon TI has become hidden without animation.

In FIG. 96(i), the icon TI is displayed disappearing using the animation shown in FIG. 95, etc. This allows the player to recognize that the variable presentation has ended, as the icon TI is no longer displayed accompanied by the animation.

The case where the icon TI is hidden without animation is not limited to when it is developing, but may be when the power supply is stopped, as shown in FIG. 103. The disappearance mode in FIG. 96(b) is the same as that in FIG. 103(b), but may be different. That is, only the disappearance mode at the end of the variable performance differs between when the variable performance ends, when it is developing, and when the power supply is stopped, and the disappearance mode may be the same during development and when the power supply is stopped, or the disappearance mode may be different between when the variable performance ends, when it is developing, and when the power supply is stopped.

For example, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a is different between the miss normal reach described in FIG. 89 and the miss SPSP reach described in FIG. 92. Specifically, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in the miss SPSP reach is longer than the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in the miss normal reach. Therefore, the period during which the icon TI performs the performance action during the temporary stop period is also longer in the miss SPSP reach. In this way, even if the period during which the icon TI performs the performance action is different between the miss normal reach and the miss SPSP reach, the disappearance display of the icon TI is performed with the same animation and the disappearance display of the icon TI is performed for the same disappearance time. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the icon has disappeared and the variable performance has ended, even though the variable performance and temporary stop period are different.

(Example of when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends and the jackpot game is executed)
Using Figures 97 to 99, a specific example will be described in which the big win SPSP reach fluctuation presentation ends and a big win game is executed.

Figure 97 is a timing chart when the big win SPSP reach fluctuation presentation ends and the big win game is executed, and Figures 98 to 99 are diagrams showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 97. Note that here, the case of presentation mode A is explained, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T5 in Figure 97 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T5 in Figure 92, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timings from T6 onwards.

First, at the timing of T6 in Figure 97, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped and the deciding performance starts in the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, a prompting image that prompts the player to operate the performance button 17 and the valid period of the performance button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG that imitates the performance button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompting sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see Figure 98 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful decision effect is executed, suggesting that a jackpot game will be played. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (big descent) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves left and right. In addition, a successful decision image SEF is displayed on the main display device 70, and a success sound "queen queen" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the central effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at "5" in the upper left corner of the screen, and the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop at the jackpot result ("555") (see FIG. 98(f)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 97, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect has elapsed, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed as stopped. Specifically, a shielding image (an eye-catching image including the model name) that shields the background image and effect pattern 70a, etc., is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position and first state before the start of the SP reach effect, and is displayed as temporarily stopped. Also, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 98 (g)).

In addition, a second stop suggestion effect is started, which suggests that the effect pattern 70a will stop displaying with a jackpot result. Specifically, a light-emitting display effect in which the light-emitting effect image EF moves from one end of the effect pattern 70a to the other end and disappears is repeated twice at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 0.75 seconds). At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., until the effect pattern 70a stops displaying) (see FIG. 98(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 97, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the jackpot special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 99 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the change display on the sub-first change display 81 stops. In addition, as the second stop suggestion performance ends, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a ("555") and the special pattern TZ ("555") starts (see FIG. 99 (i)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 99 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 97, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends an opening designation command for the jackpot game to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 99 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the opening designation command for the jackpot game, the opening performance for the jackpot game begins. Specifically, an opening performance screen containing the word "jackpot" is displayed, and in the right corner of the screen, a right-hit image UG is displayed, suggesting that the game ball be shot aiming at the right area of the game area 5a (the jackpot opening).

In this way, in a variable performance that results in a jackpot, the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) remains displayed if the SPSP reach performance is not executed after the execution of the SP reach performance, but is hidden if the SPSP reach performance is executed, but the special symbol TZ remains displayed regardless of whether the SPSP reach performance is executed after the execution of the SP reach performance. This makes it possible to inform the player that a variable display is in progress, which increases the enjoyment of the game. Note that in a variable performance that results in a jackpot, even if the normal reach performance does not develop into an SP reach performance after the normal reach performance, the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) remains displayed.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect, which is a big win, ends, a second stop suggestion effect (a light-emitting display effect in which the light-emitting effect image EF moves from one end of the effect pattern 70a to the other end and disappears) is executed. This allows the player to understand that the SPSP reach effect has ended and that the big win effect pattern 70a has stopped, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the duration of one light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect (0.75 seconds) and the cumulative duration (1.5 seconds) are different from the period (2 or 3 seconds) of the display action (shaking action, rotating action) of the reserved icon. This makes it possible to make the light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect stand out, and to emphasize that the jackpot effect pattern has stopped.

In addition, the presentation mode of the light-emitting display presentation in the second stop suggestion presentation is such that the light-emitting effect image EF moves from one end of the presentation pattern 70a to the other end and then disappears, but the light-emitting effect image EF may also move from one end of the number image portion of the presentation pattern 70a to the other end and then disappear, or the light-emitting effect image EF may move from one end of the character image to the other end and then disappear.

In addition, the cumulative presentation time of the light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is shorter than the period of the presentation operation of the hold icon (2 or 3 seconds), but the presentation time of one light-emitting display effect may be set to, for example, 2 seconds, so that the cumulative presentation time becomes longer than the period of the presentation operation of the hold icon HI (2 or 3 seconds).

In addition, in the case of a normal variable effect in which the three performance symbols stop and are displayed with a losing outcome without various reach effects being executed, the light-emitting display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed, but each time the three performance symbols on the left, middle, and right temporarily stop in sequence, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, an image in which part of the performance symbol 70a emits light) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) so as to be superimposed on the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a, and the light-emitting display effect at the temporary stop may be executed sequentially. In this way, the effect of the performance symbols when they temporarily stop can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than sequentially executing the light-emitting effects when the provisional stops occur in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), the light-emitting effects when the provisional stops occur sequentially may be executed in the normal game state, but may not be executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and special probability game state).

In addition, in the case of a shortened variation effect in which the three performance symbols stop and are displayed with a losing outcome without various reach effects being executed, the light-emitting display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed, but when the three performance symbols on the left, center, and right temporarily stop simultaneously, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, an image in which part of the performance symbol 70a emits white light) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) so as to be superimposed on each of the three temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a, thereby executing a light-emitting display effect when the simultaneous temporary stops. In this way, the performance effect when the performance symbols temporarily stop can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than executing a light-emitting effect when simultaneous provisional stops occur in the normal game state and in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), it is possible to make it possible to execute a light-emitting effect when simultaneous provisional stops occur in the normal game state, and not to execute a light-emitting effect when simultaneous provisional stops occur in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and special probability game state).

In addition, in the case of a reach variation effect in which various reach effects are executed and the three performance symbols 70a are displayed as stopped with a reach miss result, the light-emitting display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed, but when the central performance symbol 70a, which is displayed as the last to stop, is temporarily stopped, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, an image in which part of the performance symbol 70a emits white light) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) so as to be superimposed on this performance symbol 70a (excluding the left and right performance symbols 70a that were temporarily stopped earlier), to execute the light-emitting display effect when the reach is missed. In this way, the player can be informed that the reach is missed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than executing a light-emitting display effect when a reach is missed in the normal game state and in a specific game state (time-saving game state, high probability game state), it is possible to make it possible to execute a light-emitting display effect when a reach is missed in the normal game state, and not to execute a light-emitting display effect when a reach is missed in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the high probability game state).

In addition, when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop and a normal reach performance is executed, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion performance (for example, an image that emits white light to block at least a part of the performance pattern 70a and restrict visibility) may be displayed around the left and right performance patterns 70a (excluding the changing central performance pattern 70a) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.2 seconds) to execute a light-emitting display performance when a reach is established. In this way, the number of times the light-emitting display performance is executed in the variable performance pattern in which the reach performance is executed can be increased compared to a variable performance pattern in which the reach performance is not executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than executing a light-emitting display effect when a reach is achieved in the normal game state and in a specific game state (time-saving game state, high probability game state), it is possible to make it possible to execute a light-emitting display effect when a reach is achieved in the normal game state, and not to execute a light-emitting display effect when a reach is achieved in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the high probability game state).

In addition, when the two left and right performance symbols 70a move to the top of the screen of the main display device 70 and develop into an SP reach performance, a light-emitting effect image (e.g., an image that causes the inside of the numbers in the performance symbols 70a to light up) different from the second stop suggestion performance may be displayed around the left and right performance symbols 70a (excluding the center performance symbol 70a that is changing) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.4 seconds) to execute a light-emitting display performance during development. In this way, the number of times the light-emitting display performance is executed in a variable performance pattern in which an SP reach performance is executed can be increased compared to a variable performance pattern in which an SP reach performance is not executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than executing the light-emitting display effect during development in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), the light-emitting display effect during development may be executed in the normal game state, and may not be executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and special probability game state).

In addition, even if the light-emitting display effect is executed during development, if the three performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display device 70 to execute the SPSP reach effect, the light-emitting display effect may not be executed for these three performance symbols 70a. In this way, it is possible to avoid unnecessary light-emitting display effects being executed for the performance symbols 70a that are displayed in a reduced size so that they are difficult for the player to see, and it is possible to reduce the control load related to the image display.

In addition, after the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the top left corner of the screen at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97 as a jackpot (while the reserved icon is not displayed before the second stop suggestion performance is executed), they may be moved to the center of the screen and displayed in normal size. In this case, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion performance (for example, an image that emits yellow light radially outward from the central performance symbol) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.2 seconds) to correspond to the three performance symbols 70a that have moved to the center of the screen, thereby executing the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display performance. In this way, it is possible to appeal to the player that the performance symbols have become a jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when displaying a light-emitting effect image in a pre-stop indication light-emitting display performance, the frame lighting device 10 may be made to emit light in a pre-stop indication light-emitting display mode (e.g., the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image).

In addition, when a normal variation effect or a shortened variation effect is executed in which the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) is not executed, it is advisable not to execute the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect after the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop with a losing outcome. In this way, the number of times the light-emitting display effect is executed and the type of light-emitting display effect executed will change depending on the variation effect pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even when a reach variation effect (normal reach variation effect, SP reach variation effect, SPSP reach variation effect) in which the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) is not executed is executed, it is advisable not to execute the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion after the three effect patterns 70a have provisionally stopped with a losing outcome. In this way, the number of times the light-emitting display effect is executed and the type of light-emitting display effect executed will change depending on whether or not a jackpot is hit, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the variation effect involves the execution of a second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect), in the case of an SP reach variation effect, the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion may not be executed, and in the case of an SPSP reach variation effect, the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion may be executed.

In addition, the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect may not be executed depending on the game state (for example, the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect may be executed in the normal game state, but not executed in the specific game state), or the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) may not be executed depending on the game state (the second stop suggestion effect may be executed in the normal game state, but not executed in the specific game state).

In addition, if the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect can be executed regardless of the game state, the execution time of the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect in the normal game state may be different from that in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the special game state) (for example, the execution time of the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect in the normal game state > the execution time of the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect in the special game state). In this way, the time from the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect to the start of the jackpot changes depending on the game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, if the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) can be executed regardless of the game state, the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) in the normal game state may be different from that of the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the special game state) (for example, the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect in the normal game state > the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect in the specific game state). In this way, the time from the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) to the start of the jackpot changes depending on the game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, although the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the end of the SPSP reach performance, the hold icon HI may not be redisplayed depending on the type of SPSP reach performance. Specifically, when the first SPSP reach performance is executed or when the second SPSP reach performance resulting in a miss is executed, the hold icon HI may be redisplayed after the first stop suggestion performance is executed, and when the second SPSP reach performance resulting in a jackpot is executed, the opening performance of the jackpot game may be executed as is without executing the first stop suggestion performance (display of an eye-catching image) or redisplaying the hold icon HI.

In addition, the reserved icon HI is redisplayed after the SPSP reach effect ends, but if a revival effect that results in a jackpot is executed after the reach miss effect pattern 70a has temporarily stopped, the reserved icon HI may be hidden again while the revival effect is being executed. In this case, the jackpot effect pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped after the revival effect is executed and the reserved icon may be redisplayed, or the opening effect of the jackpot game may be executed without displaying the jackpot effect pattern 70a or redisplaying the reserved icon HI after the revival effect is executed.

If the stop command is received normally during the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the reach miss change performance is longer than the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the jackpot change performance. However, if the stop command cannot be received normally in the jackpot change performance, the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the jackpot change performance may be longer than the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the reach miss change performance. Also, if the stop command or opening designation command cannot be received normally in the jackpot change performance, the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the jackpot change performance is longer than the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the reach miss change performance.

97(g)-(h), a "symbol promotion effect" may be executed. The "symbol promotion effect" is, for example, an effect that displays an effect symbol (e.g., "444") suggesting a first big win at timing T7 in FIG. 97, and then changes to an effect symbol (e.g., "777") suggesting a second big win.
Specifically, the effect symbols (e.g., "444") are scrolled up and down, and the effect symbols (e.g., "777") are displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 17. Then, the effect is completed by timing T9 in Fig. 97, and the effect symbols (e.g., "777") are stopped and displayed at timing T10 in Fig. 97.

The "symbol promotion effect" is not limited to the above example, and may include a pattern in which the effect symbol indicating a third jackpot (e.g., "555") changes to an effect symbol indicating a second jackpot (e.g., "777"), or a pattern in which the effect symbol indicating a first jackpot (e.g., "444") changes to an effect symbol indicating a third jackpot (e.g., "555").

In addition, when multiple types of promotion patterns are provided and a "symbol promotion effect" is executed in a specific promotion pattern, it may be determined that the effect symbol (for example, "777") will be changed and displayed.
In addition, the timing of execution of the "symbol promotion effect" is not limited to Figure 97 (g) to (h), and may be other than that. For example, it may be executed during a big win game.

(Modification when the big win SPSP reach variation presentation ends and the big win game is executed)
Figure 100 shows a modified example of Figures 97 and 99, and the main difference is that after the icon TI or the reserved icon HI is hidden during development, they are not displayed again and the game transitions to a jackpot.

Specifically, as described in FIG. 96, the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are hidden during the development (see FIG. 100(b)). In other words, the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are hidden at timing T2 in FIG. 97.

Then, the game is configured to transition to the opening of the jackpot game without redisplaying the icon TI or the reserved icon HI, or animating the disappearance of the icon TI, as shown in Figures 99(h) to (j) (see Figures 100(k) and (l)).

This configuration eliminates the need for control to redisplay the icon TI and the hold icon HI, or to make the icon TI disappear through animation, which is expected to reduce the control load.

In addition, the time required to redisplay the icon TI and the reserved icon HI, and the time required to make the icon TI disappear through animation can be omitted, allowing for a quick transition to the big win game. This increases the player's interest in the game.

The embodiment shown in the modified example of FIG. 100 may be provided together with the embodiment shown in FIG. 99, or only FIG. 100 may be provided, or only FIG. 99 may be provided.

In addition, when the mode shown in the modified example of FIG. 100 is provided together with the mode shown in FIG. 99, they may be used differently depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the mode shown in FIG. 99 may be used, and in the special gaming state, the mode shown in FIG. 100 may be used, or vice versa.

(Specific examples of the light emission mode of the starting lamp)
Using Fig. 101, a specific example of the light emission mode of the starting entrance lamp 76 will be described. Note that Fig. 101 shows the light emission mode of the starting entrance lamp 76 in the example of Fig. 100, but the application example is not limited to this, and may be applied to the example of Fig. 89, the example of Fig. 92, the example of Fig. 96, or the example of Fig. 99.

Figure 101 (a) shows the illumination state of the start gate lamp 76 in the scene of Figure 100 (a), and here, as an example, the icon TI is displayed in "red", indicating that the start gate lamp 76 is illuminating in "red".

Figure 101 (b) shows the illumination state of the start gate lamp 76 in the scene of Figure 100 (b), and indicates that although the "red" icon TI etc. is no longer displayed due to the display of the development image SEG, the start gate lamp 76 continues to emit a visible "red" illumination.

Figure 101 (c) shows the illumination state of the start gate lamp 76 in the scene of Figure 100 (c), and indicates that while the SP reach performance is being performed, the icon TI etc. is not displayed, but the start gate lamp 76 continues to be visibly illuminated in "red."

Figure 101 (k) shows the illumination state of the start gate lamp 76 in the scene of Figure 100 (k), in which the variable performance has ended (the performance pattern is displayed as stopped) and the start gate lamp 76 has gone out.

By configuring it in this way, even if the icon TI, etc. is hidden, you can visually check the light emission state of the starter lamp 76 to see what color the icon TI, etc. has changed to, preventing you from forgetting what color the icon TI, etc. has changed to.

(Example of recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
Using Figures 102 to 105, we will explain a specific example of recovery from a power outage that occurs during a variable performance.

Figure 102 is a timing chart for when power is restored after an interruption occurs during a variable presentation, and Figures 103 to 105 are diagrams showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 102. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 102, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 60 displays the first special pattern and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays the first reserved pattern (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2". In addition, three performance patterns 70a are scrolled (updated and changed) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, and the special pattern TZ is updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 103(a)).

Next, at the timing T1 in FIG. 102, when a power outage occurs that stops the power supply to the gaming machine 1, the main control board 110 performs processing for power outage, and the main information display 59 including the first special pattern display 60, etc., the sub information display 80 including the sub first variable display, etc., the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, etc. become hidden, and the game sounds (variable BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 also become non-output (see FIG. 103(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 102, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, a loading screen (initial screen) including the words "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71, and the main control board 110, which has restored the game control state to the state before the power failure, transmits power-on commands (here, the second power recovery command, the first special symbol storage command, and the second special symbol storage command, which indicate that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner) to the performance control board 130. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 60 is resumed from the state before the power failure, and the display of the first reserved number "2" on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is also resumed (see FIG. 103(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the power ON command, the above-mentioned power restoration notification and the initial operation (including the return operation) of the various roles (board role, frame role) are initiated, and information display on the sub-information display 80 begins (see FIG. 103 (d)).

At this time, in the main display device 70 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the top layer, and various effect images (background image corresponding to the effect mode when the power is restored, effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ which are the initial numbers when the power is restored, reserved icon HI corresponding to the reserved number and the effect mode when the power is restored, reserved numbers corresponding to the reserved number when the power is restored, etc.) are generated and displayed as image data for the power restoration notification set in a lower layer than the power restoration image. At this time, the power restoration image restricts the visibility of the various effect images, but the background image and reserved icon are in a state of performing the effect operation, and the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are in a state of being stopped and displayed at the pattern stop position. In addition, the reserved icon HI is set to the normal display mode (white icon) even if it was in the special display mode before the power failure, and the icon TI is in a non-display state even if it was displayed before the power failure (see FIG. 103 (d)).

In addition, when the sub-information display 80 is reporting that power has been restored, the sub-first change display 81 and the sub-second change display 82 are in a stopped state with no change indication, and the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 are in a state in which they display the number of holds (see FIG. 103(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 102 (while the power restoration notification is continuing), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number becomes "3", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "3", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 104 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83 display "3." In addition, the hold icon HI (white icon) begins to be additionally displayed in animation in the normal display mode on the third display section of the first hold icon display area 70B, but visibility is restricted by the power recovery image set in the upper layer (see FIG. 104 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 102, after the additional display in the animation of the hold icon HI has finished, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 104 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the power restoration notification ends, and the various performance images that were restricted from viewing by the power restoration image (the background image corresponding to the performance mode when power is restored, the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ that are the initial result when power is restored, the reserved icon HI corresponding to the current number of reserved balls and the performance mode, the reserved number corresponding to the current number of reserved balls, etc.) become visible (see FIG. 105 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 102, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" from "3", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "2", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see FIG. 105(i)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in Figure 102 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "2", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin (see Figure 105 (j)).

In addition, the three hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start to shift (decrease) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-change action, while the special pattern TZ starts to update (scroll, switch), and the audible output of the change BGM starts (see FIG. 105(j)).

Then, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 102 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the reserved icon HI ends, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Also, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a starts (see FIG. 105 (k)).

When the machine is controlled to presentation mode D (high probability gameplay state) or to presentation mode F when the power is restored, the display mode of presentation pattern 70a will be displayed in the fourth mode, but the number image of presentation pattern 70a will be the initial presentation pattern "753" which is the same as when the machine is controlled to presentation mode A (normal gameplay state) when the power is restored. When the machine is controlled to presentation mode D (high probability gameplay state) when the power is restored, the initial presentation pattern may be "246" or the like so as to be distinguishable from when the machine is controlled to presentation mode A (normal gameplay state) when the power is restored.

In addition, if the power supply is stopped during the waiting for customers state and then resumes and the game control state is restored, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, so that the performance control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command while the loading screen (initial screen) is being displayed, and a variable waiting screen (where the performance pattern 70a can be seen) is displayed, waiting for the variable performance to be executed, without a power restoration notification being issued.

In addition, if the power supply is stopped during a jackpot game and then resumes and the game control state is restored, there will be a delay before the main control board 110 outputs the round designation command or ending designation command, so a loading screen (initial screen) will be displayed, followed by a power restoration notification, and then a presentation screen according to the command will be displayed.

In this way, when the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the game control state is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the main display device 70 is set to the upper layer, and the reserved icon displayed in the icon display area of the main display device 70 is set to the lower layer, and image data is generated and displayed on the main display device 70, restricting visibility of the reserved icon in the lower layer. This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience such as player confusion after power restoration. Also, because the same display control can be performed as when the power restoration image is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the power recovery image restricts visibility of the reserved icon, when a special pattern storage command indicating an increase in the number of reserved items is received, image data including a reserved icon corresponding to the increase is generated. Therefore, the same display control can be performed as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even when the power recovery image restricts visibility of the hold icon, the hold icon and background image perform a special effect. This allows the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the power recovery image restricts visibility of the hold icon, if the number of holds increases, the hold icon is additionally displayed (increased display) through animation. This allows the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a differs depending on whether the display mode is the first performance mode (performance mode A) or the second performance mode (performance modes D and F) when power is restored, but the number image of the performance pattern 70a is set to have common number information ("753"). Therefore, even if the display mode of the performance pattern differs depending on the performance mode after power is restored, it is possible to easily grasp that the power has been restored.

In addition, in the first hold display area (first special pattern hold display 63, second special pattern hold display 64) and the second hold display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84), the display mode of the hold display is not changed based on the results of the look-ahead, but in the third hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70), where the hold display is easier to see than in the first and second hold display areas, the display mode of the hold display (hold icon HI) can be changed based on the results of the look-ahead, and when the power supply is stopped, no hold display is displayed in any of the first to third hold display areas, and after the power is restored, the timing of resumption of the hold display in the first hold display area (first special pattern hold display 63, second special pattern hold display 64) and the second hold display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84) is earlier than the timing of resumption of the hold display (visible display of the hold icon HI) in the third hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70). This allows the player to quickly grasp the number of reserved items while informing them that the power is being restored. Note that the timing for resuming the display of reserved items in the first reserved item display area may be set to be earlier than the timing for resuming the display of reserved items in the second reserved item display area.

In addition, the hold icon HI, which was displayed in a special display mode before the power outage, is displayed in a normal display mode after the power is restored. This eliminates the need to back up and store information indicating that the hold icon was in a special display mode in the performance control board 130, making it possible to avoid the hardware configuration of the performance control board 130 becoming complicated.

In addition, after the power is restored, the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) resumes changing display (flashing by moving LEDs) and then the hold icon is visibly displayed. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the power restoration image is displayed, the initial operations (including the recovery operation) of the various reels (the movable performance device 73, the sub display device 71, and the performance button 17) are executed in a manner similar to when performance operations are performed at different times for each reel. This makes it possible to inform the player that the initial operations of the various reels have been performed as a result of the power restoration, and makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of being mistaken for performance operations.

The sub-first change indicator 81 and the sub-second change indicator 82 are configured to display a stopped state without displaying any changes during the power restoration notification, but they may display changes during the power restoration notification (after receiving the second power restoration designation command, which indicates that the special pattern is being displayed), and display a stopped state when a stop command (pattern confirmation command) is received.

(Example of when the start command cannot be received properly during a look-ahead performance)
Using Figures 106 to 108, a specific example of a case where a start command cannot be received normally during a look-ahead performance will be explained.

Figure 106 is a timing chart for when the start command cannot be received normally during the look-ahead performance, and Figures 107 and 108 are diagrams showing examples of performances at various timings in Figure 106. Note that the explanation here is for performance mode A, but since performance modes B to F are basically the same, explanations will be omitted.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 106, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 60 displays the first special pattern and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays the first reserved pattern (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2". In addition, three performance patterns 70a and three special patterns TZ are updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display) in front of the Mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 107(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 106, when the look-ahead zone performance starts, the above-mentioned in-zone performance is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a horizontally scrolled state, and a zone image ZG including a text image of "ZONE" is displayed. In addition, the volume of the variable BGM is reduced and output of the zone BGM begins (see FIG. 107(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in Figure 106, when the central performance pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated and changed) temporarily stops, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking head), and all performance patterns 70a become temporarily stopped (see Figure 107 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound stops, and when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 107(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the performance pattern 70a ("523") and special pattern TZ ("523") start to stop (see FIG. 107(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 107(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 106, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see FIG. 108(g)).

However, because the performance control board 130 was unable to receive the start command properly, the pending display update (update of the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83, and shift display of the pending icon HI) and the variable performance that should have been executed at the timing of T7 in Figure 106 were not executed. As a result, the stopped display period of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is extended, and the look-ahead effect performance that should have been executed for two variable performances from this variable performance is not started. However, even during the extended period of the stopped display period of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the horizontal scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the performance operation of the pending icon HI continue to be performed. (See Figure 108 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 106, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 108(i)).

However, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ should normally be executed, but these actions are not executed.

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 106, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "0", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see FIG. 108(j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in Figure 106 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 begins (see Figure 108 (k)).

In addition, of the two reserve icons HI displayed in the first reserve icon display area 70B, the reserve icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the previous special pattern change display is erased without animation, and the reserve icon HI (blue icon) displayed in the second display section corresponding to the current special pattern change display is displayed without animation in the first display section. Then, the reserve icon HI displayed in the first display section starts to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to display floating as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ starts updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display) (see Figure 108 (k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in Figure 106 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the floating display of the performance pattern 70a, the look-ahead effect performance that should be executed for two fluctuation performances from the previous fluctuation performance starts with a delay of one, and a blue light-emitting effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 108 (l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 106 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI ends, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scrolling display (update change) of the effect pattern 70a begins.

In this way, even if the effect control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command and therefore the variable effect is not executed during the variable display of the special pattern that is the target of the specified look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect), the specified look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special pattern. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the specified look-ahead effect not being executed, which can lead to a misunderstanding about the progress of the game, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, if the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command and therefore the variable performance is not executed during the variable display of the special pattern that should initiate a specific look-ahead performance (look-ahead effect performance), the specified look-ahead performance is restricted from starting during the variable display of this special pattern, and if the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the next special pattern to be executed, the restricted look-ahead performance is started during the variable display of this special pattern. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as a misunderstanding of the progress of the game due to the specified look-ahead performance not being executed, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the effect control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command, causing the special symbol variable display to be executed but not the variable effect to be executed, the first look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) will be executed but the second look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) will not be executed. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as a misunderstanding of the game's progress due to a specific look-ahead effect not being executed, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, variable BGM (suggestive performance sound) is output during the execution of a variable performance (suggestive performance) to suggest the result of the jackpot determination, and zone BGM (pre-performance sound) is output to suggest that a special game may be executed before the execution of the target variable performance that is the subject of the expectation suggestion by the look-ahead zone performance. In addition, zone BGM is output even after the target variable performance starts, and when zone BGM is output, the suggestive performance is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the look-ahead zone performance and increase the interest in the game.

Note that the volume of the variable BGM is reduced while the look-ahead zone performance is being executed (while the zone BGM is being output), but the audible output of the variable BGM may also be stopped (muted) while the look-ahead zone performance is being executed.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command and therefore a performance that would initiate an icon change performance or a look-ahead zone performance that is executed over multiple performance cycles is not executed, the icon change performance or look-ahead zone performance may be started from the next performance that is executed.

In addition, a look-ahead effect effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that intermittently indicates the expectation of the special game being executed, but instead of the look-ahead effect effect, a look-ahead countdown effect may be executed in which a countdown effect (display of a countdown image, output of a countdown sound) is executed for each variable effect (including a variable effect that results in a jackpot), or a look-ahead chance eye effect (light-emitting display effect when a chance eye stops) may be executed in which a so-called chance eye (a losing number that has a certain rule and does not form a reach state, such as 556 or 667) is temporarily stopped for each variable effect (excluding a variable effect that results in a jackpot) and a light-emitting effect image is displayed around the three performance patterns 70a and an effect sound effect is output for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the stop display is executed, or these three look-ahead effects may be executed.

Also, in the pre-read chance eye effect (light-emitting display effect when the chance eye stops), rather than using numbers that follow a set rule such as "556" or "667", the numbers of the odd numbers in the effect patterns are red and the numbers of the even numbers are blue, and the same-color patterns where the numbers of the three effect patterns 70a are all red, such as "135" or "357", or the same-color patterns where the numbers of the three effect patterns 70a are all blue, such as "246" or "468", may be temporarily stopped (stopped) and the expectation of a jackpot may be higher when the same-color patterns in red are temporarily stopped than when the same-color patterns in blue are temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the pre-read chance eye effect (light-emitting display effect when chance eye stops), instead of performing an effect in which a light-emitting effect image is displayed around the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right at the timing when the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right temporarily stop and an effect sound effect is output, an effect image is displayed around the temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a and a light-emitting effect sound effect is output (for example, every 0.5 seconds) each time the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right temporarily stop in order (for example, each time a bound is displayed), so that the timing at which the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right light up can be made different.

In addition, while it is possible to execute the pre-reading chance eye effect in the normal game state, it is also possible not to execute the pre-reading chance eye effect in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability variation game state) in which the right-hit image is displayed.

In addition, while the pre-reading chance eye effect is not executed in the normal game state, the pre-reading chance eye effect may be executed in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability variation game state) in which a right-hit image is displayed.

In addition, instead of displaying a light-emitting effect image around the three performance patterns 70a in the pre-reading chance eye performance, a light-emitting effect image may be displayed only around the performance pattern 70a in one of the left, middle, and right columns (for example, the center column).

In addition, when displaying a light-emitting effect image in a pre-reading chance eye performance, the frame lighting device 10 may be made to emit light in a chance eye light-emitting mode (for example, the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image displayed around the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a).

(Example of when a power-on command is received while a menu image is displayed)
109 to 110, a specific example in which a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed will be described.

Figure 109 is a timing chart when a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed, and Figure 110 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in Figure 109. Note that the explanation here is for effect mode A, but the explanations for effect modes B to F are omitted as they are basically the same.

First, at timing T0 in Figure 109, the machine is in a customer waiting state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. At this time, the first special symbol display device 60 displays a losing special symbol, and on the main display device 70, the mode A background image is scrolling horizontally (performance operation), and the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed frozen at the losing result ("537") that is the stopping result of the previous variable performance. Also, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) (see Figure 110 (a)).

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing T1 in FIG. 109, the menu operation period is valid, and the main display device 70 displays a menu image MG including multiple selection items (a "Machine Description" item that displays an explanation of the gaming machine 1, a "Performance Customization" item for customizing the effects in the variable effects, and a "Pachi Log" item for log management linked to a mobile phone) superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 110(b)).

If, at the timing T2 in FIG. 109, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped due to an abnormality in the wiring connecting the power supply board 160 and the main control board 110 (such as a broken wire or a loose connector), the main control board 110 performs processing for when the power is cut off, and the main information display 59 including the first special pattern display 60 goes into a non-display state. At this time, the display state of the sub-information display 80, main display device 70, and sub-display device 71 continues (see FIG. 110(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 109, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a checksum judgment is made to see if the data in the game RWM area is corrupted, and if the data is corrupted, a process is performed to initialize the game control state. Then, the main control board 110 sends power-on commands (here, a power-on command, a first special symbol storage command, and a second special symbol storage command) to the performance control board 130. Also, information display on the main information display 59 (such as display of a losing special symbol on the first special symbol display 60) begins (see FIG. 110(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 109, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the power-on command, a loading screen (initial screen) containing the words "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71, the information display on the sub-information display 80 becomes hidden for a moment, and the sound output device 9 goes into a state where game sounds (variable background music, etc.) are not output (see FIG. 110(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 109, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the loading screen (initial screen) was displayed, the above-mentioned power-on notification and the initial operation (including the return operation) of the various devices (board device, frame device) are started, and information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 110(f)).

At this time, on the main display device 70, in front of the Mode A background image where horizontal scrolling (performance operation) has begun, the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are displayed in a frozen state with the initial result ("135") when the power is turned on, and "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB. In addition, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, and muted output of the variable BGM is started at the beginning (see Figure 110 (f)).

In addition, when a power restoration command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed, the operation is essentially the same as when a power-on command is received, except that the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ displayed on the main display device 70 are the initial numbers ("753") that appear when power is restored, and the power-on notification sound is not output.

In addition, if a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received while the volume value image OG is displayed, the behavior is basically the same as when a power-on command is received while the menu image MG is displayed.

In this way, if the command received by the performance control board 130 from the main control board 110 while the main display device 70 is displaying the menu image MG is a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command), the menu image is made invisible on the main display device 70 and an image corresponding to the power-on command (such as a loading screen) is displayed. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130.

In this embodiment, a launch permission command is sent to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, making it possible to launch the game balls. However, it is also possible to send a launch permission command to the payout control board 120 when the game progress control is started, so that the game balls can be launched after the game is ready to be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, it is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from the ball lending machine installed alongside the gaming machine 1, but it may also be possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from the ball lending machine after the game progress control is started and the game becomes playable.

In addition, in this embodiment, since backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), there is no unpaid payout ball number data remaining on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. However, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, if unpaid payout ball number data remains on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, it may be possible to pay out game balls based on this unpaid payout ball number data even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the play area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the play area 5a.

In addition, in this embodiment, prize balls (prize value) are awarded based on the fulfillment of the awarding conditions (a game ball entering the winning slot, starting slot, or large winning slot), but the player's balls may be managed as data and prize ball data may be awarded (added to the balls held data).

In addition, although there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect in this embodiment, multiple look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectancies may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during a variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the top and/or bottom, and the zone image of the other look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the left and/or right. In this way, two look-ahead zone effects can be achieved at the same time, improving the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as a jackpot prediction effect, but instead of the blackout effect, a whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of the effect may be the same as that of the blackout effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the manner in which the variable presentation is executed is basically the same in the normal game state and the specific game state (high probability game state, time-limited game state), but, for example, it is possible to notify the player of first information (information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot, information regarding the execution of a special game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of a front-stage performance and a rear-stage performance in the normal game state (a case of a pre-reach performance and a reach performance, a case of a normal reach performance and a SP reach performance, a case of an SP reach performance and an SPSP reach performance, a case of a pre-reach performance and a performance pattern that is temporarily stopped, a case of a reach performance and a performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped, etc.), and to notify the player of second information different from the first information (additional information regarding a song that can be selected by operating the cross key 19, the status of mission completion, etc.) during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of a front-stage performance and a rear-stage performance in the specific game state. In addition, as a variable presentation consisting of an early presentation and a late presentation in the normal game state, a common late presentation may be executed after a first early presentation, or a common late presentation may be executed after a second early presentation different from the first early presentation, and information regarding the execution of a special game may be notified in the common late presentation executed when a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance ends)
Using Fig. 111, a timing chart will be described for the case where a big win game is executed after the big win SPSP reach variation performance is completed. Fig. 111 is a timing chart for explaining Fig. 97 in more detail, and in particular, the aspects of the "frame lighting device", "board lighting device", "button driving device", and "performance button light emitting LED" are explained, and the explanation of the overlapping parts with Fig. 97 is omitted as appropriate. Also, in order to make Fig. 111 easier to understand, supplementary explanations will be given using Fig. 112.

Note that FIG. 111 explains, as an example, a case in which a jackpot SPSP reach change presentation is executed in a "normal game state", and a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach change presentation ends, but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving game state" or a "high probability game state".

Timing T4 in FIG. 111 corresponds to timing T4 in FIG. 97, and is the timing at which the SP reach performance develops.
When the SP Reach performance is developed, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit SP Reach light, the button driving device 17b is OFF, and the performance button light emitting LED 17c is turned off. When the performance pattern 03 (see FIG. 36) of the blackout performance is executed, the button driving device 17b is turned ON for 3 seconds (the performance button 17 vibrates).

Timing T5 in FIG. 111 is the timing when the SPSP reach performance develops.
When the SPSP reach performance is developed, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 perform SPSP reach light emission, the button driving device 17b is OFF, and the performance button light emitting LED 17c is turned off. Note that the button driving device 17b may be turned ON when the cut-in notice is executed.

At timing T6 in FIG. 111, a prompting sound (e.g., "Press") is output as a sound effect to encourage the player to operate the effect button 17, and the effect button light-emitting LED 17c emits white light.

When the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T7, a success sound "queen, queen" is output, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the effect button light-emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light for a specified period of time, and the button drive device 17b turns ON for 5 seconds, causing the effect button 17 to vibrate. This notifies the player that a jackpot has been hit (see FIG. 112(f)).

Then, at timing T8, the "queen queen" sound of success stops being output, and the rainbow light emitted by the effect button LED 17c ends. Meanwhile, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 continue to emit rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b remains ON. In this way, the rainbow light emitted by the effect button LED 17c ends first, allowing the player's gaze to be directed toward the main display device 70 (see FIG. 112(g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, the special symbol is displayed as stopped, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command at the timing of T10, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 stop emitting rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b turns OFF (see FIG. 112(i)).

In this way, the player is notified of a jackpot by the vibration of each lighting device and effect button, which increases the player's sense of satisfaction at having won the jackpot.

The period during which the success sound is output, the period during which the rainbow light is emitted, and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may be changed as appropriate. For example, all of these may be performed until timing T10. Alternatively, the rainbow light emission of the effect button LED may be terminated first, then the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 may be terminated, and finally the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74 may be terminated at timing T10. Usually, the player focuses on the main display device 70, and the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74, which is close to the main display device 70, is more likely to be in the player's field of vision (compared to the frame lighting device 10 and the effect button LED). Therefore, by finally terminating the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74 (which is more likely to be in the field of vision) at timing T10, the player's mood can be lifted. Furthermore, the end of the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74 makes it easier for the player to recognize that a big win game is about to be played.

The success sound, rainbow light emission, and vibration may be executed continuously or intermittently. For example, in a winning effect, a success sound may be output, rainbow light may be emitted, and vibration may be performed, and these effects may be temporarily turned OFF, and then turned ON again just before the effect symbols are displayed in a static state (for example, FIG. 112(g)). In this manner, the scene to which the player is to pay attention can be made clear, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The period for which the rainbow light is emitted may be different for a jackpot in the normal game state, a jackpot in the time-saving game state, and a jackpot in the probability variable game state. For example, when a jackpot is won in the probability variable game state, the period for which the rainbow light is emitted may be shorter than when a jackpot is won in the normal game state. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state, where it is difficult to win a jackpot, the period for which the rainbow light is emitted can be made longer than in the probability variable game state, allowing the player who won a jackpot in a situation where it is difficult to win a jackpot to feel a sense of superiority. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the probability variable game state, where it is easy to win a jackpot, the period for which the rainbow light is emitted can be made shorter than in the normal game state, preventing excessive jackpot notifications. This allows for appropriate notifications according to the situation (game state).

On the other hand, the period during which the success sound is output and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may be common execution periods regardless of the game state. This allows the output control of the success sound and the control of the vibration of the effect button 17 to be common to a plurality of game states, simplifying the control and effect data.
In addition, the period during which the success sound is output and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may be different for each game state, just like the period during which the rainbow light is emitted as described above.

Although not shown, not only the rainbow light emitted by each lighting device, but also the rainbow display by the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 may be performed. This rainbow display starts at timing T7, but ends, for example, at timing T8 or between T8 and T9. In other words, it ends before the rainbow light emitted by the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. This allows the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to be responsible for the rainbow decoration, and allows the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to display new images (for example, afterglow images, which will be described later), making it possible to enrich the display on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 without compromising the decorativeness.

(If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the presentation mode when the presentation control board 130 fails to receive the stop command at timing T10 will be described.

If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit rainbow light → the rainbow light continues to be emitted even after timing T10 (the performance is extended and executed).
Since the rainbow light emission of the effect button light emitting LED 17c ends before the timing of T10 is reached, there is no effect even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Since the output of the success sound ends before the timing of T10 is reached, there is no impact even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended).
If the button drive device 17b is turned on for 5 seconds, it will be turned off, so there will be no impact even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance will not be extended).
The icon TI is not disappeared, and the presentation operation continues.
Horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background is continued (continuous background change is possible). For example, the image data changes as shown in the normal background image data of FIG.

As a result, even if the performance control board 130 fails to receive the stop command, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 will continue to emit rainbow light, allowing the player to be sure that a jackpot will be played later.

Furthermore, the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the presentation action, so the player can enjoy it until the next command is received.
Furthermore, since the background image is normally scrolled horizontally continuously (continuous background changes are possible), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Regarding the success sound and rainbow light emission at the timing of T7)
Here, further details (frames) of the success sound and rainbow light emission at timing T7 will be described.
In this embodiment, the update period (frame update timing) of the performance image controlled by the overall control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and the control period of each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, performance button light-emitting LED 17c) controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are synchronized (synchronized) at 1/30 seconds.

For example, if the frame immediately prior to timing T7 in Figure 111 is frame 1500 (the start of the fluctuation is frame 1), then the effect button detection switch 17a will be turned ON at frame 1501 of timing T7 (the effect button 17 is operated by the player).
When the performance button detection switch 17 a is turned ON, an operation command is transmitted from the performance control unit 130 m to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 .

In this case, in the image control unit 145, a "success image" (see FIG. 98(f), for example) is drawn in the drawing frame buffer in the "1502" frame, which is the frame following the "1501" frame in which the effect button detection switch 17a was turned ON, and the "success image" is displayed in the "1503" frame. This makes the "success image" visible via the main display device 70.
Furthermore, in the audio control unit 148, in synchronization with the "1503" frame, a "success sound" is output from the audio output device 9. This makes it possible to hear the success sound "queen, queen."

Furthermore, in the lamp control unit 150, in synchronization with the "1503" frame, rainbow light emission data is output to cause each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and performance button light-emitting LED 17c) to emit rainbow light. This makes it possible to visually confirm the rainbow light emitted by each lighting device.

In this way, in the above example, the "success image" is displayed, the "success sound" is output, and the "rainbow light" is emitted in synchronization with the "1503" frame, so the execution of the presentation to notify of a jackpot can be synchronized (without any misalignment in any one of the notification means), and a jackpot notification that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

Although not listed in the example of FIG. 111, in the case of a jackpot announcement, the configuration for moving the movable effect device described below or the configuration for vibrating the vibration means may be performed in synchronization with the "1503" frame in the above example.

Then, for example, at the 1530th frame, the "success sound" is turned OFF, and at the 1540th frame, the rainbow light of the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is turned OFF.
Then, for example, when a stop display is performed at timing T10 (for example, "the 1650th frame"), the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 is turned off.

As a result, in the above example, the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 ends in synchronization with the stopped display of the "1650" frame, so that the rainbow light emission does not continue after the stopped display, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.
The above description of frame synchronization can be applied to the figures explaining the jackpot notification below.

(Timing chart when a big win game is executed after a variable performance involving a symbol promotion performance or a revival performance ends)
Using Fig. 113, an example of the symbol promotion effect, an example of the revival effect, and an example of the effect during a big win game will be described. Note that Fig. 113 will mainly explain the parts that are different from Fig. 111 (mainly the effect symbol and the effect symbol mode). Also, in order to make Fig. 113 easier to understand, supplementary explanations will be given using Fig. 114 and Fig. 115.

Note that, as an example, Figures 113 to 115 explain a case where a jackpot game is executed after a variable effect accompanied by a symbol promotion effect or a revival effect has ended in a "normal game state", but this is not limited thereto, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving game state" or a "high probability game state".

(When the "design promotion effect" is executed)
At timing T7 in Fig. 113, the performance symbol finishes updating and temporarily stops. At this time, the performance symbol state (temporarily stopped performance symbol) is set to "444" (first state in the performance symbol) (see Fig. 114 (f) to (g)).
In addition, a success sound "queen queen" is output as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74 and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b is turned ON and the performance button 17 vibrates.
As shown in Figures 114 (f) to (g), when the performance pattern temporarily stops at "444", the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate.

Then, from timing T8 to T8-1, the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and each effect symbol 70a starts scrolling as shown in Fig. 114(g) to (g)'. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the effect button light-emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF.
In addition, when the "symbol promotion effect" is being executed, the special symbol TZ continues to be updated and changed in the same manner as before the "symbol promotion effect" was executed.

If the "symbol promotion effect" is successful, the effect symbol 70a of "777" (second mode of the effect symbol) is temporarily stopped as shown in Fig. 114(h), and if the "symbol promotion effect" is unsuccessful, the effect symbol 70a of "444", for example, is temporarily stopped again. At this time, the success sound "Kyuuin Kyuuin" is output again as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the effect button light-emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b is turned on, and the effect button 17 vibrates.
In addition, the configuration of outputting the success sound again, the configuration of making each lighting device emit rainbow light, and the configuration of vibrating the effect button 17 may be executed only if the "pattern promotion effect" is successful, and may not be executed if the "pattern promotion effect" is unsuccessful.
In addition, in FIG. 114(h), the special symbol TZ continues to be updated and changed in the same manner as before the "symbol promotion effect" was executed.

As shown in FIG. 114(i), the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are both displayed as stopped at "777". In other words, the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped before the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and continues to update and fluctuate even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped after the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and ends the update and fluctuate when the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped. This allows players to recognize that the variable effect is continuing due to the continued update and fluctuate of the special pattern TZ, even if they find it difficult to tell whether the variable effect is continuing due to the execution of the "symbol promotion effect" of the effect pattern 70a.

(When a "Resurrection" is performed)
Next, a case where the "revival performance" is executed will be described. For convenience, the case where the "symbol promotion performance" is executed and the case where the "revival performance" is executed are collectively described in FIG. 113, but the "symbol promotion performance" may be executed after the "revival performance" is executed.

At timing T7 in Fig. 113, the effect symbol finishes updating and stops temporarily. At this time, the effect symbol state (the temporarily stopped effect symbol) is set to "454" (the first state by the effect symbol) (see Fig. 115 (f) to (g)).
In addition, a failure sound is output as a sound effect (see Figure 93 (f)), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF.
As shown in Figures 115 (f) to (g), when the performance pattern temporarily stops at "454", the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate.

Then, from timing T8 to T8-1, the "revival performance" is executed, and a revival performance image FG imitating thunder is displayed as shown in Fig. 115(g) to (g)'. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF.
In addition, while the "revival performance" is being executed, the special pattern TZ continues to be updated and fluctuated in the same manner as before the "revival performance" was executed.

Then, as shown in Fig. 115(h), the effect symbol 70a of "777" (the second mode of the effect symbol) is temporarily stopped. At this time, the success sound "Kyuin Kyuin" is output as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the effect button light-emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b is turned on, and the effect button 17 vibrates.
In addition, in FIG. 115(h), the special pattern TZ continues to be updated and fluctuated in the same manner as before the "revival performance" was executed.

As shown in FIG. 115(i), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are both displayed as stopped at "777". In other words, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the "revival performance" is executed, and continues to update and fluctuate even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped after the "revival performance" is executed, and ends the update and fluctuate when the performance symbol 70a is displayed as stopped. This allows players to recognize that the variable performance is continuing due to the continued update and fluctuate of the special symbol TZ, even if they find it difficult to tell whether the variable performance is continuing due to the execution of the "revival performance" of the performance symbol 70a.

In either case, when the "symbol promotion effect" is executed or when the "revival effect" is executed, the jackpot game starts from timing T14, and during the jackpot game, only the number portion of the effect pattern 70a that is stopped and displayed is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 114 (m) and 115 (m), a round image RG indicating the first round of the jackpot game, a number of acquired balls image GG indicating the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game, a right hit image UG, a character image KG, and a character introduction image KSG showing details of the displayed character image KG are displayed, and in addition to these, the number portion (e.g., "7") of the performance pattern 70a 1 is displayed in a position (e.g., upper left) where it does not overlap with other displayed images.

The number portion (e.g., "7") of the performance pattern 70a No. 1 is a pattern corresponding to the performance pattern 70a displayed in a stopped state in Figure 114 (i), and is displayed, for example, by oscillating below the round image RG, and is displayed at the same size as the display size when displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 114 (i)).
In addition, the display data of the number portion (e.g., "7") of the performance pattern 70a No. 1 is different from the display data of the performance pattern 70a stopped and displayed in Figure 114 (i).

In this way, by displaying the number portion (for example, "7") of the performance pattern 70a of 1 in an oscillating manner, it is possible to increase the entertainment value of the performance during a big win game.
In addition, by displaying the number portion (e.g., "7") of the performance pattern 70a 1 so that it does not overlap with other images (e.g., right-hit image UG), the other images can be reliably viewed.
Furthermore, by displaying the number portion (e.g., "7") of the performance pattern 70a No. 1 at the same size as the display size when stopped and displayed (see FIG. 114 (i)), it is possible to prevent the display of other images (e.g., right-hit image UG) from being obstructed, and the other images can be reliably viewed.
Furthermore, for example, if a pattern (e.g., a "seven") that does not correspond to the performance pattern 70a displayed in the stopped state in Figure 114 (i) is displayed, the player may feel uncomfortable. However, with this configuration, by displaying a pattern (e.g., a "7") that corresponds to the performance pattern 70a displayed in the stopped state in Figure 114 (i), this can be prevented from making the player feel uncomfortable.

During a jackpot game, three performance symbols 70a may be displayed, or one or three performance symbols 70a with characters may be displayed, the performance symbols 70a may be stopped throughout without swinging, or may be made to swing and stop repeatedly, or may rotate. A performance symbol 70a with characters refers to a state in which a character is attached to a number symbol, such as the performance symbol 70a in FIG. 114(i).

In the example of FIG. 114, the "symbol promotion effect" performed from (g) to (g)' constitutes the pre-stop action, and in the example of FIG. 115, the "revival effect" performed from (g) to (g)' constitutes the pre-stop action.

(Regarding the start timing of the variable display after the end of a jackpot game)
Here, we will mention the characteristic features of the start timing of the variable display after the end of a big win game, which is not shown in Figure 113.
At the start timing of the variable display after the end of the big win game, the same type of symbols as the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed at timing T10 may be displayed as the display mode of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 113, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the big win game, "777" is displayed as the performance symbol 70a and "777" is displayed as the special symbol TZ, and the (first variable) variable display after the end of the big win game is started from that state.

This allows the player to reconfirm what the big win symbol was at the timing when the variable display starts after the big win game ends.
In addition, the same type of pattern refers to, for example, when the performance pattern 70a with characters stops at "777", and the performance pattern 70a with characters "777" is displayed again at the start of the changing display after the jackpot game ends; when the performance pattern 70a with characters stops at "777", and the performance pattern 70a with numbers only "777" is displayed at the start of the changing display after the jackpot game ends; and when the performance pattern 70a with numbers only "777" is displayed, and the performance pattern 70a with numbers only "777" is displayed at the start of the changing display after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, the display mode of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may display a different type of symbol from the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed at timing T10. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 113, in the stopped display, "777" is displayed as the performance symbol 70a and "777" is displayed as the special symbol TZ, but at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, "135" (the initial number after the end of the jackpot game state) may be displayed as the performance symbol 70a and "135" (the initial number after the end of the jackpot game state) may be displayed as the special symbol TZ.
For example, if the machine is in a waiting state when the jackpot game ends (if there are no reserved balls when the jackpot game ends), the main display device 70 will display "777" as the performance symbol 70a (until the game ball enters the start hole) and "777" as the special symbol TZ (until the game ball enters the start hole). In such a case, the player may mistakenly think that the game is moving to a jackpot game, so by displaying the initial result after the jackpot game ends as described above, such a mistake can be prevented.

The configuration of displaying different patterns is particularly effective in gaming machines that may display a predetermined pattern as the performance pattern 70a of a jackpot. The special pattern is a pattern that is not displayed as the performance pattern 70a in the update fluctuation in the normal game state, and is displayed only when a jackpot is won with a special pattern. For example, the jackpot display mode of the performance pattern 70a is "5 (left) - predetermined pattern (center) - 5 (right)". Even in such a case, if "135" (the initial number after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the performance pattern 70a at the start of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, and "135" (the initial number after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the special pattern TZ, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by the display of the predetermined pattern at the start of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game.

The characteristic part regarding the timing at which the variable display starts after the end of a jackpot game is not limited to FIG. 113, but may be applied to any timing chart that transitions to a jackpot game (for example, FIG. 111 mentioned above or FIG. 117 described below).

(If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the presentation mode when the presentation control board 130 fails to receive the stop command at timing T10 will be described.

If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit rainbow light → the rainbow light continues to be emitted even after timing T10 (the performance is extended and executed).
Since the rainbow light emission of the effect button light emitting LED 17c ends before the timing of T10 is reached, there is no effect even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Since the output of the success sound ends before the timing of T10 is reached, there is no impact even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended).
Since the vibration ends before the timing of the button drive device 17b being driven →T10 is reached, there is no effect even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended).
The temporary stop continues at "777" even after the timing of the performance symbol 70a→T10. Then, the temporary stop continues until an opening designation command is received at the timing of T13, for example.
The updating and changing continues even after the timing of the special symbol TZ→T10. Then, the updating and changing continues until an opening designation command is received at the timing of T13, for example.
The icon TI is not disappeared, and the presentation operation continues.
Continue horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background (continuous background change is possible).

As a result, even if the performance control board 130 fails to receive the stop command, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 will continue to emit rainbow light, allowing the player to be sure that a jackpot will be played later.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command, the performance pattern 70a will not be stopped and will continue to be temporarily stopped, and the special pattern TZ will continue to be updated and changed, so that while the player is aware that a jackpot has been reached, the player can also be aware that the patterns have not yet been stopped and the jackpot game has not yet begun.

In addition, the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ are terminated, for example, when an opening designation command is received at timing T13. This allows the performance control board 130 to end the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ with the next command received (here, an opening designation command) even if the performance control board 130 is unable to receive the stop command, thereby eliminating the need to send and receive again a dedicated command to end the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ.

Furthermore, the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the presentation action, so the player can enjoy it until the next command is received.
Furthermore, the background image normally continues to scroll horizontally (continuous background changes are possible), so the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when a variation effect is executed after the end of the miss SPSP reach variation effect)
Fig. 116 is a diagram for explaining in detail the effect image and effect symbols in Fig. 92. Therefore, the effect image and effect symbols will be mainly explained, and explanations of overlapping parts with Fig. 92 will be omitted.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 116 explains a case where a variation effect is executed after a miss SPSP reach variation effect has ended in a "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "high probability gaming state".

At the timing of T0 in Fig. 116, the performance pattern is updated with a character. As described above, the character is a state in which a number pattern is attached to a character.
Then, at the timing of T1, the normal reach effect is executed, and a normal reach image is displayed as the effect image. The normal reach effect is performed using the effect pattern 70a with a character. In FIG. 116, this is described as "with character".

Then, at the timing of T2, when the normal reach effect ends, the effect pattern 70a with characters changes to an effect pattern 70a with numbers only (for example, see FIG. 93(a)). Then, an update is performed with the effect pattern 70a with numbers only.

When the character-attached performance pattern 70a changes to the number-only performance pattern 70a, for example, the character portion of the performance pattern 70a disappears from the state shown in FIG. 91(g), and the number portion moves to the position shown in FIG. 93(a). During the movement, the display size of the number portion is gradually reduced and moves to the position shown in FIG. 93(a). That is, the display size of the number portion at the timing when the character portion disappears, the display size of the number portion at the timing during movement (middle position), and the display size of the number portion at the timing of moving to the position shown in FIG. 93(a) are in descending order of display size: the timing when the character portion disappears>the timing during movement (middle position)>the timing of moving to the position shown in FIG. 93(a).
This prevents the number portion from suddenly being displayed as having moved to the position shown in Fig. 93(a), which makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, by displaying all of the movement patterns in a manner that is visible to the player, the player can enjoy even the small details.

Then, at timing T4, the SP reach effect is executed, and an SP reach image is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 93(c)).
Also, even during the execution of the SP reach performance, the performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only continues to be updated and changed.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the SP reach presentation ends and the SPSP reach presentation is executed, an SPSP reach image is displayed as the presentation image (for example, see FIG. 93(d)).
Also, even during the execution of the SPSP reach performance, the performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only continues to be updated and changed.

Then, at the timing of T6, a final image corresponding to the final effect is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 93(e)), and at the timing of T7, a failure image is displayed as the effect image in response to the operation of the effect button 17 (see, for example, FIG. 93(f)). At this time, the effect pattern is temporarily stopped at the effect pattern 70a which is only a number. Note that in FIG. 116, this is described as a "temporary stop number".

Then, at the timing of T8, the performance pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters, and the state of the performance pattern 70a before the SP reach performance is executed is returned to. Then, a temporary stop is made at the performance pattern 70a with characters. Note that in FIG. 116, this is described as a "temporary stop character."

When changing from a number-only performance pattern 70a to a character-attached performance pattern 70a, the movement is not made visible as when the character-attached performance pattern 70a changes to a number-only performance pattern 70a, but instead, as shown in FIG. 131 described below, a switching image is displayed to change from the number-only performance pattern 70a to the character-attached performance pattern 70a. This allows the pattern to be changed quickly, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable by being shown the movement of the pattern after a loss has been notified, for example.

Then, at the timing of T10, the performance pattern 70a is displayed stopped with a character attached.
By configuring in this way, in the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance, the display space for the performance pattern 70a with only numbers allows the player to concentrate on the performance content of the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance. Then, when the SPSP reach performance ends, the performance pattern 70a with characters is restored, allowing the next variable performance to start smoothly and without discomfort.

In the example of FIG. 116, the performance pattern 70a changes to a number-only appearance, but even if an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is performed, the performance pattern 70a may remain with the character attached and not change.

In the example of FIG. 116, the "temporary stop" of the performance pattern 70a while the failure images (f) to (g) are displayed constitutes the pre-stop action.

(If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the presentation mode when the presentation control board 130 fails to receive the stop command at timing T10 will be described.

If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The icon TI is not disappeared, and the presentation operation continues.
Continue horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background (continuous background change is possible).
After the timing of the performance pattern 70a→T10, the temporary stop is performed on the performance pattern 70a with the character. Then, the temporary stop is continued until the start command is received at the timing of T13, for example.
The update fluctuation continues even after the timing of the special symbol TZ→T10. Then, the update fluctuation continues until the start command is received at the timing of T13, for example.

As a result, even if the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command, the performance pattern 70a will not be stopped and the temporary stop will continue, and the special pattern TZ will continue to be updated and changed, so that the player can recognize that the patterns have not yet been stopped and the next change display will not begin.

In addition, the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ are terminated, for example, when a start command is received at timing T13. This allows the performance control board 130 to end the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ with the next command received (here, the start command) even if the performance control board 130 is unable to receive the stop command, eliminating the need to send and receive dedicated commands again to end the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ.

Furthermore, the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the presentation action, so the player can enjoy it until the next command is received.
Furthermore, since the background image is normally scrolled horizontally continuously (continuous background changes are possible), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance ends)
Fig. 117 is a diagram for explaining in detail the effect image and effect symbols in Fig. 97. Therefore, the effect image and effect symbols will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the overlapping parts with Fig. 97 will be omitted.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 117 explains a case where a variation effect is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect has ended in the "normal gaming state", but this is not limited thereto, and the same thing may also be done in the "time-saving gaming state" or the "high probability gaming state".

At the timing of T0 in Fig. 117, the performance pattern is updated with a character. As described above, the character is a state in which a number pattern is attached to a character.
Then, at the timing of T1, the normal reach effect is executed, and a normal reach image is displayed as the effect image. The normal reach effect is performed using the effect pattern 70a with a character. In FIG. 117, this is described as "with character".

Then, at the timing of T2, when the normal reach effect ends, the effect pattern 70a with characters changes to an effect pattern 70a with numbers only. Then, an update change is made to the effect pattern 70a with numbers only. Note that the manner in which the effect pattern 70a with characters changes to an effect pattern 70a with numbers only is the same as that described in FIG. 116.

Then, at the timing of T4, the SP reach effect is executed, and an SP reach image is displayed as an effect image.
Also, even during the execution of the SP reach performance, the performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only continues to be updated and changed.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the SP reach performance ends and the SPSP reach performance is executed, an SPSP reach image is displayed as a performance image.
Also, even during the execution of the SPSP reach performance, the performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only continues to be updated and changed.

Then, at the timing of T6, a final image corresponding to the final effect is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 98(e)), and at the timing of T7, a success image is displayed as the effect image in response to the operation of the effect button 17 (see, for example, FIG. 98(f)). At this time, the effect pattern is temporarily stopped at the effect pattern 70a consisting of numbers only. Note that in FIG. 117, this is described as a "temporary stop number".

Then, at the timing of T8, the performance pattern 70a with numbers only is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters, and the state of the performance pattern 70a is returned to the state before the SP reach performance was executed. Then, a temporary stop is made at the performance pattern 70a with characters (see, for example, FIG. 98(g)). Note that in FIG. 117, this is described as a "temporary stop character." Note that the manner in which the performance pattern 70a with numbers only is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters is the same as the manner described in FIG. 116.

Then, at the timing of T10, the performance pattern 70a is displayed stopped with a character attached.
By configuring in this manner, in the case of SP reach performances and SPSP reach performances, numbers only are displayed in the display space of the performance pattern 70a, allowing the player to concentrate on the performance content of the SP reach performances and SPSP reach performances.

In the example of FIG. 116, the "temporary stop" of the performance pattern 70a while the success images (f) to (g) are displayed constitutes the pre-stop action.

In the example of FIG. 117, at the timing of T8, the performance pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters, and at the timing of T10, the performance pattern 70a with characters is displayed as stopped, but this is not limited to this and other patterns may be used.

For example, it may have the pattern shown in FIG. 118. In FIG. 118, at the timing T8 in the example of FIG. 117, the performance pattern 70a with numbers only is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters, but in FIG. 118, the performance pattern 70a with numbers only is maintained without changing to the performance pattern 70a with characters at the same timing, and is displayed as is.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(h), the effect pattern 70a "555" consisting of numbers only is temporarily stopped, and then from (i) to (l), the effect pattern 70a "555" consisting of numbers only is stopped. Then, from (l), the game transitions to the big win game.

This configuration can reduce the time it takes to change from a number-only presentation pattern 70a to a character presentation pattern 70a, allowing for a quick transition to a big win game.

Note that if the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at timing T10, the situation is basically the same as in Figure 111, so a description of this will be omitted here.

(Example of normal background image data)
Fig. 119 is an example of normal background image data in mode A. Note that, although the explanation will be given taking mode A as an example, other modes (for example, mode B) are configured in the same way (only the image data content is different).

For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the normal background image data in mode A has multiple types of background image data, such as image data called "Castle Town 1" (e.g., one image) -> image data called "Castle Town 2" (e.g., one image) -> image data called "Castle Town 3" (e.g., one image)... (e.g., stored in CGROM 146). An update value corresponding to each image data is determined. The update value is a value that is updated in the image control unit 145 at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 1/30 seconds), and the normal background image data is selected by referring to the update value. For example, the update value "1" is determined for "Castle Town 1," the update value "2" is determined for "Castle Town 2," and the update value "3" is determined for "Castle Town 3," and if the current value updated in the image control unit 145 is "2," "Castle Town 2" is displayed.

Similarly, there are multiple types of background image data, such as image data "Inside castle 1" (e.g., one image) -> image data "Inside castle 2" (e.g., one image) -> image data "Inside castle 3" (e.g., one image), and so on. For "Inside castle 1", the update value is set to "N", for "Inside castle 2", the update value is set to "N+1", and for "Inside castle 3", the update value is set to "N+2".

Similarly, there are multiple types of background image data, such as image data "Garden 1" (e.g., one image) -> image data "Garden 2" (e.g., one image) -> image data "Garden 3" (e.g., one image), and so on, and the update value is set to "N+3" for "Garden 1," "N+4" for "Garden 2," and "N+5" for "Garden 3."

Next, a method for displaying a background image using such image data will be explained using a timing chart for (a) a case where a variation effect is executed after a miss SPSP reach variation effect has ended. Note that this timing chart has the same content as that explained in FIG. 92.

From timing T0 to T2, a horizontally scrolling normal background is displayed as the background image, and as an example, "Castle Town 2" is displayed on layer N+1. In other words, the normal background image of "Castle Town 2" is visible to the player. Also, since it is "Castle Town 2", the update value is "2".

Then, when timing T2 is reached, a dark background is displayed in layer N, and normal background image data is not displayed in layer N+1. This allows the player to see the dark background, and the background image relating to the "castle town" that was displayed up until timing T2 becomes invisible (see Figures 93 (a) and (b)). Note that although it is said to be "invisible," it is also possible that the background image relating to the "castle town" is partially visible, or that the entire background image relating to the "castle town" is faintly visible. In other words, it may be "difficult to see."

The update value is updated at a predetermined interval even if the background image data is not normally displayed. For example, the update value is updated to "3" from timing T2.

Then, when horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes from timing T8 (the same as timing T8 in FIG. 92), the image control unit 145 refers to the updated value and selects the normal background image data. In the example of FIG. 119, the updated value at timing T8 is "N+4", and the normal background image data of "Garden 2" corresponding to the updated value "N+4" is deployed to layer N+1. As a result, when the SPSP reach performance ends and horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.

In other words, when horizontal scrolling of the normal background is resumed from timing T8 (the same as timing T8 in Figure 92), the normal background image is not displayed from the point in time when it became invisible (timing T2 in Figure 119) ("castle town" in the example of Figure 119), but rather, the normal background image is treated as continuing to change even during the invisible period, and the normal background image corresponding to the updated value at the time of resumption is displayed ("garden" in the example of Figure 119).
For example, if the normal background is displayed from the point where it became unrecognizable when the game is restarted, the amount of change in the normal background will be small, which will bore the player, but by configuring it as shown in Fig. 119, the amount of change in the normal background can be increased, allowing the player to view a variety of normal background images. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored.

In the example of FIG. 119(a), the normal background image is redisplayed using the update value, but this can be achieved using other methods. For example, in the modified example of FIG. 119(b), no update value is used.

Specifically, even if the normal background image becomes invisible at timing T2, the development on the layers continues. For example, at timing T2, the normal background image data of "Castle Town 3," which is a continuation of "Castle Town 2" that was developed up until timing T2, is developed on layer N+1. However, because layer N+1 is a layer located behind layer N, when the layers are combined and displayed on the main display device 70, "Castle Town 3" becomes invisible due to the dark background developed on layer N. In other words, although it is developed on the layers, it is in a state where it cannot be seen by the player.

Then, the development on the layers continues, and the normal background image data developed on layer N+1 just before timing T8 is set to "Garden 1." The time when timing T8 is reached is set to the display time for one frame of "Garden 1."

Then, at the scene where horizontal scrolling of the normal background is resumed from timing T8 (the same as timing T8 in FIG. 92), the image control unit 145 continues to develop the normal background image data in layer N+1. Here, "Garden 2", which is a continuation of "Garden 1", is developed. As a result, when the SPSP reach performance ends and horizontal scrolling of the normal background is resumed, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.
Even with this configuration, the same effects as those obtained with the above-mentioned method (A) can be obtained.

In FIG. 119, an example of normal background image data in mode A is described, but the same configuration (not redisplaying from the timing when it became hidden) may also be used in the time-saving game state or the probability game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state or the probability game state, it may be redisplayed from the timing when it became hidden, or when redisplaying, it may always be redisplayed from certain specific image data (for example, image data displaying a specific character). In particular, in the time-saving game state or the probability game state, the amount of change in the background image is not as large as in the normal game state, so the display control can be simplified by redisplaying from the timing when it became hidden or redisplaying from certain specific image data (for example, image data displaying a specific character). In addition, in the probability game state, it is easier to win a jackpot compared to the normal game state, so the player has less time to view the background image. Therefore, the display control can be simplified in this way.

In addition, when the presentation operation (shaking operation) of the reserved icon HI described in Fig. 72 is redisplayed, it is not redisplayed from the position at the time when it was hidden, but is redisplayed from the position at the time of redisplay, assuming that the presentation operation (shaking operation) continues even during the invisible period. This allows the player to view various positions of the reserved icon HI, preventing the player from feeling bored.
The same configuration may also be used to hide the icon TI together with the hold icon HI.

(Other examples of the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance)
120 to 122 show other examples of the jackpot SPSP reach variation presentation. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot SPSP reach variation presentations, one example of which is shown in Fig. 97 to Fig. 99, and another example is shown in Fig. 120 to Fig. 122. Note that in Fig. 120, the explanation will be given starting from timing T5, and the explanation of timings T0 to T5 will be omitted since they are the same as those in Fig. 97.

Note that, as an example, Figures 120 to 122 explain a case where a variation effect is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect has ended in the "normal gaming state", but this is not limited thereto, and the same thing may also be done in the "time-saving gaming state" or the "high probability gaming state".

At timing T5, the SPSP reach performance is executed. In this SPSP reach performance, as shown in Fig. 121(d), a character image imitating a girl says the words "I'll stand on the stage again!" (word image SER1), and correspondingly, as shown in Fig. 121(d) to (e), a task image MG in the SPSP reach performance is displayed, saying "If you press the button and the girl character stands on the stage, it's a big win."
In other words, the SPSP reach effect shown in Figures 120 to 122 is an effect in which the player operates the effect button 17 (for example, a single hit, a continuous hit, a long press, etc.) and if a girl character stands on the stage, a big win is obtained.

The dialogue image SER1 can be displayed in white text in the normal mode, or in red text in the special mode, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot being played than the normal mode. In other words, there is a higher expectation of a jackpot being played when the dialogue image SER1 is displayed in the special mode than when it is displayed in the normal mode (= the girl character is more likely to appear on stage).

Then, toward timing T6, a button introduction image BDG is displayed, suggesting that timing T6 will soon be reached and that the performance button 17 will be operated.
Then, at time T6, the final image is displayed and the prompting sound "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 121(e)).

When the effect button 17 is operated, a success image is displayed and a success sound is output (see Fig. 121 (f) to (g)). Then, from timing T8 to timing T8-1, an "SPSP reach image (lingering image)" is displayed as an effect image. Correspondingly, SPSP reach BGM (lingering BGM) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, all of the effect patterns 70a are hidden (see Fig. 121 (g) to (g)').

Then, the afterglow image as shown in Fig. 121(g)-(g)' is displayed. This afterglow image is executed for a predetermined period as shown in Fig. 122(g)-(g)', and while the afterglow image is displayed, all the performance symbols 70a are hidden, and the special symbols TZ continue to be updated and changed visibly. If there is a reserved icon, the reserved icon is hidden.
In other words, although a jackpot is announced in Figures 121 (f) to (g), the jackpot is not announced by the performance pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ while the afterglow image is displayed thereafter.

This allows the player to concentrate on the display of the afterglow image. Also, by hiding the performance pattern 70a etc., the afterglow image can be made easier to see. Even if the performance pattern 70a is hidden, the special pattern TZ continues to visibly update and change, so the player can easily understand that a continuing change performance is being executed after the big win notification.

The line "Thank you everyone" (line image SER2) shown in Figures 122(g)-(g)' is displayed in white text in the normal mode, and is not displayed in a special mode like the line image SER1 described above. For example, even if the line image SER1 described above is displayed in a special mode, the line image SER2 is displayed in the normal mode.

In other words, since Fig. 122(g)-(g)' is after the big win has already been notified, excessive effects can be prevented by displaying the dialogue image SER2 in the normal mode. Also, if the dialogue image SER2 is displayed in the special mode, there is a risk that the player may mistakenly think that something will be notified after Fig. 122(g)-(g)', but this risk can also be eliminated.
In addition, the display mode of the dialogue image SER2 may be based on the display mode of the dialogue image SER1. For example, when a special mode is determined as the display mode of the dialogue image SER1, the display mode of the dialogue image SER2 may also be the special mode. This allows for consistency in the presentation.

In addition, the afterglow image is related to the content of the task image MG shown in Figures 121 (d) to (e), for example, and a performance that clears the content of the task image MG is developed. This allows the player to understand that there is a connection between the performances before and after the big win notification.
Then, after that, when the display of the afterglow image is all finished, the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at "555" from timing T8-1 to timing T9. In other words, the performance pattern 70a is displayed from timing T8-1.

In addition, while the afterglow image is displayed, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c may be made to emit rainbow light. As a result, although the performance pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ does not notify the player that a jackpot has been obtained, the light-emitting state of each lighting device can make the player aware that a jackpot has been obtained. Furthermore, since the afterglow image is displayed along with the rainbow light emission, the player can be made even more satisfied. Furthermore, if the afterglow image is displayed for a long time, some players may become anxious about whether they have really obtained a jackpot, but if each lighting device emits rainbow light, such anxiety can be eliminated.

In addition, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the button drive device 17b may be turned ON to vibrate the effect button 17. As a result, although no notification is given that a jackpot has been obtained using the effect pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ, the vibration of the effect button 17 can make the player aware that a jackpot has been obtained. In addition, since the afterglow image is displayed along with the vibration of the effect button 17, the player can be made even more satisfied.

On the other hand, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 may be made to emit normal light (e.g., white light) and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c may be turned off. This allows the player to focus more attention on the afterglow image without being distracted by the light emission modes of each lighting device.

In addition, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the button drive device 17b may be turned off so that the effect button 17 does not vibrate. This allows the viewer to focus more attention on the afterglow image without being distracted by the vibration of the effect button 17.

In addition, while the afterglow image is displayed, all of the performance patterns 70a are hidden, but this is not limited to the above, as long as the display is not intended to notify a jackpot. For example, the left and right performance patterns 70a may be displayed, with the center performance pattern 70a changing (e.g., "5↓5"). This makes it possible to prevent the player from forgetting which performance pattern 70a corresponds to the jackpot.

In addition, if the SPSP reach presentation shown in Figures 120 to 122 is a miss, the movable presentation device shown in Figures 121(f) to (g) does not operate, and the variable presentation ends without displaying the lingering image in Figures 121(g) to (g)'. In other words, if it is a miss, the lingering image is not displayed, making it possible to make the lingering image worth displaying only if a jackpot is obtained. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by having the lingering image corresponding to a miss displayed for a long time despite the miss.

Note that if the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at timing T10, the situation is basically the same as in Figure 111, so a description of this will be omitted here.

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
123 is a timing chart when the operation means (for example, the operation button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Note that case 1 and case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operation means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (miss).
For convenience, the explanation starts from the timing when the SPSP reach performance is reached, but the configuration for the start of the fluctuation can be the configuration described in Figure 73, and the configuration up to the development into the SPSP reach performance can be the configuration described in Figure 92.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 123 explains a case where a miss SPSP reach variation effect is executed in a "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "high probability gaming state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

And because both cases are SPSP reach variation effects (misses), from timing T3, a failure image is displayed, a failure sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a manner that notifies the user that the effect pattern 70a has failed.

In either case, the failure image is displayed and the temporary stop is continued in a manner to notify the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed until the end of the "N+57th cycle" cycle fluctuation.
In other words, in case 1, a failure image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is made in a manner to notify the user that the performance pattern 70a has failed, and in case 2, a failure image is displayed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), and a temporary stop is made in a manner to notify the user that the performance pattern 70a has failed. In case 1, the period of the temporary stop in a manner to display a failure image and notify the user that the performance pattern 70a has failed is longer (by approximately 2 seconds) than in case 2.

In addition, the failure sound is output for approximately 1 second (approximately 4 cycle variations) in each case, and the output period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the performance button 17.

In other words, in case 1, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T3 and timing T4 is "approximately 52 cycle variations," whereas in case 2, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T3 and timing T4 is "approximately 44 cycle variations," resulting in a difference in the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T3 and timing T4.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
In addition, in both cases, the effect symbols are displayed at timing T6. That is, in cases 1 and 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the effect symbols are displayed are from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The effect symbols are displayed until timing T8.

In other words, in either case, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T4 and timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 28 cycle variations," and there is no difference in the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T4 and timing T6 (or T8).

In addition, in case 1, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3 when the player operates the effect button 17 and timing T6 when the effect symbols start to be displayed in a stopped state, or timing T8 when the effect symbols end, is "approximately 80 cycle changes", whereas in case 2, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3 when the player operates the effect button 17 and timing T6 when the effect symbols start to be displayed in a stopped state, or timing T8 when the effect symbols end, is "approximately 72 cycle changes", resulting in a difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs despite the same SPSP reach change effect, for example, there will be a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the failure image that takes place between timing T3 and timing T4, and in the execution time of the temporary stop in a manner that notifies the player that the effect pattern 70a has missed. This may give the player the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the player the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach change effect has been executed.
In contrast to this, for example, if one visually observes the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (more precisely, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5), it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so that the number of cycle fluctuations will prevent one from realizing that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the performance button 17, or from mistakenly thinking that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed.

In addition, the failure sound is output for about one second (about four cycles of fluctuation) in either case, so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can be made aware that he or she has missed.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T4 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T4 will be approximately 8 seconds (the cycle variation executed during this period is "approximately 32 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
124 is a timing chart when the operation means (for example, the operation button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Note that case 1 and case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operation means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation starts from the timing when the SPSP reach performance is reached, but the configuration for the start of the fluctuation can be the configuration described in Figure 73, and the configuration up to the development into the SPSP reach performance can be the configuration described in Figure 97.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 124 explains a case where a jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in a "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "high probability gaming state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

In both cases, the SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) occurs, so from timing T3, the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and a provisional stop in a manner that notifies the player of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will begin.

At timing T3, the movable effect device starts to operate. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 98(f), the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are lowered (large lowered) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction.
The movable effect device operates until timing T3-1.

In either case, the display of the success image and the provisional stop in a manner to notify a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a continue until the end of the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle".
In other words, in case 1, a success image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a provisional stop is made in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, and in case 2, the above-mentioned success image is displayed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), and a provisional stop is made in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, so the period of time for displaying the success image and provisionally stopping in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a is longer (by approximately 2 seconds) in case 1 than in case 2.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle variations) in both cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the performance button 17.

In addition, the operation of the movable performance device (standby position → performance position, performance position → standby position) takes approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycles of fluctuation) in each case, so that the operation period (and the number of cycles of fluctuation during the operation period) does not differ depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
In addition, in both cases, the effect symbols are displayed at timing T6. That is, in cases 1 and 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the effect symbols are displayed are from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The effect symbols are displayed until timing T8.

In other words, in case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations executed from the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a in a manner to indicate a jackpot win, and the start of operation of the movable performance device at timing T3 until the performance pattern stops at timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 80 cycle fluctuations," whereas in case 2, the number of cycle fluctuations executed from the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a in a manner to indicate a jackpot win, and the start of operation of the movable performance device at timing T3 until the performance pattern stops at timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations," resulting in a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs despite the same SPSP reach change effect, for example, there will be a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and in the execution time of the temporary stop in a manner that notifies of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach change effect has been executed.
In contrast to this, for example, if one visually observes the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (more precisely, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5), it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so that the number of cycle fluctuations will prevent one from realizing that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the performance button 17, or from mistakenly thinking that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, so the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs.

In addition, the operation of the movable effect device lasts for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycles of fluctuation) in either case, so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 60 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
125 is a timing chart when the operation means (for example, the operation button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Note that case 1 and case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operation means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation starts from the timing when the SPSP reach performance is reached, but the configuration for the start of the fluctuation can be the configuration described in Figure 73, and the configuration up to the development into the SPSP reach performance can be the configuration described in Figure 97.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 125 explains a case where a jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in a "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "high probability gaming state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing when the set image is displayed and the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

In both cases, the SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) occurs, so from timing T3, the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and a provisional stop in a manner that notifies the player of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will begin.

Also, at timing T3, the vibration means (button driving device 17b) starts to operate. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 112(f), the button driving device 17b operates to vibrate the effect button 17.
The vibration means operates until timing T3-1.

In either case, the display of the success image and the provisional stop in a manner to notify a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a continue until the end of the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle".
In other words, in case 1, a success image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a provisional stop is made in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, and in case 2, the above-mentioned success image is displayed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), and a provisional stop is made in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, so the period of time for displaying the success image and provisionally stopping in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a is longer (by approximately 2 seconds) in case 1 than in case 2.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle variations) in both cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the performance button 17.

In addition, the vibration means operates for approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle variations) in both cases, so that the operation period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the operation period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the performance button 17.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
In addition, in both cases, the effect symbols are displayed at timing T6. That is, in cases 1 and 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the effect symbols are displayed are from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The effect symbols are displayed until timing T8.

In other words, in case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations executed from the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, the temporary stop in a manner to notify a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, and the start of operation of the vibration means at timing T3 until the performance pattern stops at timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 80 cycle fluctuations," whereas in case 2, the number of cycle fluctuations executed from the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, the temporary stop in a manner to notify a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, and the start of operation of the vibration means at timing T3 until the performance pattern stops at timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations," resulting in a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs despite the same SPSP reach change effect, for example, there will be a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and in the execution time of the temporary stop in a manner that notifies of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach change effect has been executed.
In contrast to this, for example, if one visually observes the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (more precisely, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5), it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so that the number of cycle fluctuations will prevent one from realizing that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the performance button 17, or from mistakenly thinking that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, so the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs.

In addition, the vibration means operates for approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycles of fluctuation) in either case, so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 60 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when vibration effects occur in each scene of the variable effects)
Figures 126 and 127 are timing charts showing when a vibration effect occurs in each scene of a variable effect.
Specifically, it shows vibration effects when the fluctuation starts, when the development occurs, and when a jackpot is announced.
In addition, the vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation is partially excerpted from Fig. 78, the vibration effect at the time of development is partially excerpted from Fig. 92, and the vibration effect at the time of big win notification is partially excerpted from Fig. 97. Therefore, the explanation of the parts that overlap with the original excerpts will be omitted.

The vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" indicates, for example, the vibration (for 1 second) at the start of fluctuation in the role preview described in Figure 36.
This vibration effect is an effect in which the vibration means (button drive device 17b) is activated and the effect button 17 vibrates at timing T7 in the middle of the first cycle when the effect pattern starts to float and the special pattern starts to update and change.

The vibration effect continues until timing T9-1, which is in the middle of the fifth cycle. In other words, the effect button 17 vibrates for about four cycles (about one second) from the middle of the first cycle to the middle of the fifth cycle.

In addition, the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is performed from timing T7 to timing T9-1 in both cases where the starting gate is won while waiting for customers, and where the fluctuation effect is performed continuously.
In addition, the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is executed based on the reel prediction pattern described in Figure 36, but it may also be determined independently without being based on the reel prediction pattern.

The vibration effect during "development" indicates, for example, the vibration (for 3 seconds) that occurs when the development effect is executed in the blackout effect described in Figure 36.
The vibration effect is, for example, an effect in which the vibration means (button drive device 17b) is activated to vibrate the effect button 17 at timing T3, which is the start of the Nth cycle and when a developing sound is output as a sound effect.

The vibration effect continues until timing T4, which is the end of the N+11th cycle. In other words, the effect button 17 vibrates for about 12 cycles (about 3 seconds) from the start of the Nth cycle to the end of the N+11th cycle.

The vibration effect at the time of "jackpot notification" indicates, for example, the vibration (for 5 seconds) at the time of jackpot notification in the deciding effect described in FIG.
The vibration effect is, for example, at the start of the N+40th cycle, when the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a in a manner to indicate a jackpot start at timing T7, and the vibration means (button driving device 17b) is activated to vibrate the effect button 17.

The vibration effect continues until timing T8-1, which is the end of the N+60th cycle. In other words, the effect button 17 vibrates for about 20 cycles (about 5 seconds) from the start of the N+40th cycle to the end of the N+60th cycle.

When comparing the vibration effects at the "start of the fluctuation", the "development", and the "jackpot announcement", the execution time of the vibration effects at the "start of the fluctuation" is the shortest, and the execution time of the vibration effects at the "jackpot announcement" is the longest.
In addition, the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect is being performed at the "start of fluctuation" is the smallest, and the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect is being performed at the "time of jackpot notification" is the largest.

In this way, by visually checking not only the execution time of the vibration effect but also the number of cycle fluctuations that were performed during the vibration effect, for example, if the number of cycle fluctuations is small, it can be known that the fluctuations have started, and if the number of cycle fluctuations is large, it can be known that a jackpot has been announced. In other words, it is possible to know which stage of the fluctuation effect is being performed from the number of cycle fluctuations that were performed during the vibration effect, which leads to increased interest in the game.

Although not specifically shown, in the scene shown in FIG. 126, the effect button LED 17c does not emit rainbow light, but in the scene shown in FIG. 127, the effect button LED 17c emits rainbow light. This allows the player to know which stage of the variable effect is being executed from the light emission mode of the effect button LED 17c, which leads to increased interest in the game.

Note that Figures 126 and 127 are merely examples, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved in other ways. For example, the execution time of the vibration effect at "the start of the fluctuation" may be lengthened (and therefore the number of cycle fluctuations during the vibration effect will be the greatest) and the execution time of the vibration effect at "the time of the jackpot announcement" may be shortened (and therefore the number of cycle fluctuations during the vibration effect will be the least).

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
128 is a timing chart when the operation means (for example, the operation button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Note that case 1 and case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operation means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation starts from the timing when the SPSP reach performance is reached, but the configuration for the start of the fluctuation can be the configuration described in Figure 73, and the configuration up to the development into the SPSP reach performance can be the configuration described in Figure 97.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 128 explains a case where a jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in a "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "high probability gaming state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

In both cases, the SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) occurs, so from timing T3, the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and a provisional stop in a manner that notifies the player of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will begin.

In addition, at timing T3, the light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and effect button light emitting LED 17c) start emitting rainbow light. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(f), the frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and effect button light emitting LED 17c start emitting rainbow light.
The rainbow light emission continues until timing T3-1.

In either case, the display of the success image and the provisional stop in a manner to notify a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a continue until the end of the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle".
In other words, in case 1, a success image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a provisional stop is made in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, and in case 2, the above-mentioned success image is displayed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), and a provisional stop is made in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, so the period of time for displaying the success image and provisionally stopping in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a is longer (by approximately 2 seconds) in case 1 than in case 2.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle variations) in both cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the performance button 17.

In addition, the rainbow light emitted by the light emitting means lasts for approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle variations) in both cases, so that the operating period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the operating period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the effect button 17.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
In addition, in both cases, the effect symbols are displayed at timing T6. That is, in cases 1 and 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the effect symbols are displayed are from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The effect symbols are displayed until timing T8.

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs despite the same SPSP reach change effect, for example, there will be a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and in the execution time of the temporary stop in a manner that notifies of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach change effect has been executed.
In contrast to this, for example, if one visually observes the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (more precisely, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5), it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so that the number of cycle fluctuations will prevent one from realizing that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the performance button 17, or from mistakenly thinking that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, so the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs.

In addition, the rainbow light emitted by the light emitting means lasts for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycles of variation) in both cases, so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 60 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
129 is a timing chart when the operation means (for example, the operation button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Note that case 1 and case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operation means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation starts from the timing when the SPSP reach performance is reached, but the configuration for the start of the fluctuation can be the configuration described in Figure 73, and the configuration up to the development into the SPSP reach performance can be the configuration described in Figure 97.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 129 explains a case where the jackpot SPSP reach variation presentation is executed in the "normal gaming state", but this is not limited thereto, and the same thing may also be done in the "time-saving gaming state" or the "high probability gaming state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing when the set image is displayed and the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

In both cases, the SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) occurs, so from timing T3, the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and a provisional stop in a manner that notifies the player of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will begin.

In either case, the display of the success image and the provisional stop in a manner to notify a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a continue until the end of the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle".
In other words, in case 1, a success image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a provisional stop is made in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, and in case 2, the above-mentioned success image is displayed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), and a provisional stop is made in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, so the period of time for displaying the success image and provisionally stopping in a manner to indicate a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a is longer (by approximately 2 seconds) in case 1 than in case 2.

In addition, in both cases, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle variations) from timing T3 to timing T3-1, and the output period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
In addition, in both cases, the effect symbols are displayed at timing T6. That is, in cases 1 and 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the effect symbols are displayed are from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The effect symbols are displayed until timing T8.

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs despite the same SPSP reach change effect, for example, there will be a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and in the execution time of the temporary stop in a manner that notifies of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach change effect has been executed.
In contrast to this, for example, if one visually observes the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (more precisely, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5), it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so that the number of cycle fluctuations will prevent one from realizing that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the performance button 17, or from mistakenly thinking that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, so the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 60 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
130 is a timing chart when the operation means (for example, the operation button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Note that case 1 and case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operation means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (miss).
130 is a diagram for explaining further details of timing T8 to timing T9 in FIG. 92. For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing at which the SPSP reach performance is developed, but the configuration for starting the fluctuation may use the configuration explained in FIG. 73.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 130 explains a case where a miss SPSP reach variation effect is executed in a "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "high probability gaming state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

And because both cases are SPSP reach variation effects (misses), from timing T3, a failure image is displayed, a failure sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a manner that notifies the user that the effect pattern 70a has failed.

In addition, in both cases, the display of the failure image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify that the performance pattern 70a has failed will continue until timing T3-1 when the cyclic fluctuation of the special pattern ends the "N+41st cycle."

In other words, in case 1, the failure image is displayed and the temporary stop is made to notify the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed over a period of "approximately 36 cycles of fluctuation" (approximately 9 seconds) from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+41st cycle," and in case 2, the failure image is displayed and the temporary stop is made to notify the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed over a period of "approximately 28 cycles of fluctuation" (approximately 7 seconds) from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+41st cycle," so the period of the temporary stop in the manner of displaying the failure image and notifying the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed is longer (approximately 2 seconds) in case 1 than in case 2.

Then, from timing T3-1, a "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed as a performance image, and a background change (changing of the background image) is performed. A "switching image (eye-catching image)" is, for example, an image that resembles a shutter with the model name written on it, as shown in Figures 131(d)' to (e), and when the "switching image" is displayed, the SPSP reach background that was visible in Figure 131(d) becomes invisible.

In addition, while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed, the performance pattern 70a, which is made up of numbers only, becomes invisible. On the other hand, even while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed, the icon TI, the updated special pattern TZ, the first reserved number display area SA, and the second reserved number display area SB are visible.

The "switching image (eye-catching image)" continues to be displayed until timing T4, and the number of cycles of the special symbol that occur during the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" from timing T3-1 to timing T4 is "approximately 16 cycles of change" in all cases.

In addition, the number of cycles of the special symbol that occur from when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the valid operation period) at timing T2 until the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed at timing T3-1 is "approximately 40 cycles of change" in all cases.

In either case, at timing T4, the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" ends, and the horizontally scrolling background image of the normal background becomes visible, and the temporary stop of the character-attached performance pattern 70a becomes visible in a manner that indicates a miss.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and the special symbol is displayed as stopped.
In addition, in both cases, the effect symbols are displayed at timing T6. That is, in cases 1 and 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the effect symbols are displayed are from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The effect symbols are displayed until timing T8.

In either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3-1 when the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed and timing T6 when the performance pattern starts to stop displaying, or timing T8 when it ends, is "approximately 44 cycle changes," meaning there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3-1 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs despite the same SPSP reach change effect, for example, there will be a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the failure image that takes place between timing T3 and timing T3-1, and in the execution time of the temporary stop in a manner that notifies the player that the effect pattern 70a has missed. This may give the player the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the player the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach change effect has been executed.
In contrast to this, for example, if one visually checks the number of cycle changes that occur from when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the effective operation period) at timing T2 until the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed at timing T3-1, it will be the same "approximately 40 cycle changes" in either case, so that the number of cycle changes will prevent the player from realizing that the content of the effect has changed at the time the effect button 17 is operated, or from mistakenly thinking that a different SPSP reach change effect has been executed.

In addition, for example, if one visually checks the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8, it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so the number of cycle fluctuations will prevent the player from realizing that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the performance button 17, or from mistakenly thinking that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T3-1 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T3-1 will be approximately 5 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 20 cycle variations").

The "switching image (eye-catching image)" is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 131. For example, it may be an image that is whited out or an image that is blacked out. Also, it is not limited to an image, and may be temporarily blocked by operating a movable member (blocking member).

(Timing chart for specific variation patterns)
Figure 132 shows a timing chart for specific change presentation patterns (change presentation pattern a, change presentation pattern b) when the special chart change pattern designation command is "special chart change pattern A (change time = approximately 38 seconds)."
In addition, when the special chart change pattern designation command is "special chart change pattern A", either the change performance pattern a or the change performance pattern b is determined by the processing of step E321 in Fig. 26. In other words, either the change performance pattern a or the change performance pattern b can be executed for "special chart change pattern A".

In both variable performance pattern a and variable performance pattern b, timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing when the first cycle of the special pattern begins. Here, a horizontal scroll of the normal background is displayed as the background image, and a "normal variable performance" (for example, updating and changing all performance patterns 70a) is being executed as the variable performance content.

Timing T3 is when the normal fluctuation presentation ends and the normal reach fluctuation presentation begins. Timing T5 is when the normal reach fluctuation presentation ends and develops into an SP reach. At this time, the cyclic fluctuation of the special symbol is considered to have completed its "100th cycle". In other words, in either fluctuation presentation pattern, the number of cyclic fluctuations of the special symbol that occur from the start of the fluctuation display (timing T0) to the start of the SP reach (timing T5) is "approximately 100 cycles of fluctuation."

Timing T5 in variable performance pattern a is the timing when the "typhoon reach" SP reach performance starts. In other words, variable performance pattern a is a variable performance pattern in which the "typhoon reach" is defined as the variable performance content.

Timing T5 in variable performance pattern b is the timing when the "heavy snow reach" SP reach performance starts. In other words, variable performance pattern b is a variable performance pattern in which the "heavy snow reach" is defined as the variable performance content.

In other words, when the special chart variation pattern designation command is "special chart variation pattern A", either "typhoon reach" or "heavy snow reach" is executed, and multiple variation effects can be executed for one special chart variation pattern. This makes it possible to enrich the variation effects that are executed while keeping the special chart variation patterns in the main control board 110 to a minimum.

In both variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b, timing T6 is the timing when the SP reach ends. And timing T7 is the timing when the special symbol stops displaying, and at this time, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends the "152nd cycle".

In both variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b, timing T8 is the timing at which the presentation pattern or special pattern starts to be displayed in a stopped state, and timing T10 is the timing at which the presentation pattern or special pattern ends to be displayed in a stopped state.

In other words, in both variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur from the start of the SP reach presentation (timing T5) until the presentation pattern starts to stop (timing T8) or ends to stop (timing T10) is "approximately 52 cycles of change."

In other words, in the case of "special pattern change pattern A," the special pattern will change cyclically from "1st cycle" to "152nd cycle" (approximately 38 seconds) from the start of the change display until the stop display is executed.

Thus, although the content of the SP reach change in change presentation pattern a and change presentation pattern b differs between "typhoon reach" and "heavy snow reach", the number of cycles of the special pattern that change from the start of the change display to the start of the SP reach is "approximately 100 cycles of change" in both cases. Also, the number of cycles of the special pattern that change from the start of the SP reach to the stop display of the performance pattern is "approximately 52 cycles of change" in both cases. In other words, the number of cycles of the special pattern that change from the start of the change display to the stop display of the performance pattern is "approximately 152 cycles of change" in both change presentation patterns.

Due to the difference in the content of the variable presentation when a "Typhoon Reach" is executed and when a "Heavy Snow Reach" is executed, players may have perceived that the execution is based on a different "Special Chart Variable Pattern," or that the probability of a jackpot being executed is different.
In contrast to this, for example, as described above, from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach, from the start of the SP reach to the stopped display of the performance pattern, and from the start of the fluctuation to the stopped display of the performance pattern, all of the fluctuation performance patterns have the same number of cycle fluctuations, so if the number of cycle fluctuations is visually observed, it can be recognized that they are being executed based on a common "special chart fluctuation pattern," and the expectation of the execution of a jackpot game can also be recognized as being common.

The variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b may be executed in any game state. For example, they may be executed in a normal game state, a time-saving game state, or a probability-change game state. They may also be executed in any one game state, any two game states, or all game states.

In addition, the gaming state in which the variable presentation pattern a and the variable presentation pattern b are executed may be defined as a normal gaming state, and the patterns may be executed in a plurality of modes in the normal gaming state.
For example, when special chart fluctuation pattern A is received in mode A of the normal game state, fluctuation presentation pattern a may be executed, and when special chart fluctuation pattern A is received in mode B of the normal game state, fluctuation presentation pattern b may be executed. In this way, even if the modes are different and the fluctuation presentation pattern for each mode is executed, if the number of cycle fluctuations is visually observed, it can be recognized that the execution is based on a common "special chart fluctuation pattern," and the expectation of the execution of the big win game can also be recognized as being common.

(Timing chart for when a dialogue notice occurs during a variable performance)
133 is a timing chart showing when a dialogue preview occurs in a variable performance. Case 1 and Case 2 are the same variable performance pattern, but the operation timing of the performance button 17 in the dialogue preview is different.
Note that while Figure 133 illustrates a dialogue preview as an example, it may be replaced with a cut-in preview.

Note that, as an example, Figure 133 explains a case where a dialogue preview occurs during a variable presentation in a "normal game state," but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also occur in a "time-saving game state" or a "high probability game state."

In both Case 1 and Case 2, timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the start timing of the first cycle of the special pattern.
In either case, at timing T2 when the sixth cycle of cyclic fluctuation of the special symbol starts, a dialogue preview image is displayed as a performance image, and the effective operation period of the performance button 17 starts.
It should be noted that a "dialogue preview image" refers to the display of an image that resembles the effect button 17 (see FIG. 134).

In case 1, it is assumed that the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T4 when the ninth cycle of the special pattern has finished changing.
On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T4 when the 13th cycle of the cyclic fluctuation of the special symbol is completed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17, the display of the dialogue preview image is terminated, and a dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed as an effect image.
The display time of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is the same in both cases 1 and 2 (e.g., 2 seconds), and the number of cycle variations performed during the display of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is also the same in both cases 1 and 2 (e.g., approximately 8 cycle variations).

In either case, at timing T5 when the 58th cycle of the special pattern has finished changing, the performance pattern finishes changing and starts the pre-stop operation.
In either case, at timing T6 during the 60th cycle of the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol, the performance symbol finishes the pre-stop operation and starts a provisional stop.

In either case, the special symbol starts to be displayed stationary at timing T7, when the 60th cycle of the special symbol has finished fluctuating. Then, at timing T8, the performance symbol and special symbol start to be displayed stationary, and at timing T10, the performance symbol and special symbol stop being displayed stationary.

In case 1, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur from when the player operates the effect button 17 and the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) until the effect pattern starts to be displayed stationary (timing T8) or until the effect pattern stops being displayed stationary (timing T10) is "approximately 51 cycles of change."

On the other hand, in case 2, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur from when the player operates the effect button 17 and the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) until the effect pattern starts to be displayed stationary (timing T8) or until the effect pattern stops being displayed stationary (timing T10) is "approximately 47 cycles of change."

In addition, in either case, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur from the start of the effective operation period of the effect button 17 (timing T2) until the effect pattern starts to be displayed in a stopped state (timing T8) or until the effect pattern ends to be displayed in a stopped state (timing T10) is "approximately 55 cycles of change."

In this way, when the timing of operating effect button 17 differs despite the same variable effect, for example, there will be a difference in the time from when the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) to when the performance pattern begins to display stationary (timing T8), or when the performance pattern ends its display, which may give the impression that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different variable effect has been executed.
In contrast to this, for example, if one visually observes the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (more precisely, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5), it will be the same "approximately 55 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so that the number of cycle fluctuations will not give the impression that the performance content has changed at the time the performance button 17 is operated, or will prevent the user from mistakenly thinking that a different change performance has been executed.

In addition, the display time of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is the same in both cases 1 and 2 (e.g., 2 seconds), and the number of cycle changes performed during the display of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is also the same in both cases 1 and 2 (e.g., approximately 8 cycle changes), so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can recognize the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2).

In addition, while both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the dialogue preview is not executed. In other words, if the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, an event called a cycle change occurs while the dialogue preview is being executed, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, an event called a cycle change occurs while the dialogue preview is being executed.

(Timing chart for when dialogue notices and deciding effects occur during variable effects)
Fig. 134 is a timing chart showing when a dialogue preview and a final performance occur in a variable performance. For the dialogue preview, further details are shown between timing T1 and timing T2 in Fig. 133, and for the final performance, further details are shown between timing T5 and timing T6 in Fig. 92.
For convenience, in the variable presentation pattern 1, the case where a dialogue preview and a deciding presentation occur is shown, but the same can be said even if they occur separately (a dialogue preview occurs but a deciding presentation does not, or a dialogue preview does not occur but a deciding presentation occurs).
In addition, the dialogue preview in Figure 134 may be replaced with a cut-in preview (in this case, a comparison is made between the cut-in preview and the final scene), or the final scene may be replaced with a cut-in preview (in this case, a comparison is made between the dialogue preview and the cut-in preview).

Note that, as an example, FIG. 134 explains a case where a dialogue preview and a deciding effect occur in a variable effect in a "normal game state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also occur in a "time-saving game state" or a "high probability game state".

Timing T0 is the start timing of the varying display, and is the timing when the first cycle of the special pattern begins.
Then, at timing T1-1, a suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed, which suggests that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the dialogue preview will be displayed. At this time, it is assumed that the cyclic variation of the special symbol starts the second cycle of cyclic variation.

The suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed for approximately four cycles of fluctuation (approximately one second), from the start of the second cycle of cycle fluctuation to the end of the fifth cycle of cycle fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 134, the suggestive image (fade-in image) is an image that resembles the performance button 17, displayed in a light color, which gradually changes to a darker color toward the end of the suggestive image (fade-in image).

Then, at timing T2, the display of the suggestive image (fade-in image) ends, an image imitating the effect button 17 (a dialogue preview image) is displayed, and the effective period for operating the effect button 17 begins. At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the "sixth cycle."

Then, at timing T4, the player operates the effect button 17, and a dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed as an effect image.
In other words, it is assumed that the player operates the effect button 17 approximately one second after the start of the effective operation period of the effect button 17.

In this way, when a dialogue preview is being displayed, a suggestive image (fade-in image) that suggests that an image resembling the effect button 17 will be displayed is displayed for approximately four cycles (approximately one second).

Then, timing T6 is the timing at which the deciding image in the deciding performance is displayed, and before timing T6 is reached, a suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed, suggesting that an image imitating the performance button 17 in the deciding performance will be displayed.

Specifically, from timing T5, a suggestion image (fade-in image) is started to be displayed, suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the deciding effect will be displayed. At this time, it is assumed that the cyclical change of the special symbol has started the "N+1th cycle".

The suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed for approximately 16 cycles of fluctuation (approximately 4 seconds), from the start of the N+1th cycle of cycle fluctuation to the end of the N+16th cycle of cycle fluctuation. The suggestion image (fade-in image) is a spiral button introduction image BDG, as shown in FIG. 134.

Then, at timing T6, the display of the suggestive image (fade-in image) ends, an image imitating the effect button 17 (a dialogue preview image) is displayed, and the effective period for operating the effect button 17 begins. At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the "N+17th cycle".

In this way, when a decisive effect is selected, a suggestive image (fade-in image) that suggests that an image resembling the effect button 17 will be displayed is displayed for approximately 16 cycles (approximately 4 seconds).

In the dialogue preview and the deciding effect, the suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed for a longer period of time in the deciding effect, and the number of cycle changes that occur during the display is also greater.
This makes it easier to predict whether a line preview or a decisive performance will be executed later by visually checking the number of cycle changes that are performed while the suggestive image (fade-in image) is being displayed.
In addition, it becomes easier to predict which stage in the variation presentation is occurring based on the difference in the number of cycle variations that occur while the suggestive image (fade-in image) is being displayed.

In FIG. 134, the display time of the suggestive image (fade-in image) in the deciding performance is longer than that in the dialogue preview, and the number of cycle changes that occur during display is also greater in the deciding performance; however, this is not limited to the above, and the display time of the suggestive image (fade-in image) in the deciding performance may be shorter, and the number of cycle changes that occur during display may also be fewer.

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
Fig. 135 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Note that Fig. 135 shows the case where meter pattern 1 is performed and the case where meter pattern 2 is performed in the meter performance, which is one of the performances of the SPSP reach variation performance, and shows a comparison of the case where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation starts from the timing when the SPSP reach performance is reached, but the configuration for the start of the fluctuation can be the configuration described in Figure 73, and the configuration up to the development into the SPSP reach performance can be the configuration described in Figure 97.

Note that, as an example, FIG. 135 explains a case where a jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in a "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "high probability gaming state".

In both patterns, timing T0 is the timing when the SPSP reach performance is being executed. At this time, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the "Nth cycle".

In both patterns, timing T2 is the timing when the meter effect starts as an SPSP reach effect. As shown in FIG. 136(c), the "meter effect" is an effect that presents a task (the introductory image and introductory sound in FIG. 135) such as "Press the button repeatedly and when the meter reaches MAX, it's a jackpot!". Each time the player operates the effect button 17, the meter rises, and when the meter reaches MAX, it is definitively announced that a jackpot has been reached.

The meter pattern in the meter effect has multiple meter patterns. For example, in the case of a jackpot, there is a pattern where the meter reaches MAX when the effect button 17 is operated five times (the effect button 17 is pressed five times) (meter pattern 1 in Fig. 135 and Fig. 136), a pattern where the meter reaches MAX when the effect button 17 is operated ten times (the effect button 17 is pressed ten times), and a pattern where the meter reaches MAX when the effect button 17 is operated once (the effect button 17 is pressed once) (meter pattern 2 in Fig. 135 and Fig. 136). In addition, there are also multiple meter patterns for a miss (not shown).

In either pattern, when timing T3 is reached, a deciding image is displayed as a performance image, and a prompting sound is output as a sound effect (see FIG. 136(d)).
In both patterns, it is assumed that the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T4.

In the case of meter pattern 1, the meter reaches MAX when the effect button 17 is operated five times, so at timing T5 when the effect button 17 is operated five times from timing T4, a success image is displayed, a success sound is output, and a provisional stop is started in a manner that indicates that the effect symbol is a jackpot (see FIG. 136(f)). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the cyclical variation of the "N+30th cycle".
In other words, the number of cycles of the special symbol that are executed from the start of the meter presentation at timing T2 until the announcement of a jackpot at timing T5 is "approximately 28 cycles of change."

On the other hand, in the case of meter pattern 2, the meter reaches MAX with one operation input of the effect button 17, so at timing T5 when the effect button 17 is operated once from timing T4, a success image is displayed, a success sound is output, and a provisional stop is started in a manner in which the effect symbol indicates that it is a jackpot (see FIG. 136(f)). At this time, it is assumed that the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol has started the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+14th cycle".
In other words, the number of cycles of the special symbol that are executed from the start of the meter presentation at timing T2 until the announcement of a jackpot at timing T5 is "approximately 12 cycles of change."

In either pattern, at timing T7 when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and the special symbol is displayed stationary.
In either case, the effect symbols are displayed at timing T8. In other words, whether meter pattern 1 or meter pattern 2 is executed, the cycle fluctuation executed from the start of the meter effect to the stop display of the effect symbols is "about 84 cycle fluctuations."

In this way, when the meter patterns are different despite the same meter presentation, for example, there will be a difference in the time from the start of the meter presentation (timing T2) to the announcement of a jackpot (timing T5), which could give the player the impression that the timing of the jackpot announcement changes depending on the timing (skill) of the player's operation of the presentation button 17, which could cause distrust among the player.
In contrast to this, for example, if one visually observes the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T8, or between timing T2 and timing T10 (more precisely, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T7), it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so that from the number of cycle fluctuations, it can be recognized that the timing of the jackpot announcement cannot be changed depending on the timing (skill) of the player's operation of the effect button 17, etc., and this prevents the player from becoming distrustful.

In the example of FIG. 135, it is explained that the operating means (effect button 17) is operated in both cases, but if no operation is performed in meter pattern 1 and if no operation is performed in meter pattern 2, the display period of the success image from timing T5 to timing T6 and the temporary stop period in the mode of notifying a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will be the same. In other words, the number of cycle changes of the special pattern performed between timing T5 and timing T6 will also be the same. As a result, regardless of which meter pattern is executed, the display period of the success image and the temporary stop period in the mode of notifying a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a can be guaranteed, and the player can be sure to understand the result of the jackpot determination.

The meter pattern may be a meter pattern for a "long press" of the effect button 17 for a predetermined period of time or more. For example, in meter pattern 1, the "long press" time until a jackpot is announced may be "3 seconds," and in meter pattern 2, the "long press" time until a jackpot is announced may be "5 seconds."

(Example of the special pattern changing display after power is restored)
Figure 137 is a diagram showing a specific example of a state after power outage recovery in which a special pattern is being displayed. Note that Figure 137 follows the contents of Figure 54, and shows a case where a power outage occurs when a special pattern variation pattern corresponding to a normal variation is being displayed as a special pattern variation pattern, and then the power is restored.
The fluctuation time of the special chart fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal fluctuation is "10 seconds".

Timing T0 is the timing when a power outage occurs while the change display of the special chart change pattern corresponding to the normal change is being executed, and the power is turned off.
In addition, since the timing T0 was reached when the cyclic fluctuation of the special pattern was executing the 12th cycle of cyclic fluctuation, the power outage occurred approximately 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display.

Timing T1 is the timing when the power is restored and turned ON. At timing T1, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cyclic variation of the special symbol in the "13th cycle" begins. Note that the cyclic variation of the special symbol in the "13th cycle" is a continuation of the cyclic variation "12th cycle" that was taking place when the power outage occurred at timing T0.

Then, from timing T2 to timing T9, the return operation and initial operation of the movable performance device described in FIG. 54 etc. are executed. Note that the return operation and initial operation have already been described in FIG. 54 etc., so a description thereof will be omitted here. Note that the return operation takes about 3 seconds, and the initial operation takes about 11 seconds (see FIG. 59, FIG. 61, FIG. 62 etc.).

Timing T6 is the timing when the special symbol starts the 40th cycle of cyclic variation, and is also the timing when the sub display device starts its initial operation.
Then, at timing T7, the special symbol finishes the 40th cycle of cyclic variation and starts to be displayed stationary.

Then, when the special symbol determination command is received at timing T7-1, a stop screen (performance symbol 753) is displayed on the main display device 70, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device.
Then, at timing T9, the initial operation of the sub-display device ends.

That is, in the example of Figure 137, a power outage occurs at timing T0, approximately 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, and when the power is turned ON at timing T1, the remaining variable time is approximately 7 seconds.
On the other hand, since the return operation takes about 3 seconds and the initial operation takes about 11 seconds, if the return operation and initial operation start from timing T2, the variable display will end before the initial operation.
In other words, at the point when the initial operation is completed (timing T9), the varying display of the special symbols has been completed, and the main display device 70 displays the stopped screen (performance symbol 753).
In addition, if there is a pending execution of the next variable display, the next variable display will start regardless of whether the initial operation is completed or not. Therefore, it is possible that the initial operation will be completed during the execution of the next variable display, and it is also possible that the stop screen of the next variable display (for example, the performance pattern 468) is displayed when the initial operation is completed.

In this way, when the initial operation is executed during the varying display, by visually observing the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur while the movable performance device is operating, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur during the initial operation is different from that during the performance operation (see Figures 59, 61, 62, etc.), and it is possible to recognize from the difference in the number of cycles that the operation of the movable performance device that is executed from timing T4 is the initial operation. This makes it possible to prevent excessive expectations that the variable display being executed will be a jackpot due to the movable performance device operating during the varying display.

In addition to the difference in the number of cycle variations, the LED of the movable performance device is turned off during the initial operation, so it is possible to recognize that the operation of the movable performance device executed from timing T4 is the initial operation from the light emission state (off) of the movable performance device.

In addition, in FIG. 137, particularly in cases where the variable display ends before the initial operation, the variable display of the special symbol ends at the point in time when the initial operation ends (timing T9), and the main display device 70 displays a stop screen (performance symbol 753). This eliminates the need to control the display content of the main display device 70 in accordance with the timing of the end of the initial operation (for example, displaying a stop screen when the initial operation ends), and prevents display control from becoming complicated.

In addition, by displaying the stop screen (performance pattern 753) on the main display device 70 without waiting for the completion of the initial operation, the player is promptly notified of the result of the jackpot determination, which prevents the player from becoming distrustful.

Note that Figure 137 uses the example of power restoration for explanation, but the same thing can be said about powering on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, recovery operations and initial operations will not be performed. In this way, not all "power outages" will result in the event shown in Figure 137, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Example of the special pattern changing display after power is restored)
Figure 138 is a diagram showing a specific example of a state after power outage recovery in which a special pattern is being displayed. Note that Figure 138 follows the contents of Figure 54, and shows a case where a power outage occurs when a special pattern variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach variation is being displayed as a special pattern variation pattern, and then the power is restored.
The fluctuation time of the special chart fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach fluctuation is set to "70 seconds."

Timing T0 is the timing when a power outage occurs and the power is turned off while the display of the special chart change pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach change is being executed.
In addition, since the timing T0 was reached when the cyclic fluctuation of the special pattern was executing the 12th cycle of cyclic fluctuation, the power outage occurred approximately 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display.

Timing T1 is the timing when the power is restored and turned ON. At timing T1, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cyclic variation of the special symbol in the "13th cycle" begins. Note that the cyclic variation of the special symbol in the "13th cycle" is a continuation of the cyclic variation "12th cycle" that was taking place when the power outage occurred at timing T0.

Then, from timing T2 to timing T7, the return operation and initial operation of the movable performance device described in FIG. 54 etc. are executed. Note that the return operation and initial operation have already been described in FIG. 54 etc., so a description thereof will be omitted here. Note that the return operation takes about 3 seconds, and the initial operation takes about 11 seconds (see FIG. 59, FIG. 61, FIG. 62 etc.).

Timing T7 is the timing when the initial operation of the sub display device ends and all initial operations are completed. At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the "Recovery in progress" screen that has been displayed since timing T2.

That is, in the example of Figure 138, a power outage occurs at timing T0, approximately 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, and when the power is turned ON at timing T1, the remaining variable time is approximately 67 seconds.
On the other hand, the return operation takes about 3 seconds, and the initial operation takes about 11 seconds, so if the return operation and initial operation start from timing T2, the initial operation will end before the variable display.
In other words, at the time when the initial operation is completed (timing T7), the variable display of the special symbols is still being executed, and the main display device 70 displays a recovery screen.
In the example of Fig. 138, the power outage occurred 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, but if the power outage occurs 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and the next fluctuation display is pending, the next fluctuation display will start regardless of whether the initial operation is completed or not. Therefore, it is possible that the initial operation will be completed during the execution of the next fluctuation display, and it is also possible that the stop screen of the next fluctuation display (for example, the performance pattern 468) is displayed when the initial operation is completed.

In this way, when the initial operation is executed during the varying display, by visually observing the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur while the movable performance device is operating, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur during the initial operation differs from that during the performance operation (see Figures 59, 61, 62, etc.), and it is possible to recognize from the difference in the number of cycles that the operation of the movable performance device that is executed from timing T4 is the initial operation. This prevents excessive expectations that the variable display being executed will be a jackpot due to the movable performance device operating during the varying display.

In addition to the difference in the number of cycle variations, the LED of the movable performance device is turned off during the initial operation, so it is possible to recognize that the operation of the movable performance device executed from timing T4 is the initial operation from the light emission state (off) of the movable performance device.

In addition, in FIG. 138, particularly in cases where the initial operation ends before the variable display, at the time when the initial operation ends (timing T7), the variable display of the special pattern continues to be executed, and the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70. This eliminates the need to control the display contents of the main display device 70 in accordance with the timing of the end of the initial operation (for example, ending the recovery screen when the initial operation ends), and prevents the display control from becoming complicated.

In addition, by ending the initial action without waiting for the variable display to finish, the initial action can be completed quickly, preventing the player from mistakenly thinking that a special action is being performed.

Note that Figure 138 uses the example of power restoration for explanation, but the same thing can be said about powering on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, recovery operations and initial operations will not be performed. In this way, not all "power outages" will result in the event shown in Figure 138, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Example 1 of when a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance)
Using Figures 139 to 141, we will explain specific example 1 where a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance.

Figure 139 is a timing chart when the variable performance starts during the customer waiting demo performance, and Figures 140 to 141 are diagrams showing examples of performances at various timings in Figure 139. Note that the explanation here is for performance mode A, but since performance modes B to F are basically the same, explanations will be omitted.

First, before the timing of T0 in FIG. 139, the machine is in a waiting state for customers where the special symbol change display is not being executed, the first special symbol display device 60 displays a losing special symbol (only the rightmost LED is lit), and the main display device 70 displays a change waiting screen waiting for the change performance to be executed. Specifically, the mode A background image is scrolling horizontally (performance operation), the performance pattern 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed frozen at "537", and "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB. In addition, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19.

Then, at the timing T0 in FIG. 139, when the demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demo performance is started for a predetermined period (e.g., 80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the performance pattern 70a and behind the special pattern TZ and the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), the customer waiting demo image starts fading in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and the performance pattern 70a gradually becomes invisible (see FIG. 140(a)).

The special pattern TZ and the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, so they will not be invisible (obscured) by the customer waiting demo image, but the background image, performance pattern 70a, hold icon display area, and the icon display area will be invisible (obscured) by the customer waiting demo image.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 139, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is completed, the performance pattern 70a becomes invisible (is not visible), and the output of the demo performance sound begins. Specifically, the customer waiting demo background scrolls (performance operation), the text image "DEMO in progress" is displayed, and model-specific performance (display of the model name, introduction of model-specific characters, playing of a demo movie of the variable performance, display of an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted, etc.) is performed (see FIG. 140(b)).

After that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 139, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the name of the gaming machine manufacturer is being displayed following the model-specific performance, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 140(c)).

Then, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 139, when the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "0" and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 140(d)).

Furthermore, since a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83 display "1", and the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed non-animated in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B on the back side of the customer waiting demo image, and the performance pattern 70a before the start of the customer waiting demo performance ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance) is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) begins. Also, the output of the customer waiting demo performance sound is stopped (see FIG. 140(d)).

When a hold icon is additionally displayed without animation while waiting for customers, the hold icon may be displayed in motion from the first position (initial position) or from the second position. When a hold icon is additionally displayed without going through the waiting for customers demo performance, the hold icon may be displayed in motion from the first position or the second position, and when a hold icon is additionally displayed via the waiting for customers demo image, the hold icon may be displayed in motion from the first position.

In addition, the performance pattern 70a ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance) before the start of the customer waiting demo performance may be processed to be constantly displayed behind the customer waiting demo image, and even in this case, visibility will be restricted by the customer waiting demo image.

After that, at the timing of T4 in Figure 139 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin (see Figure 140 (e)).

The customer waiting demo image starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state) for a predetermined period (e.g. 0.5 seconds), and it becomes possible to visually confirm (confirm/recognize) that the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are the same number ("537"), and the hold icon HI becomes visible. The hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shifting display (reducing display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts floating display as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ starts updating and changing (scrolling, switching display). The volume and light adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to a state where they cannot be adjusted (cannot be adjusted), and the sound output device 9 starts audibly outputting the change BGM (here, the normal BGM corresponding to the non-reach performance) (see FIG. 140(e)).

Regarding the special symbol TZ, regardless of the number that was displayed as stopped, when the update change starts, nine patterns of image data are switched for each frame in the order of "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "678" → "789" → "891" → "912" → "123" ... and are displayed in a cycle like a slide show. Therefore, when the customer waiting demo image starts to fade out, the update change of the special symbol TZ starts immediately, so the time during which the number of the special symbol TZ (the number of the previous number that was stopped before the customer waiting performance started) can be seen (confirmed/recognized) is shorter than the time for which the performance pattern 70a that is displayed as it is floating up can be seen (confirmed/recognized).

In addition, if a volume value image or light quantity value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the customer waiting demo image starts to fade out, it will be erased as the start of the variable performance makes it impossible to adjust the volume or light quantity using the cross key 19, but the volume value image or light quantity value image will be erased before the customer waiting image fades out. In other words, when the volume value image or light quantity value image is erased, it will be erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the customer waiting image fades out.

In addition, regardless of whether the machine is in a waiting state for customers or not, when a variable performance (display of a variable performance pattern) or a variable display of a special pattern begins, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted to a state where they cannot be adjusted (unadjustable) at the same timing regardless of the type of variable performance pattern.

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 139 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the customer waiting demo image has finished fading out and is completely hidden, a start effect effect (a type of big win preview effect) is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect. Specifically, a preview effect image YE of a size that restricts the visibility of the central performance pattern 70a that is being displayed while floating is displayed, and the preview effect image YE gradually expands to restrict (block) the visibility of the background image and performance pattern 70a (including the output of sound effects) (see FIG. 140(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in Figure 139, when a predetermined period (e.g. 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjusted) using the cross key 19, and at the timing of T7, when the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the preview effect image YE becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three presentation patterns 70a (see Figure 141 (g)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T8 in Figure 139 (during the fourth cycle change), the floating display as a pre-change action of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the preview effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the start order of the change of the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 141 (h)), and at the timing of T9, the preview effect image YE is erased (see Figure 141 (i)).

The preview effect image YE gradually enlarges to restrict visibility of the performance patterns 70a (making the change start order difficult to see), but it may be displayed at a size that restricts visibility of the three performance patterns 70a from the beginning. Also, the preview effect image YE is displayed in such a way that a portion of the performance patterns 70a is visible to the extent that the change start order is difficult to see, but it may be displayed in such a way that all of the performance patterns 70a are invisible.

The preview effect image YE is also configured to be displayed when the customer waiting demo image has finished fading out, but it may also be displayed a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after the customer waiting demo image has finished fading out.

In addition, multiple characters are made to appear (display) in the model-specific effects, and the character that appears most frequently in the model-specific effects is also more likely to appear in the effects with high odds of winning that are executed during the variable effects. In addition, in the model-specific effects, the display period for the anti-addiction image (e.g., 5 seconds) is longer than the display period for the model name (e.g., 3 seconds), and the anti-addiction image is displayed after the model name is displayed, but the anti-addiction image may be displayed while the model name is being displayed (partway through the display of the model name).

In addition, the demo waiting period until the second or subsequent customer waiting demo performances (after the end of the customer waiting demo performance) may be shorter (e.g., 50 seconds) than the demo waiting period until the first customer waiting demo performance after the end of the variable performance (e.g., 60 seconds).

In addition, instead of fading in the customer waiting demo image from the state where the performance pattern 70a etc. is displayed, the screen may be blacked out for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds, which is longer than the eye-catching performance described below) to block the performance images such as the performance pattern 70a before fading in the customer waiting demo image.

(Example 2 of when a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance)
Using Figures 139 and 142, we will explain specific example 2, where a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance.

In Figure 142, the basic flow is the same as that of Specific Example 1 in which the variable presentation starts during the customer waiting demo presentation shown in Figures 139 to 141, but it differs in that a mode change presentation is executed to transition the presentation mode instead of the start effect presentation. Therefore, only the parts related to the differences will be explained here.

At timing T4 in Figure 139 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin (see Figure 142 (e)).

The customer waiting demo image starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and then disappearing), and it becomes possible to visually confirm (confirm/recognize) that the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are the same number ("537"), and the hold icon HI becomes visible. Also, the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shifting display (reducing display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts floating display as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ starts updating and changing (scrolling, switching display). Also, the volume adjustment and light adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted to a state where they cannot be adjusted (cannot be adjusted), and the audible output of the change BGM (normal BGM in this case) starts from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 142(e)).

If a volume value image or light quantity value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the customer waiting demo image starts to fade out, it will be erased as the start of the variable performance makes it impossible to adjust the volume or light quantity using the cross key 19, but the volume value image or light quantity value image will be erased before the customer waiting image fade out ends. In other words, when the volume value image or light quantity value image is erased, it will be erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the customer waiting image fade out.

In addition, regardless of whether the machine is in a waiting state for customers or not, when a variable performance (display of a variable performance pattern) or a variable display of a special pattern begins, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted to a state where they cannot be adjusted (unadjustable) at the same timing regardless of the type of variable performance pattern.

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 139 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the customer waiting demo image has finished fading out and is completely hidden, a mode change effect (a type of big win preview effect) is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect. Specifically, an effect (including the output of sound effects) is performed in which a mode change image MC (here, a blackout image with a low probability of a big win, rather than a whiteout image with a high probability of a big win) that restricts the visibility of the effect pattern 70a and background image from the right side of the screen of the main display device 70 is enlarged toward the left side of the screen (see FIG. 142(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 139, when a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation, the state returns to one in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable) using the cross key 19.

After that, at the timing of T7 in Figure 139, when the shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the mode change image MC becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three performance patterns 70a (see Figure 142 (g)).

When the entire screen of the main display device 70 is obscured by the mode change image, the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and the background image, presentation pattern 70a, and the icon (reserved icon) on the back side of the mode change image change to those corresponding to presentation mode B.

Furthermore, at the timing of T8 in Figure 139 (during the fourth cycle change), the floating display as a pre-change action of the performance pattern 70a ends, and the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the mode change image MC makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the start order of the change of the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 142 (h)), and at the timing of T9, the mode change image MC frames out to the left side of the screen of the main display device 70 and is erased (see Figure 142 (i)).

The mode change image MC is designed to gradually restrict visibility of the performance patterns 70a (making the change start order difficult to see), but it may also be displayed to restrict visibility of the three performance patterns 70a from the beginning. Also, the mode change image MC is designed to display a portion of the performance patterns 70a in a visible state to the extent that the change start order becomes difficult to see, but it may also be displayed in a state where all of the performance patterns 70a are invisible.

The mode change image MC is displayed when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed, but it may be displayed a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when the variable display of special symbols (cyclical variation) starts from the waiting state, there are no restrictions or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when a variable performance (variable display of performance symbols) starts in response to the start of the variable display of special symbols (cyclical variation), restrictions or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 occur or are restricted (become unadjustable). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, making the game more enjoyable. Also, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the variable performance even if the volume or light intensity has been adjusted.

In addition, if the start of a variable performance causes restrictions or limitations (unable to adjust) volume or light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19, restrictions or limitations (unable to adjust) will occur or be imposed on volume or light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 at the same timing regardless of what type of variable performance is being executed. This means that the player is no longer forced to carry out the cumbersome task of changing the timing of adjusting volume or light intensity using the cross key 19 each time a variable performance is executed, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when the variable display of the special symbols (cyclical variation) starts from the waiting state, there is no restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the variable display of the special symbols (variable display on the sub-first variable display 81) starts in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols (cyclical variation), there is a restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (they become unadjustable). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume and light intensity is as long as possible, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, even if the player has adjusted the volume or light intensity, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the variable presentation.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when the changing display (cyclic change) of the special symbols starts from the waiting state, there is no restriction or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the display (shift display) of the reserved icons is reduced in response to the start of the changing display (cyclic change) of the special symbols, there is a restriction or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment becomes impossible). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, making the game more enjoyable. Also, it is possible to make the player aware of the reduction in the number of reserved balls even if the volume or light intensity is adjusted.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when the variable display (cyclical variation) of the special symbols starts from the waiting state, there is no restriction or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the variable BGM (which may be a variation start sound or a warning sound, etc.) is audibly output in response to the start of the variable display (cyclical variation) of the special symbols, there is a restriction or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (it becomes impossible to adjust). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume and light intensity is as long as possible, making the game more interesting. It also makes it possible to reduce the control load at the start of the audible output of the variable BGM.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when a game ball enters the start hole during a customer waiting state and the reserved icon (reserved number display area, sub-reserved display) is displayed in an increasing number, there are no restrictions or restrictions on adjusting the volume or light intensity using the cross key 19 (adjustment is maintained). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, the restrictions on adjusting the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 are lifted (made adjustable) before the change display (update change) following the pre-change action of the performance symbol begins. This allows the player to have as long a period of time as possible during which they can adjust the volume and light intensity, making the game more enjoyable.

As for the restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that arise after the start of the special pattern changing display (cyclic change), it has been stated that volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment cannot be made using the cross key 19, but the volume value image and light intensity value image may be made not to be displayed (or erased if displayed), or the volume value image and light intensity value image displayed in the front layer of the performance pattern 70a may be displayed in the rear layer of the performance pattern 70a (in front of the background image and superimposed behind the performance pattern 70a), thereby imposing restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 142, the variable performance starts when multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed with the same number, and ends when multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed with the same number, and the performance symbols are hidden (visibility is restricted). When the reserved memory increases during the customer waiting demo performance (while the customer waiting demo image is displayed), the multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed so that they are visible while the customer waiting demo image fades out, but the time until the multiple performance symbols are displayed with a change (update change after the pre-change action) is longer than the time until the multiple special symbols are displayed with a change (update change). Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the special symbol has started to display the variable display while the stop number of the previous variable performance is confirmed. In addition, the performance effect at the start of the change can be improved by the performance symbols, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, if the reserved memory increases and a variable performance starts during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the special symbols start to change display (update change) before the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the performance symbols start to change display (update change after pre-change action) after the customer waiting demo image fades out. This makes it possible to immediately recognize that the special symbols have started to change display, while checking the stop results of the previous variable performance. Also, the performance symbols can improve the performance effect at the start of the change, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, if the reserved memory increases and a variable performance starts during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance in which the performance pattern is not displayed (visibility is restricted), the variable display (update variable) of the special pattern starts before the customer waiting demo image fades out, the reserved icon is displayed visibly while the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the decrease display (shift display to the icon) ends after the customer waiting demo image fades out. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special pattern has started, while accurately recognizing that the reserved memory has decreased, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, if the reserved memory increases and a variable performance starts during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance in which the performance pattern is not displayed (visibility is restricted), the reserved icon is displayed visibly while the customer waiting demo image is fading out, and a decrease display (shift display to the icon) starts before the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the performance pattern starts to change display (update change after the pre-change action) after the customer waiting demo image fades out. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to change display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and a variable performance starts, the reserved icon is displayed visibly while the customer waiting demo image is fading out, and the decreasing display (shifting display to the icon) starts after the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the performance pattern starts to change after the decreasing display of the reserved icon has finished. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to change, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, if the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and a variable performance starts, the display of the icon is completed after the customer waiting demo image fades out (the shift display from the reserved icon is completed), and the performance pattern starts to change display after the display of the icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to change display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when the reserved memory increases and a variable performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance, the display mode in the cyclical variation of the special symbol is changed multiple times before the end of the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demo performance in a natural flow while making the player aware that the variable display of the special symbol has started, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and a variable performance starts, the performance pattern is displayed without fading in (superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image) so that it is visible while the customer waiting demo image is fading out. Therefore, the customer waiting demo performance can be ended in a natural flow and the variable performance can be started without delay, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice performance (start effect performance, mode change performance) that makes the player expect a big win in response to the start of the variable performance and restricts the visibility of the performance pattern, and when the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and the variable performance starts, the performance pattern is displayed without fading in (superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image) so that it is visible while the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the specific advance notice performance starts after the performance pattern becomes visible. Therefore, while the player can check the stop result of the previous variable performance, the player can be made aware that a specific advance notice performance has started due to the start of the variable performance, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, even when a customer waiting demo image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the special symbols are not restricted from being viewed by the customer waiting demo image (they are displayed superimposed in front of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, even when a demo movie of a performance executed during a variable performance (for example, a scene from an SP/SPSP reach performance, a scene from a successful decision performance, a scene from a jackpot performance, etc.) is displayed as a customer waiting demo performance, the player can be made to recognize that the game is in a customer waiting state in which a variable performance is not being executed, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in operation of the gaming machine due to a player's misunderstanding.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, even when the waiting demo image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the reserved number displayed in the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB) is not restricted in visibility by the waiting demo image (displayed superimposed in front of the waiting demo image). Therefore, even when a demo movie of a performance executed during a variable performance (for example, a scene from an SP/SPSP reach performance, a scene from a successful decision performance, a scene from a jackpot performance, etc.) is displayed as a waiting demo performance, it is possible to help the player recognize that the waiting state is in which a variable performance is not being executed, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in operation of the gaming machine due to a player's mistake.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 139 to 142, when the variable performance starts and the variable display of the special symbols (updated variable) begins, regardless of the result at the start (the previous stopping result), a predetermined combination of special symbols ("123") becomes the first result after the update (starting point), and the numbers in each column are updated one by one in order from that result. Therefore, the variable display of the special symbols can be controlled regardless of the previous stopping result, making it possible to reduce the control load.

(Example of recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
Using Figures 143 to 144, we will explain a specific example of recovery from a power outage that occurs during a variable performance.
Fig. 143 is a timing chart showing a case where power is restored from a power failure that occurred during a variable performance, and Fig. 144 is a diagram showing examples of performance at various timings in Fig. 143. Note that, in this case, in order to restore to the normal game state, control is performed in performance mode A.

First, at a timing prior to timing T0 in FIG. 143, a power outage occurs during the variable display of a special symbol with the first reserved number being "2". When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is then resumed, a loading screen (initial screen) containing the words "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71. At this time, it is not possible to adjust the volume or light intensity using the cross key 19.

Then, the main control board 110, which has restored the game control state to the state before the power outage, sends power-on commands (here, the second power restoration designation command, the first special pattern storage designation command, and the second special pattern storage designation command, which indicate that the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner) to the performance control board 130. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display 60 is resumed from the state before the power outage, and the display of the first reserved number "2" on the first special pattern reserved display 63 is also resumed.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the power-on command, the above-mentioned power restoration notification and the initial operation (including the recovery operation) of the various roles (board roles, frame roles) will be initiated, and information display will begin on the sub-information display 80.

At this time, on the main display device 70 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the top layer, and various performance images (mode A background image, performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ which are the initial numbers that will appear when power is restored, reserved icon HI according to the number of reserved balls and the performance mode when power is restored, reserved numbers according to the number of reserved balls when power is restored, etc.) are displayed as image data for the power restoration notification set as a layer lower than the power restoration image (see FIG. 144 (a)).

Next, at the timing T1 in FIG. 143, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a stop command (symbol determination command) to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special symbol display 60 displays a stopped special symbol. At this time, if the performance control board 130 cannot receive the stop command normally, the main display device 70 continues to display the power recovery image (see FIG. 144 (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 143, when the first reserved number changes from "2" to "1" and a jackpot determination is made, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1" and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change). At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the power recovery image (see FIG. 144 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in Figure 143 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "1", the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin, and the output of the power recovery notification sound will stop (see Figure 144 (c)).

When the power recovery image starts to fade out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and then being erased), it becomes possible to visually confirm (confirm/recognize) that the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are the same number ("753"), and the hold icon HI can be visually confirmed. Also, the hold icon HI that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ starts to update change (scroll, switch display). Also, the audible output of the change BGM starts from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 140(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 143 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the power recovery image has finished fading out and is completely hidden, a start effect effect (a type of big win preview effect) is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect. Specifically, a preview effect image YE of a size that restricts the visibility of the central performance pattern 70a that is floating up is displayed, and the preview effect image YE gradually expands to restrict (block) the visibility of the background image and performance pattern 70a (including the output of sound effects) (see FIG. 144(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5 in Figure 143, when a predetermined period (e.g. 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjusted) using the cross key 19, and at the timing of T6, when the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the preview effect image YE becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three presentation patterns 70a (see Figure 144 (e)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T7 in Figure 143 (during the fourth cycle change), the floating display as a pre-change action of the performance pattern 70a ends, and the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the preview effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the start order of the change of the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 144 (f)), and at the timing of T8, the preview effect image YE is erased.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, when the variable display (cyclic variation) of the special symbols is started while a power recovery image is being displayed, which places restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19, the state in which restrictions are placed on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the player can adjust the volume and light intensity after being made aware that the variable display (including the variable performance) of the special symbols has started, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, when a variable performance starts while a power recovery image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed so that they are visible while the power recovery image is fading out, but the time it takes for the multiple performance symbols to be displayed (update change after pre-change action) is longer than the time it takes for the multiple special symbols to be displayed (update change). Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the special symbol has started to display the variable special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance. Also, the performance symbol can improve the performance effect at the start of the change, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, if a variable performance starts while a power restoration image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the special symbols start to change (update change) before the power restoration image finishes fading out, and the performance symbols start to change (update change after pre-change action) after the power restoration image finishes fading out. This makes it possible to immediately recognize that the special symbols have started to change, while checking the stop results of the previous variable performance. Also, the performance symbols can improve the performance effect at the start of the change, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, if a variable performance starts while a power restoration image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the variable display (update variable) of the special symbols starts before the power restoration image finishes fading out, the reserved icon is displayed visibly while the power restoration image is fading out, and the decreasing display (shift display to the icon) ends after the power restoration image finishes fading out. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbols has started, while also accurately recognizing that the reserved memory has decreased, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, if a variable performance starts while the power restoration image is being displayed, the reserved icon is displayed so as to be visible while the power restoration image is fading out, and the decreasing display (shifting display to the icon) starts after the power restoration image has finished fading out, and the variable display of the performance pattern starts after the decreasing display of the reserved icon has finished. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the variable display of the performance pattern starts, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, if a variable performance starts while the power recovery image is being displayed, the display of the icon is completed after the power recovery image has finished fading out (the shift display from the reserved icon is completed), and the variable display of the performance pattern starts after the display of the icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the variable display of the performance pattern starts, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, if a variable performance starts while the power recovery image is being displayed, the display mode of the cyclical variation of the special symbol is changed multiple times before the power recovery image fades out. Therefore, the customer waiting demo performance can be ended in a natural flow while making the player aware that the variable display of the special symbol has started, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, when a variable performance starts while the power restoration image is being displayed, the performance pattern is displayed without fading in (superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image) so that it is visible while the power restoration image is fading out. This allows the customer waiting demo performance to end in a natural flow and the variable performance to start without delay, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 143 to 144, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice performance (start effect performance, mode change performance) that makes the player expect a big win in response to the start of the variable performance and restricts the visibility of the performance pattern, and if the variable performance starts while the power recovery image is being displayed, the performance pattern is displayed without fading in (superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image) so that it is visible while the power recovery image is fading out, and the specific advance notice performance starts after the performance pattern becomes visible. Therefore, while allowing the player to check the stop result of the previous variable performance, the player can be made aware that a specific advance notice performance has started due to the start of the variable performance, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state or a specific game state (time-saving state), if the display of the special symbols is shortened, the pre-change action of the performance symbols may not be performed (or the time of the pre-change action may be shortened), and if the display of the special symbols that is first started after the power is restored from a power outage is shortened, the display of the performance symbols will start while the power recovery image is fading out (or at an earlier timing than when the display is executed during the customer waiting display). In other words, the time until the display of the performance symbols is changed (updated) is likely to be shorter when the display starts while the power recovery image is displayed than when the display starts while the customer waiting display is being executed. In this way, the display can be smoothly progressed after the power is restored when the player understands that the display of the special symbols will be changed, making the game more interesting.

(Timing chart for command exchange during normal variation)
Using Figure 145, a specific example of command exchange for normal variable effects will be explained.

Figure 145 (1) is a timing chart when the performance control board 130 can normally receive commands related to normal variable performance, and Figure 145 (2) is a timing chart when the command related to normal variable performance cannot be normally received.
It should be noted that the game in Figure 145 (1) and Figure 145 (2) progresses on the same timeline, and the time lag in the presentation caused by the exchange of commands is not taken into consideration here.

First, we will explain Figure 145 (1).
At the timing of T0, the machine is in a waiting state where the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, and the normal background image is scrolling horizontally on the main display device 70, and the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are displayed stationary. Also, no BGM is output, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while the machine is waiting for customers.

Then, at the timing of T1, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) related to the normal variable display to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this start command normally, the normal variable display starts, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start variable display (pre-variation action, update variation), the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) corresponding to the non-reach display is played and output from the beginning of the song, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit normal variable light.

After that, at the timing of T2, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops following the left and right performance patterns 70a that have already temporarily stopped, a stop sound is output, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light when a miss occurs, and at the timing of T3, the output of the stop sound ends.

In addition, at the timing of T4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command successfully, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the stop state.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the machine is in a waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 successfully receives this customer waiting state designation command, the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and performance button 17 will emit light while the machine is waiting for customers.

After that, at timing T6, when a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting state started (received the customer waiting state designation command), the output of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) that had been continuing to be output is stopped midway through the song (in the middle of the song data) because the normal variable performance has ended.

Also, at the timing T8 after the timing T7, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) related to the normal variable display to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this start command normally, the normal variable display starts, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start to display variables (pre-variation action, update variation), the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is played and output from the beginning of the song, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit normal variable light.

Next, we will explain Figure 145 (2).
Incidentally, the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as those in FIG. 145(1), so only the timing from T4 onwards will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this stop command properly, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display period of the special symbol TZ, and the light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) when a miss occurs are extended.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the machine enters a customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive this customer waiting state designation command, the off period of the performance button 17 is extended.

After that, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, which is the BGM remaining time) has elapsed since the customer waiting state began, the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) that would normally stop is extended, and at the timing of T7, when the output period of the normal BGM is being extended, the normal BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data). However, since the output stop conditions (a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, another command has been received, the start of the deciding performance, etc.) have not been met, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Note that while the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended, each time the normal BGM is output to the end of the song (the end of the song data), the normal BGM will be output again from the beginning of the song (the normal BGM corresponding to the current presentation mode is played in a loop, and normal BGM for a presentation mode different from the current presentation mode will not be output from the beginning of the song).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the display of the special symbol changes starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands related to the normal change presentation (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the presentation control board 130. If the presentation control board 130 receives these start commands successfully, the normal change presentation starts.

At this time, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a ends, and if the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a has shifted from the pattern stop position, the performance pattern 70a is displayed for a moment at the pattern stop position and the variable display (pre-variation operation) begins. On the other hand, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ does not end, and the variable display continues as is, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) continues to be output without interruption, and the off period of the performance button 17 also continues. In addition, the light emission period when a miss occurs in the various lighting devices ends, and normal variable light emission begins.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ end, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped at the pattern stop position, and the variable display special pattern TZ is displayed as stopped. In addition, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) continues to be output without interruption, but after a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has passed, the output of the normal BGM stops.

Here we have explained the case where the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly during a normal fluctuation performance, but the basic flow is the same when the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly during a long fluctuation performance.

In FIG. 145 (1), the output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is stopped at T6 after the performance control board 130 has normally received the customer waiting state designation command at T5. However, rather than continuing to output inaudible sound and starting to output normal BGM from the beginning of the song at T8, the normal BGM that was being output as inaudible sound may instead be switched to being output as audible sound.

Also, in FIG. 145 (2), rather than continuing to output normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) without interruption at timing T8, the normal BGM may be output from the beginning of the song.

(Timing chart for sending and receiving commands for the Miss SPSP Reach Variation Presentation)
Using Figure 146, a specific example of command exchange for a miss SPSP reach change presentation will be explained.

Figure 146 (1) is a timing chart when a command related to a miss SPSP reach change presentation can be received normally, and Figure 146 (2) is a timing chart when a command related to a miss SPSP reach change presentation cannot be received normally.
It should be noted that the game in Figures 146(1) and 146(2) progresses on the same timeline, and the time lag in the presentation caused by the exchange of commands is not taken into consideration here.

First, we will explain Figure 146 (1).
At the timing of T0, the special symbols related to the SPSP reach variable performance are displayed, and the SPSP reach performance is being performed. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an SPSP reach background image, and the two performance symbols 70a on the left and right sides are temporarily stopped in the upper left corner of the screen to form a reach state, and the central performance symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner, and the performance related to the SPSP reach is being performed in a state where all three special symbols TZ are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the SPSP reach BGM is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SPSP reach light.

Then, at the timing of T1, the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage and the decisive effect begins. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM stops, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and the operation prompt effect begins. Specifically, an operation prompt image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a prompt sound saying "Press it!" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, at the timing of T2, if the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failure effect is executed to indicate that the big win game will not be executed. Specifically, a failure image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9. Also, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at the upper left corner of the screen with a reach failure number, and various lights (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light when it is a miss.

At the timing of T3, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the failure to make effect, the output of the failure sound is stopped. In addition, an eye-catching effect (e.g., 1 second) is executed, which suggests that the effect pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) will be displayed stationary, and the SPSP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, and the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and the display mode of only numbers returns to the display mode of numbers + characters, maintaining the temporarily stopped state.

Then, at the timing of T4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 successfully receives this stop command, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the stop state.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed and the machine enters a waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 successfully receives this customer waiting state designation command, the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and performance button 17 will emit light while waiting for customers.

Also, at the timing of T6, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) related to the normal variable display to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this start command normally, the normal variable display starts, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start variable display (pre-variation action, update variation), the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) corresponding to the non-reach display is played and output from the beginning of the song, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform normal variable light emission.

Next, we will explain Figure 146 (2).
Incidentally, the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as those in FIG. 146(1), so only the timing from T4 onwards will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this stop command properly, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the period during which the special symbol TZ changes display, the period during which the BGM is not output, and the light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) when a miss occurs are extended.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the machine enters a customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive this customer waiting state designation command, the off period of the performance button 17 is extended.

In addition, at the timing of T6, when the display of the special symbol changes starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands for the normal change presentation (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the presentation control board 130. If the presentation control board 130 receives this start command successfully, the extension of various periods ends and the normal change presentation starts.

At this time, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a ends, and if the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a has shifted from the pattern stop position, the performance pattern 70a is displayed for a moment at the pattern stop position and starts a variable display (pre-variation operation). On the other hand, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ does not end, and the variable display continues as it is, and the off period of the performance button 17 also continues. In addition, output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) starts, and normal variable light emission starts in various lighting devices.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ end, and the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped at the pattern stop position, and the variable display special pattern TZ is displayed as stopped.

Also, here we have explained the case where the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly during a miss SPSP reach fluctuation presentation, but the basic flow is the same even if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly during a miss normal reach fluctuation presentation or a miss SP reach fluctuation presentation, except that the output of the BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) stops when the reach miss result temporarily stops without a deciding presentation being performed.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 145 to 146, in a non-reach variable performance in which the output of BGM continues (remains) until the end of the variable performance, if the stop condition is not met when the performance sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output and the performance pattern is temporarily stopped (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance pattern and the output period of the performance sound are extended, and if the performance sound is output until the end (end of the song) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, the performance sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the performance sound is extended even in a state in which the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 145 to 146, in a non-reach variable performance in which the output of BGM continues (remains) until the end of the variable performance, if the stop condition is not met when the effect sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output and the special symbol is variable and displayed (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally), the variable period of the special symbol and the output period of the effect sound are extended, and if the effect sound is output until the end (end of the song) during the extension of this special symbol variable period, the effect sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the effect sound is extended even in a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect during the extension of the special symbol variable period, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 145 to 146, in the variable presentation of a reach where the output of BGM does not continue (does not remain) until the end of the variable presentation, if the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received properly, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly, the next start command cannot be received properly) when the presentation pattern (miss presentation pattern) is temporarily stopped without BGM being output and the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern is extended, no new BGM is output during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern. This prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that a so-called revival presentation (a presentation that suggests a big win after suggesting a miss) may be executed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 145 to 146, in a reach variable presentation where the output of BGM does not continue (does not remain) until the end of the variable presentation, if the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received properly, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly, the next start command cannot be received properly) when the BGM is not output and the special symbol is displaying a variable presentation and the variable period of the special symbol is extended, no new BGM is output during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol. This prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that a so-called revival presentation (a presentation suggesting a big win after suggesting a miss) may be executed, making the game more interesting.

(Timing chart for command exchange for jackpot SPSP reach variation performance)
Using Figure 147, a specific example of command exchange for the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation will be explained.

Figure 147 (1) is a timing chart when a command related to the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation can be received normally, and Figure 147 (2) is a timing chart when a command related to the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation cannot be received normally.
It should be noted that the game in Figures 147(1) and 147(2) progresses on the same timeline, and the time lag in the presentation caused by the exchange of commands is not taken into consideration here.

First, we will explain Figure 147 (1).
At the timing of T0, the special symbols related to the SPSP reach variable performance are displayed, and the SP reach performance is being performed. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an SP reach background image, and the two performance symbols 70a on the left and right at the top of the screen are temporarily stopped to form a reach state, while the central performance symbol 70a is displayed, and the performance related to the SP reach is being performed while all three special symbols TZ are displayed. Also, the SP reach BGM is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SP reach light.

After that, when the SP reach performance reaches its final stage and the reach miss result is temporarily stopped, an SPSP development performance is executed, which indicates that the performance will develop into an SPSP reach performance, and when the SPSP reach performance starts at timing T1, an SPSP reach background image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a performance image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. Also, the SPSP reach BGM is output in place of the SP reach BGM, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SPSP reach light.

At this time, the timing for the confirmation effect has arrived, and the confirmation effect is executed. Specifically, a confirmation sound "queen, queen" is output from the audio output device 9, and the handle light-emitting device (not shown) rotatably mounted within the launch handle 15 is activated. Specifically, it rotates while emitting light in rainbow colors, indicating a jackpot.

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the confirmation effect, the output of the confirmation sound of the confirmation effect stops, and at the timing of T3, the decision effect starts as the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM stops, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and the operation prompting effect starts. At this time, an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a prompting sound saying "Press it!" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful decision effect (a type of confirmation effect) is executed, which indicates that a jackpot game will be executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (big descent) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves left and right. In addition, a successful decision image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a success sound "Kyuin Kyuin" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at the jackpot number in the upper left corner of the screen. Furthermore, the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors indicating a jackpot, and the effect button vibration motor is activated to vibrate the effect button 17.

At the timing of T5, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the successful play performance, the output of the success sound stops, the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 stops, and the vibration of the performance button 17 stops. In addition, as the eye-catching performance is executed, the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image is restored from the SPSP reach background image, the performance pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and the display mode of numbers only returns to the display mode of numbers + characters, maintaining the temporarily stopped state.

Next, at the timing of T6, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command normally, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) stop emitting rainbow colors and emit light while stopped. In addition, the handle lighting device rotatably mounted within the launch handle 15 stops operating.

After that, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, an opening designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this opening designation command normally, the opening performance starts. Specifically, the background during the jackpot (here, the opening background) is displayed on the main display device 70, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are hidden, BGM during the jackpot (here, the opening BGM) is output from the audio output device 9, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the jackpot.

Also, at timing T8, when the opening time has elapsed, a round designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this round designation command successfully, the round performance will begin.

Next, we will explain Figure 147 (2).
Note that the timings from T0 to T5 are the same as those in FIG. 147(1), so only the timing from T6 onwards will be explained.

At the timing of T6, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this stop command properly, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the change period of the special symbol TZ, the rainbow light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74), and the operation period of the handle light emitting device rotatably installed within the launch handle 15 are extended.

In addition, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, an opening designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this opening designation command normally, the horizontal scrolling period of the normal background image and the non-output period of the variable BGM are extended.

After that, at the timing of T8, when the opening time has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a round designation command to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this round designation command normally, the extension of various periods ends and the round performance begins. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays the background during the jackpot (here, the background during the round), the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ become hidden, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM during the jackpot (here, the BGM during the round), and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the jackpot.

If the performance control board 130 successfully receives the opening designation command at the timing of T7, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ will end, and the opening performance will start without the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ being displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, rather than stopping the output of the success sound at the timing of T5, the output of the success sound may be stopped at a timing between the timing of T4 and the timing of T5, and rather than stopping the rainbow-colored light emission and vibration of the effect button 17 at the timing of T5 simultaneously, they may be stopped with a time lag.

The confirmation effect can be executed at multiple times (at the start of the variable effect, at the start of the normal reach effect, at the start of the SP reach effect, etc.), and among these, the confirmation sound and the rotation of the handle light-emitting device are designed to stop outputting a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) after the start of output, but the rainbow light emitted by the handle light-emitting device continues until the stop command is received. Therefore, no matter when the confirmation effect is executed, if the effect control board 130 cannot properly receive the stop command, the rainbow light emission period of the handle light-emitting device will be extended.

In addition, the confirmation performance can be executed at multiple times (when the variable performance starts, when the normal reach performance starts, when the SP reach performance starts, etc.), but it will not be started (executed) after the timing of receiving the stop command (during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, during the extension of the variable display period of the special pattern TZ).

Also, here we have explained the case where the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation performance, but the basic flow is the same even if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the jackpot normal reach fluctuation performance or the jackpot SP reach fluctuation performance, except that the output of the fluctuation BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) stops when the deciding performance is not executed and the jackpot result temporarily stops.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, in a jackpot variable presentation, if the stop condition is not met when the presentation pattern (miss presentation pattern) is temporarily stopped (the stop command cannot be received normally, the opening designation command cannot be received normally) and the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern is extended, the final presentation will not start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern, but the final presentation that started before the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern can continue to be executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, the confirmation effect includes a first effect (output of a confirmation sound) and a second effect (operation of the handle light-emitting device), and for a confirmation effect that starts before the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern, the first effect (output of a confirmation sound) ends before the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern, and the second effect (operation of the handle light-emitting device) can continue even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming fed up with the confirmation effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, in the case where the stop condition is not met while the special symbol is being displayed during a jackpot variation presentation (the stop command cannot be received normally, the opening designation command cannot be received normally) and the variation period of the special symbol is extended, the final presentation will not start during the extension of the special symbol variation period, but the final presentation that started before the extension of the special symbol variation period can continue to be executed even during the extension of the special symbol variation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from decreasing during the extension of the special symbol variation period, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, the confirmation effect includes a first effect (output of a confirmation sound) and a second effect (operation of the handle light-emitting device), and for a confirmation effect that starts before the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period, the first effect (output of a confirmation sound) ends before the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period, and the second effect (operation of the handle light-emitting device) can continue even during the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the confirmation sound becoming unpleasant to the ears during the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When a confirmation effect is executed during a jackpot variation effect, regardless of the start timing of the confirmation effect, the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device) continues to be executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern or the extension of the variation period of the special pattern.

(Timing chart for command exchange during look-ahead zone performance)
Using Figure 148, a specific example of command exchange during a look-ahead zone performance will be explained.

Figure 148 (1) is a timing chart when commands can be received normally during the look-ahead zone performance, and Figure 148 (2) is a timing chart when commands cannot be received normally during the look-ahead zone performance.
It should be noted that the game in Figures 148(1) and 148(2) progresses on the same timeline, and the time lag in the presentation caused by the exchange of commands is not taken into consideration here.

First, we will explain Figure 148 (1).
At the timing of T0, the variable display of the special symbols related to the normal variable performance is being executed, and the normal variable performance is being executed. Specifically, in the main display device 70, the normal background is scrolled horizontally, and the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are displayed variably. In addition, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) are emitting normal variable light. In addition, a zone suggestion performance is being executed, which suggests that a pre-reading zone performance may be executed.

After that, at timing T1, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the zone suggestion presentation, the look-ahead zone presentation begins. Specifically, on the main display device 70, a look-ahead zone background image is displayed, along with a blue zone image (or a red heat zone image), and output of the zone BGM (or heat zone BGM) begins. At this time, the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is reduced.

Then, at the timing of T2, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops following the left and right performance patterns 70a that had previously temporarily stopped, a stop sound is output, the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light when a miss occurs, and at the timing of T3, the output of the stop sound ends.

In addition, at the timing of T4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command successfully, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the stop state.

At this time, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but since the output stop conditions (a certain period of time has passed since receiving the command to specify the waiting state for customers, the start of the final performance, etc.) are not met, normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the display of the special symbols begins, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) related to the miss SP reach change presentation to the presentation control board 130. If the presentation control board 130 receives this start command normally, the miss SP reach change presentation begins, the presentation symbols 70a and special symbols TZ begin to change display (pre-change action, update change), and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit normal change light.

In addition, at the timing of T6, when the left and right performance symbols 70a form a reach state and temporarily stop, starting a normal reach performance, normal reach BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output instead of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM), and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SP reach light.

After that, when the normal reach performance reaches its final stage, the SP reach development performance is executed, and when the SP reach performance starts at the timing of T7, the look-ahead zone performance ends, and the main display device 70 displays the SP reach background image and the performance image related to the SP reach, the performance pattern 70a forming the reach state moves to the top of the screen and is displayed in a reduced size, and the performance pattern 70a changes from a display mode of numbers + characters to a display mode of numbers only. In addition, the SP reach BGM is output in place of the normal reach BGM, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SP reach light.

Then, at the timing T9 after passing through the timing T8, when the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the final stage of the SP reach performance due to a reach failure result, a stopping sound is output, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light when it is a failure.

In addition, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach miss result was temporarily stopped, an eye-catching effect is executed, and the SP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and the display returns from the number only display mode to the number + character display mode, maintaining the temporarily stopped state.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command successfully, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the stop state.

Next, we will explain Figure 148 (2).
Incidentally, the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as those in FIG. 148(1), so only the timing from T4 onwards will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this stop command properly, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display period of the special symbol TZ, and the light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) when a miss occurs are extended.

At this time, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but since the output stop conditions (a certain period of time has passed since receiving a command to specify a waiting state for customers, receiving another command, the start of a final performance, etc.) are not met, normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the variable display of the special symbol has begun, the main control board 110 sends to the performance control board 130 start commands related to the loss SP reach variable performance (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command). If the performance control board 130 cannot receive this start command normally, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ, and the light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) at the time of loss are further extended.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended, and at the timing of T7, since the SP reach performance is not executed, the display period of the look-ahead zone background image and the output period of the look-ahead zone BGM are extended.

After that, at timing T8, the zone BGM is output until the end of the song (end of the song data), but because the output stop conditions (start of SP reach performance, reception of other commands) are not met, the zone BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing T11 after the timings T9 and T10, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a stop command (symbol confirmation command) to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command successfully, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. In addition, horizontal scrolling of the normal background image begins in place of the look-ahead zone background image, the output of the zone BGM stops, and the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) returns to normal.

In addition, even if the stop command (pattern determination command) is not received properly at the timing of T11, and then the start command, customer waiting state designation command, opening designation command, etc. are received properly, the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ will be displayed as stopped, the display of the preview zone background image will end, and the output of the zone BGM will be stopped.

In addition, if the output of the zone BGM stops as a result of the start command being received successfully, the output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) will begin (restart) in place of the zone BGM, and if the output of the zone BGM stops as a result of the opening designation command being received successfully, the output of the jackpot BGM (opening BGM) will begin in place of the zone BGM.

When the look-ahead zone performance starts at timing T1, rather than lowering the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM), output may be stopped or it may be output at an inaudible volume. In that case, output of the normal BGM at an audible volume may be resumed at timing T11.

In addition, we have explained the case where a miss SP reach variation effect is not executed because the stop command and start command cannot be received normally during the execution of a look-ahead zone effect that is scheduled to be performed over multiple variation displays, but the basic flow is the same even when this SP reach variation effect is a jackpot SP reach variation effect.

Also, we have explained the case where the SP reach variation effect that was the predicted target of the look-ahead zone effect is not executed because the stop time command and start time command cannot be received normally, but the basic flow is also the same when the predicted target of the look-ahead zone effect is a normal reach variation effect or an SPSP reach variation effect, and the normal reach variation effect or the SPSP reach variation effect is not executed because the stop time command and start time command cannot be received normally.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, in a non-reach variable performance in which a specific sound (such as zone BGM) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game is being output, if the stop condition is not met when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped (the stop command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance pattern and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output until the end (end of the song) during the extension of the temporary stop period of this performance pattern, the specific sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the specific sound is extended even in a state in which the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, in a non-reach variable performance in which a specific sound (such as zone BGM) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game is being output, if the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally) when a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable period of the special symbol and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output until the end (end of the song) during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, the specific sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the specific sound is extended even when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, if a specific command (a command to stop the variable presentation when the look-ahead zone presentation should end, a command to designate a waiting state for customers, a command to designate an opening, etc.) is received during the extension of the output period of the specific sound (zone background music, etc.), it is possible to end the variable presentation and stop the output of the specific sound. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the specific sound (zone background music, etc.) being output even after the expectation of a jackpot has disappeared, making the game more enjoyable.

(Example of when an icon reappears after being hidden)
A specific example of a case where an icon is hidden and then redisplayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. FIG.

Figure 149 is a timing chart for when an icon is redisplayed after being hidden, and Figures 150 and 151 are diagrams showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 149. Note that the explanation here is for presentation mode A, but presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations are omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 149, the first reserved number is in a state of "2" and the first special pattern display 60 is displaying a change in the first special pattern and the sub-first reserved display 81 is displaying a change in the first special pattern (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "2", and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable) using the cross key 19 (see FIG. 150(a)).

In addition, in the main display device 70, the two left and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the top of the screen where the SP reach background image is displayed, forming a reach state, while the central performance symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner, and the SPSP reach performance is executed with all the special symbols TZ displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B displays the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) in a performance operation state, and the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode in a performance operation state, and the SP reach BGM is audibly output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 150(a)).

Then, at the timing T1 in FIG. 149, when the SP Reach performance reaches its final stage and the Reach Miss result is temporarily stopped, an SPSP development performance is executed, which suggests that the performance will develop into an SPSP Reach performance. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move (a big descent) to the performance position, and the second movable member 73b moves left and right. Also, the main display device 70 displays a development image HA that covers (hides and restricts visibility of) various performance images in correspondence with the first movable member 73a, and the output of the SP Reach BGM that was being output from the audio output device 9 is stopped and a development sound is output (see FIG. 150(b)).

When the development performance is executed (when the development image HA is displayed), the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are hidden (obscured and visibility is restricted), but when hidden, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI in the normal display mode are in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue) is in a second position rotated a specified angle (here, 90 degrees) to the right.

After that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the development performance, the SPSP reach performance starts. Specifically, with the SPSP reach background image displayed, three performance patterns 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a smaller size than normal, and a performance image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B remains hidden, and the SPSP reach BGM is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 150(c)).

The icon is hidden when the SPSP development performance begins and redisplayed when the SPSP development performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, it is not displayed in the operating state (first position facing left) in which it was hidden when the SPSP development performance began (first position facing left), but is displayed in a specified operating state (the position in which the performance would have continued even after it was hidden: in this case, second position facing right) (see Figure 150 (c)).

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 149, the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage and a decision effect is started. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM stops, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and the operation prompt effect starts. At this time, an operation prompt image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a prompt sound saying "Press it!" is output from the audio output device 9. Also, the effect button 17 emits white light (see FIG. 150 (d)).

Then, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 149, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failed decision effect is executed, indicating that the big win game will not be executed. Specifically, a failed decision image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9. Also, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at the upper left corner of the screen with a reach failure number (see FIG. 150(e)).

After that, at timing T5 in Figure 149, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the failure to play effect started, the output of the failure sound stops and the effect pattern 70a moves from the upper left corner of the screen to its normal position in the center (above the pattern stop position) and is displayed at its normal size (see Figure 150 (f)).

In addition, at the timing of T6 in Figure 149, an eye-catching effect is executed, suggesting that the effect pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) will stop being displayed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC displayed in the center of the screen gradually expands to cover the effect pattern 70a and the icon TI (see Figure 151 (g)). Note that even if the eye-catching image IC expands, the special pattern TZ and the various reserved number display areas (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB) are not covered (visibility is restricted).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 149, when the predetermined period from the start of the eye-catching performance has ended, the eye-catching performance ends. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC expands to the entire screen and fades out, the SPSP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image (here, the mode A background image), the performance pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and the display mode of numbers only returns to the display mode of numbers + characters, maintaining the temporarily stopped state, and the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are redisplayed (see FIG. 151 (h)).

Note that the hold icon in the normal display mode (white) is hidden when the SPSP development performance begins and redisplayed when the eye-catching performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, it is not displayed from the operating state (first position facing left) when it was hidden when the SPSP development performance began (first position facing left), but is displayed from a specified operating state (the position in which the performance would have continued even after it was hidden: in this case, the second position facing vertically) (see Figure 151 (h)).

In addition, the reserved icon in the special display mode (blue) is hidden when the SPSP development performance starts and redisplayed when the eye-catching performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, it is not displayed from the operating state when it was hidden when the SPSP development performance started (the second position rotated 90 degrees to the right), but is displayed from a specified operating state (the position in which the performance operation would have continued even after it was hidden: here, the initial position) (see Figure 151 (h)).

In addition, even if the hold icon is in a special display mode other than blue, when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operating state when it was hidden is not performed, but it is displayed from a specified operating state (the posture in which the performance action would have continued even after it was hidden).

In addition, the icon in the normal display mode (white) is hidden when the eye-catching performance begins and redisplayed when the eye-catching performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, it is not processed to display from the operating state (first position facing left) in which it was hidden when the eye-catching performance began (see FIG. 151 (h)), but is displayed from a predetermined operating mode (the position in which the performance operation would have continued even after it was hidden: in this case, the second position facing vertically).

Even if the icon is in a special display mode (blue, red, rainbow), when it is redisplayed, it is not displayed in the same state as when it was hidden, but is instead displayed in a specific state (the position in which it would have continued to perform the animation even after it was hidden).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 149, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 151 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the display of the changes on the sub-first change display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animated manner, and the display of the performance pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") stops. Also, the volume and light adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (see FIG. 151 (j)).

In addition, at timing T10 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the animated disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 151 (k)).

If a volume value image or light intensity value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the performance pattern 70a is frozen, the image is erased because the frozen display of the performance pattern 70a makes it impossible to adjust the volume or light intensity using the cross key 19. However, the volume value image or light intensity value image is erased before the animation of the icon TI is finished erasing. In other words, when the volume value image or light intensity value image is erased, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the animation of the icon TI being erased.

Next, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 149, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and the display of the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 (first cycle change) begins.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "0", and the change display on the sub-first change indicator 81 will begin. Also, when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has passed since the change performance began, the state returns to one in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable) using the cross key 19.

If the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command after receiving a stop command, the board will return to a state where volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable) using the cross key 19 after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 149 to 151, when the reserved icon in the normal or special mode is re-displayed in response to the end of a specific effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect - SPSP reach effect - eye-catching effect) in which the reserved icon in the normal or special mode is hidden in the variable effect, the reserved icon is not displayed from the operating state (posture) at the time it was hidden, but is displayed from a predetermined operating state (the posture in which the performance operation would have continued even after it was hidden). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when re-displaying the reserved icon, and also makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when the reserved icon is re-displayed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The specified operation state when the hold icon is redisplayed may be the initial first position (first operation state) rather than the position in which the presentation action would have continued even after it was hidden. Also, in a short-term specific presentation (such as a SP development presentation), the icon may be redisplayed from the position in which the presentation action would have continued even after it was hidden, and in a long-term specific presentation (such as a SPSP reach presentation), the icon may be redisplayed from the initial first position (first operation state).

In addition, as a specific effect (short-time effect) in which the reserved icon is hidden and then redisplayed, the effect mode (display mode of the reserved icon) may not change, but a stage change effect in which the background image changes or a jackpot preview effect in which a specified obscuring image is displayed (both of which are performed before the reach effect) may be provided.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 149 to 151, when the icon in the normal mode or special mode is re-displayed in response to the end of a specific effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) in which the icon in the normal mode or special mode is hidden in the variable effect, the icon is not displayed from the operation state (posture) when it was hidden, but is displayed from a predetermined operation state (the posture in which the performance operation would have continued even after it was hidden, the first posture). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when the icon is re-displayed, and also makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when the icon is re-displayed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The specified action state when the icon is redisplayed may be the initial first action state (first action state) rather than the action in which the presentation action would have continued even after it was hidden. Also, in a short-duration specific presentation (such as a SP development presentation), the icon may be redisplayed in the action in which the presentation action would have continued even after it was hidden, and in a long-duration specific presentation (such as a SPSP reach presentation), the icon may be redisplayed in the initial first action state (first action state).

In addition, as a specific effect (short-time effect) in which the icon is hidden and then redisplayed, the effect mode (display mode of the pending icon) may not change, but a stage change effect in which the background image changes or a jackpot preview effect in which a specified obscuring image is displayed (both of which are performed before the reach effect) may be provided.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 149 to 151, when a special symbol is displayed as stopped (end of cyclical fluctuation), there is no restriction or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when a performance symbol or special symbol is displayed as stopped (end of variable performance) in response to the special symbol being displayed as stopped (end of cyclical fluctuation), restrictions or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 occur or are restricted (become unadjustable). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, even if the volume or light intensity is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware that the performance symbol or special symbol is displayed as stopped (end of variable performance).

In addition, if the stopped display of a performance pattern or special pattern causes restrictions or limitations (unable to adjust) the volume or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19, restrictions or limitations (unable to adjust) will occur or be imposed on the volume or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 at the same timing, regardless of the type of variable performance being executed. This means that the player is no longer forced to do the cumbersome work of changing the timing of adjusting the volume or light intensity using the cross key 19 every time a variable performance is executed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 149 to 151, when the special symbol is displayed as stopped (end of the cyclical fluctuation), there is no restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the icon is erased (the fluctuation presentation ends) in response to the special symbol being displayed as stopped (end of the cyclical fluctuation), there is a restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment becomes impossible, the volume value image or light intensity value image is erased). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, even if the volume or light intensity is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware that the icon is erased, that is, that the fluctuation presentation ends.

As for the restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that arise after the special symbol has stopped being displayed, it has been stated that volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment cannot be performed using the cross key 19. However, the volume value image and light intensity value image may be set not to be displayed (or erased if displayed), or the volume value image and light intensity value image displayed in the front layer of the performance symbol 70a may be displayed in the rear layer of the performance symbol 70a (in front of the background image and superimposed behind the performance symbol 70a), thereby creating restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19.

In addition, when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, instead of returning to a state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19, it is also possible to return to a state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 at the time the customer waiting state designation command is received, or to return to a state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 when the stop time of the performance pattern (special pattern) has elapsed, or to return to a state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 before the stop time of the performance pattern (special pattern) has elapsed.

Also, the volume value image and light quantity value image may be displayed even if the effect button 17 or cross key 19 is not operated during the time from when the waiting state is entered until the waiting demo effect starts. In this case, the volume value image and light quantity value image may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the waiting state is entered (for example, 15 seconds, which is the same time as the BGM lingering time, or 10 seconds, which is a shorter time than the BGM lingering time).

(Specific examples of the status of the reserved icon before and after the icon change performance)
A specific example of the operation state of the reserved icon before and after the icon change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 152. Note that, although the description will be given for the effect mode A here, the effect modes B to F are basically the same, and therefore the description will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(a), when the first reserved number is in the state of "2", a variable effect (variable display of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) is being executed, with "2" being displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and "0" being displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. In addition, two reserved icons in the normal display mode are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and a performance operation (swinging operation) is performed so that these three icons are synchronized.

In this state, when the reserved icon change effect (first change) is started based on the character A action change pattern targeting the reserved icon displayed in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, as shown in FIG. 152(b), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the reserved icon HI in the normal state, which is in the second position facing right in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

When the heart HE that has been obscuring the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes, as shown in FIG. 152(c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) that was in the second position facing right changes to a hold icon in a first special display mode (circular blue) with a different shape, and starts a rotational motion (performance motion) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operating state of the hold icon HI before the change (here, the second position facing right).

The hold icon in the first special display mode (circular blue), the hold icon in the second special display mode (circular red), and the hold icon in the third special display mode (circular rainbow) have display modes common to multiple presentation modes, but in any display mode, the presentation action (rotation action) of going from the first position to the second position and back to the first position is repeated at one cycle of 2.5 seconds (a different cycle from the presentation action of the icon in the normal display mode).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 152(d), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable performance ends. At this time, the reserved icon HI in the first special display mode is in the second position, rotated 90 degrees to the right.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special pattern begins, as shown in FIG. 152(e), the first reserved number display area SA displays "1" and the variable display (variable display of display pattern 70a, variable display of special pattern TZ) begins, and the two reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift (decreasing display) toward the icon display area 70C. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the shift display of the reserved icons is completed and one becomes the relevant icon TI.

Then, when the reserved icon change effect (second change) based on the character A action change pattern is started targeting the reserved icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, as shown in FIG. 152(f), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the reserved icon HI in the first special display mode, which is in the second position rotated 270 degrees to the right in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

In addition, when the heart HE obscuring the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 152(g). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode, which was in the second position rotated 270 degrees to the right, changes to a hold icon in the second special display mode (round and red) of the same shape, and continues to rotate while retaining the operating state of the hold icon HI before the change (the second position rotated 270 degrees to the right).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 152(h), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable performance ends. At this time, the reserved icon HI in the second special display mode is in the first position (initial position) having rotated 360 degrees and returned to the 0 degree position.

When the hold icon in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) is changed to a hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow), which has a different shape, the rotation action (performance action) starts from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operation state of the hold icon before the change. On the other hand, when the hold icon in the first special display mode (round blue) is changed to a hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow), which has the same shape, the rotation action (performance action) starts while inheriting the operation state of the hold icon before the change.

In addition, while the reserved icon change performance in the character A action change pattern has been explained here, for the normal change pattern and the reserved icon change performance in the character B to D action change patterns, when the reserved icon changes from the normal display mode (hexagonal white) to the reserved icon in the first to third special display modes, which have different shapes, the rotation action (performance action) starts from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon before the change. On the other hand, when the reserved icon changes from the first special display mode (circular blue) to the second special display mode (circular red) or the third special display mode (circular rainbow), which have the same shape, or when the reserved icon changes from the second special display mode (circular red) to the third special display mode (circular rainbow), which has the same shape, the rotation action (performance action) starts while inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon before the change.

(Specific examples of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change performance)
A specific example of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change effect will be described with reference to Fig. 153. Note that, although the description will be given for the effect mode A here, the effect modes B to F are basically the same, and therefore the description will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(a), when the first reserved number is in the state of "1", a variable effect (variable display of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) is being executed, with "1" being displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and "0" being displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. Also, one reserved icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and a performance operation (swinging operation) is performed so that these two icons are synchronized.

In this state, when the icon change effect (first change) based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. 153(b), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI, which is in the normal display mode in the second position facing right in the icon display area 70C.

When the heart HE that has obscured the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes, as shown in FIG. 153(c). Specifically, the icon TI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) that was in the second position facing right changes to the icon in the first special display mode (circular blue) that has a different shape, and starts a rotational motion (performance motion) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the motion state of the icon TI before the change (here, the second position facing right).

Note that the icon in the first special display mode (circular blue), the icon in the second special display mode (circular red), and the icon in the third special display mode (circular rainbow) are display modes that are common to multiple presentation modes, but in any display mode, the presentation action (rotation action) of going from the first position to the second position and back to the first position is repeated with one cycle of 2.5 seconds.

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 153(d). At this time, the icon TI in the first special display mode is in the second position, rotated 90 degrees to the right.

After that, when the icon change effect (second change) based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. 153(e), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the first special display mode that is in the second position rotated 180 degrees to the right in the icon display area 70C.

When the heart HE that has obscured the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 153(f). Specifically, the icon TI in the first special display mode, which was in the second position rotated 180 degrees to the right, changes to the icon in the second special display mode (circular, red) of the same shape, and continues the rotational action while retaining the operating state of the icon TI before the change (the second position rotated 180 degrees to the right).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 153(g). At this time, the icon TI in the second special display mode is in the second posture, rotated 270 degrees to the right.

When the icon is changed from the normal display mode (hexagonal white) to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow), which has a different shape, the icon starts rotating (presentation action) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon before the change. On the other hand, when the icon is changed from the first special display mode (round blue) to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow), which has the same shape, the icon starts rotating (presentation action) while inheriting the operation state of the icon before the change.

In addition, while the icon change performance in the character A action change pattern has been explained here, for the normal change pattern and character B to D action change patterns, when the reserved icon or icon in the normal mode (hexagonal white) changes to the icon in the first to third special display modes with different shapes, the rotation action (performance action) starts from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon or icon before the change. On the other hand, when the reserved icon or icon in the first special display mode (circular blue) changes to the second special display mode (circular red) or the third special display mode (circular rainbow) with the same shape, or when the second special display mode (circular red) changes to the third special display mode (circular rainbow) with the same shape, the rotation action (performance action) starts while inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon or icon before the change.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 152 to 153, when a reserved icon in the normal display mode is in the second position (changing position, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in a first to third special display mode having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed reserved icon to perform a presentation action (operation display) from the first position (initial position, first operating state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 152 to 153, when a reserved icon in a first special display mode is in a second posture (changing posture, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in the second to third special display modes having the same shape, it is possible to perform a presentation operation while maintaining the posture of the reserved icon before the change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that a player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 152 to 153, when a reserved icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in the third special display mode having the same shape, it is possible to perform a presentation operation while maintaining the posture of the reserved icon before the change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 152 to 153, when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second position (changing position, second motion state) and is changed to an icon in one of the first to third special display modes having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a performance action (motion display) from the first position (initial position, first motion state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 152 to 153, when the icon in the first special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operation state) and is changed to an icon in the second to third special display modes having the same shape, it is possible to carry out a performance operation while maintaining the posture of the icon before the change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 152 to 153, when the icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state) and is changed to an icon in the third special display mode having the same shape, it is possible to perform a presentation operation while maintaining the posture of the reserved icon before the change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a hold icon in a normal display mode is changed to a hold icon in a special display mode while a hold icon in a special display mode or the icon in question is already displayed, the hold icon in the special display mode that was already displayed or the hold icon that has newly changed to the special display mode from the same posture (operating state) as the icon in the special display mode may start a rotation action (performance action).

In addition, when the reserved icon or the icon in the first special display mode is in the second position (changing position, second operating state) and is changed to the same second to third special display modes, the reserved icon or the icon after the change may be made to perform a performance action (operation display) from the first position (initial position, first operating state).

In addition, when the reserved icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state) and is changed to a third special display mode having the same shape, the changed reserved icon or the icon may be made to perform a performance action (operation display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operating state).

In addition, when the heart image completely covers the pending icon or the icon in question and the display mode changes, the performance may be performed not from the attitude of the icon before the occlusion, but from an attitude different from the attitude of the icon before the occlusion (the second attitude if it is the first attitude, or the first attitude or a second attitude that is slightly different if it is the second attitude).

(Modification of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change performance)
The modified examples of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change effect will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Note that, although the description will be given for the effect mode A here, the effect modes B to F are basically the same, and therefore the description will be omitted.

In this modified example, the icon display modes are a fourth special display mode (circular white flashing) that indicates that the icon display mode may change, and a fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) that indicates that a specific effect (SP/SPSP reach effect) that raises the expectation of a jackpot game will be executed. Note that the icons of the fourth and fifth special display modes may also be referred to as the first and second special display modes, since the information they suggest is different from the information suggested by the icons of the first to third special display modes that indicate the expectation of a jackpot game.

The icon for the fourth special display mode (circular white flashing icon) can be displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole, and can change from the icon for the normal mode, but it does not change from the icons for the first to third special display modes or the fifth special display mode, and can change to the first to third special display modes or the fifth special display mode. Also, the icon for the fifth special display mode (multi-colored axe shape) can be changed from the icon for the fourth special display mode, but it does not change from the icons for the normal display mode or the first to third special display modes, and it does not change to the normal display mode or the first to fourth special display modes.

First, as shown in FIG. 154(a), when the first reserved number is in the state of "1", a variable effect (variable display of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) is being executed, with "1" being displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and "0" being displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. Also, one reserved icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and a performance operation (swinging operation) is performed so that these two icons are synchronized.

In this state, when the reserved icon change effect (first change) is started based on the character A action change pattern targeting the reserved icon displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, as shown in FIG. 154(b), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode, which is in the second position facing right in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, when the heart HE that has been obscuring the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes, as shown in FIG. 154(c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) that was in the second position facing right changes to a hold icon in a fourth special display mode (circular white flashing) with a different shape, and starts expanding and contracting (presentation operation) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operating state of the hold icon HI before the change (here, the second position facing right).

The fourth special display mode (white hexagon) and fifth special display mode (multi-colored axe) icons have display modes common to multiple presentation modes, but the presentation action (enlargement/reduction action) in which the fourth special display mode icon moves from a reduced-size first position to an enlarged-size second position and then returns to the first position is repeated at a cycle of 1 second (a different cycle from the presentation action of the icon in the normal display mode), and the presentation action (up/down action) in which the fifth special display mode icon moves from an upward-facing first position to a downward-facing second position and then returns to the first position is repeated at a cycle of 1.5 seconds (a different cycle from the presentation action of the icon in the normal display mode).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 154(d), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable performance ends. At this time, the reserved icon HI in the fourth special display mode is in the second position in an enlarged size.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the variable display of the first special pattern begins, as shown in FIG. 154(e), the first reserved number display area SA displays "0" and the variable display (variable display of the display pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) begins, and one reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts (decreases) toward the icon display area 70C. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the shift display of the reserved icon is completed and it becomes the icon TI.

When the icon change effect based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. 154(f), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the fourth special display mode in the medium-sized second position in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the heart HE that has been obscuring the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes, as shown in FIG. 154(g). Specifically, the icon TI in the fourth special display mode (circular, flashing white) that was in the medium-sized, second position changes to the icon in the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped, multi-colored) that has a different shape, and starts moving up and down (performance action) from the first position (initial position) without retaining the motion state of the icon TI before the change (medium-sized, second position in this case).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 154(h). At this time, the icon TI in the fifth special display mode (multicolored axe shape) is in the second position, facing downward.

When the reserved icon changes from the fourth special display mode (circular white flashing) to a reserved icon with a different shape (axe-shaped multi-colored), the icon starts moving up and down (performance action) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the motion state of the reserved icon before the change. Also, when the icon changes from the normal display mode (hexagonal white) to the icon with a different shape (circular white flashing), the icon starts expanding and contracting (performance action) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the motion state (motion state) of the icon before the change.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 154, when a reserved icon in the normal display mode is in the second position (changing position, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in a fourth special display mode (first special display mode) having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed reserved icon to perform a presentation action (operation display) from the first position (initial position, first operating state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 154, when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second position (changing position, second action state) and is changed to the icon in a fourth special display mode (first special display mode) having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a presentation action (action display) from the first position (initial position, first action state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 154, when a reserved icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is in the second position (changing position, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in a fifth special display mode (second special display mode) having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed reserved icon to perform a presentation operation (operation display) from the first position (initial position, first operating state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 154, when the icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is in the second posture (changed posture, second action state) and is changed to an icon in a fifth special display mode (second special display mode) having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a presentation action (action display) from the first posture (initial posture, first action state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is already displayed and the hold icon or icon in the normal mode changes to a hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode), the hold icon or icon that has changed from the same posture (operating state) as the hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) that was already displayed to the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) may begin an expansion/contraction operation (performance operation).

In addition, when a hold icon or icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) is already being displayed and the hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is changed to a hold icon or icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), the hold icon or icon that has changed from the same posture (moving state) as the hold icon or icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) that was already displayed may start to move up and down (presentation movement).

In addition, the icon for the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) does not only have to change from the icon for the fourth special display mode (first special display mode), but may be able to change from an icon for the normal display mode or an icon for the first or second special display mode to an icon for the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), and may not change from an icon for the third special display mode (guaranteed jackpot).

In this embodiment, a launch permission command is sent to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, making it possible to launch the game balls. However, it is also possible to send a launch permission command to the payout control board 120 when the game progress control is started, so that the game balls can be launched after the game is ready to be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, it is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from the ball lending machine installed alongside the gaming machine 1, but it may also be possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from the ball lending machine after the game progress control is started and the game becomes playable.

In addition, in this embodiment, since backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), there is no unpaid payout ball number data remaining on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. However, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, if unpaid payout ball number data remains on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, it may be possible to pay out game balls based on this unpaid payout ball number data even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the play area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the play area 5a.

In addition, in this embodiment, prize balls (prize value) are awarded based on the fulfillment of the awarding conditions (a game ball entering the winning slot, starting slot, or large winning slot), but the balls held by the player may be managed as data, and prize ball data may be awarded (added to the balls held data).

In addition, although there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect in this embodiment, multiple look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during a variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the top and/or bottom, and the zone image of the other look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the left and/or right. In this way, two look-ahead zone effects can be achieved at the same time, improving the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as a jackpot prediction effect, but instead of the blackout effect, a whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of the effect may be the same as that of the blackout effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the manner in which the variable presentation is executed is basically the same in the normal game state and the specific game state (high probability game state, time-limited game state), but, for example, it is possible to notify the player of first information (information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot, information regarding the execution of a special game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of a front-stage performance and a rear-stage performance in the normal game state (a case of a pre-reach performance and a reach performance, a case of a normal reach performance and a SP reach performance, a case of an SP reach performance and an SPSP reach performance, a case of a pre-reach performance and a performance pattern that is temporarily stopped, a case of a reach performance and a performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped, etc.), and to notify the player of second information different from the first information (additional information regarding a song that can be selected by operating the cross key 19, the status of mission completion, etc.) during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of a front-stage performance and a rear-stage performance in the specific game state. In addition, as a variable presentation consisting of an early presentation and a late presentation in the normal game state, a common late presentation may be executed after a first early presentation, or a common late presentation may be executed after a second early presentation different from the first early presentation, and information regarding the execution of a special game may be notified in the common late presentation executed when a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally have a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are some that execute a variable display of a special symbol according to the judgment result of the judgment information, and execute a variable presentation by a presentation symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol (for example, see JP 2018-118109 A). However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in the game presentation, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is low.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of a predetermined mode of the presentation pattern in the variable presentation (scrolling display after a pre-change action (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical change. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the display of the predetermined variation of the performance pattern begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the display of the predetermined variation of the performance pattern begins.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cycle variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol in a stopped state, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation symbol while executing the variable display of the special symbol, and after the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbol ends, a predetermined mode of variable display of the presentation symbol in the variable presentation (scrolling display after pre-variation action (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that controls the performance in response to a command from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cycle variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance symbol and a variable display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display (update variation) of the special symbol is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the variable display of the special pattern begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the variable display of the special pattern begins.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol and a variable display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display (update variation) of the special symbol is started after the first display change in the cyclical change has started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special symbol judgment information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means for storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means is equipped with a judgment means for executing a variable display of the special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, The special symbol is stopped and displayed after multiple cycle changes are performed as a display, and the performance control means can execute a performance of the special symbol while the special symbol is being displayed, and the reserved display (reserved icon or reserved number on the main display device 70, or LED reserved display on the first reserved display device 83 or the second reserved display device 84) can be displayed according to the reserved memory stored in the storage means, and the reserved display can be displayed reduced according to the reduction in the reserved memory, and the display of the reduction in the reserved display starts at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle change. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle change starts does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the display of the reduction in the reserved display starts, but it may also be that the timer interrupt of the main control board (4 ms) at which the cycle change starts is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the display of the reduction in the reserved display starts.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol determination information), a storage means for storing the determination information in which the determination has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is equipped with a variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol is stopped and displayed after multiple cycle changes as a display, and the performance control means can execute a performance change using the performance symbol while the special symbol is being displayed, and can display the reserved symbol (display of the reserved icon HI or reserved number on the main display device 70, or the reserved symbol on the first sub-reservation indicator 83 or the second sub-reservation indicator 84) according to the reserved memory stored in the storage means, and can display the reserved symbol in a decreasing manner according to the decrease in the reserved memory, and the display of the decreased reserved symbol begins after the first display change in the cyclic change has begun. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of additionally displaying a pending display (pending icon HI) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting and decreasing the pending display (changing to the icon TI) in response to a decrease in the pending memory, and the shift display of the pending display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical fluctuation. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, which starts the cycle fluctuation, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, which starts the shift display of the reserved display, but it may also be that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, which starts the cycle fluctuation, is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, which starts the shift display of the reserved display.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of additionally displaying a pending display (pending icon HI) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting and decreasing the pending display (changing to the icon TI) in response to a decrease in the pending memory, and the shift display of the pending display ends after the first cyclical fluctuation in the variable display of the special pattern ends. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of additionally displaying a pending display (pending icon HI) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting the pending display to display it as a corresponding display (the icon TI) in response to a decrease in the pending memory, and the shift display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical fluctuation. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, which starts the cycle fluctuation, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, which starts the shift display of the reserved display, but it may also be that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, which starts the cycle fluctuation, is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, which starts the shift display of the reserved display.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of additionally displaying a pending display (pending icon HI) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting the pending display to display it as a corresponding display (relevant icon TI) in response to a decrease in the pending memory, and the shift display ends after the first display change in the cyclical fluctuation has ended. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that controls the performance in response to a command from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cycle fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of audibly outputting a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) while executing the variable performance, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cycle variation begins, does not coincide with the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the specified game sound begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cycle variation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the specified game sound begins.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern during the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of audibly outputting a presentation BGM (variable BGM) during the execution of the variable presentation, and the audible output of the presentation BGM is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the performance BGM begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the performance BGM begins.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stopping and displaying the special pattern, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern during the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, and being capable of performing a presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of a background image displayed behind the presentation pattern, and the presentation operation of the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical variation (when the display of the variable standby screen after the power is turned on) . By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cycle variation begins, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the presentation operation of the background image begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cycle variation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the presentation operation of the background image begins.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special symbol judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol and then stopping and displaying the special symbol, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and being capable of performing a presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of a background image displayed behind the presentation symbol, and the presentation operation of the background image being performed before the first cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol starts (when the display of the variable standby screen after the power is turned on starts). By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and the presentation pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner (stopped display, temporary stopped display) at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical change. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic variation ends, does not coincide with the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the performance pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic variation ends, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the performance pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner.

◆A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation symbol while executing the variable display of the special symbol, and the presentation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the final cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that controls the performance according to a command from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cycle variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance symbol and a variable display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) during the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic variation ends, does not coincide with the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the special symbol is displayed in a frozen state. However, it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic variation ends, is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the special symbol is displayed in a frozen state.

◆An 18th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and wherein the pending display (pending icon HI) corresponding to the pending memory stored in the storage means is capable of performing a presentation operation (swinging operation, rotating operation) during the execution of the variable presentation, and the presentation operation of the pending display continues even after the end of the last cyclical fluctuation in the variable display of the special pattern. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A 19th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and is capable of displaying a corresponding display (the icon TI in question) corresponding to the judgment information for which the judgment has been executed, and disappearing the corresponding display at a predetermined timing, and the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends at a timing different from the end timing of the last cyclical fluctuation in the variable display of the special pattern. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cyclic variation ends does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends, but it may also be that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cyclic variation ends is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends.

◆A 20th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges judgment information (special pattern judgment information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and is capable of displaying a corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the judgment information for which the judgment has been executed, and of disappearing the corresponding display at a predetermined timing, and the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends after the last cyclical fluctuation in the variable display of the special pattern has ended. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation as a variable display of the special pattern multiple times and then stopping and displaying the special pattern, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern during the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, being capable of audibly outputting a predetermined game sound (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) during the execution of the variable presentation, and being capable of ending the audible output of the predetermined game sound that was started before the last cyclical variation in the variable display of the special pattern at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cycle variation ends, does not coincide with the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the specified game sound ends, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cycle variation ends, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the specified game sound ends.

◆A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol while executing the variable display of the special symbol, and is capable of audibly outputting a predetermined game sound (temporary stop sound, etc.) while executing the variable presentation, and is capable of ending the audible output of the predetermined game sound that was started before the last cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol before the cyclical change ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special symbol judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol and then displaying the special symbol in a stopped state, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and being capable of audibly outputting a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) during the execution of the variable presentation, and being capable of continuously audibly outputting the predetermined game sound even after the end of the last cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol (during the stopped display). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special symbol judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol and then displaying the special symbol in a stopped state, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, a background image displayed behind the presentation symbol being capable of performing a presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) during the execution of the variable presentation, and the presentation operation of the background image being continuously performed even after the end of the last cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol (during the stopped display). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 2 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the judgment information, and a variable performance is performed by a performance symbol during the variable display of the special symbol (for example, JP 2018-118109 A). However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the game performance and the game is not interesting.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation is performed by operating the presentation symbol in a predetermined manner. The present invention is characterized in that it includes a pre-stop action effect (for example, a display of a character shaking its head, shrinking → normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, bouncing (small) display, etc.) in which the character plays a pre-stop action effect, and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) in which the effect pattern stops after the pre-stop action effect, and it is possible to execute a winning confirmation effect (for example, rainbow light emission from the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the effect button light-emitting LED 17c, output of a success sound, display of a success image, vibration of the effect button 17, big win notification mode operation of the movable effect device, etc.) in which the character plays a pre-stop action effect (for example, a display of a character shaking its head, shrinking → normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, bouncing (small) display, etc.) in which the character plays a pre-stop action effect, and a stop display in which the effect pattern stops after the pre-stop action effect (for example, a completely stopped state) in which the character plays a pre-stop action effect, and the winning confirmation effect ends at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped, for example, a predetermined timing during the period in which the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped).
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player (e.g., special symbol determination information), and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a, special symbol TZ) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the presentation pattern is a first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) and the first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70b). and a second performance pattern (e.g., special pattern TZ) different from the pattern, and in a specific variable performance (e.g., a variable performance pattern that can be executed when a jackpot is determined) based on a determination result of executing the special game, the first performance pattern executes a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) after a pre-stop action performance (e.g., a display of a character shaking its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bouncing display, a rotating (small) display, a bouncing (small) display, etc.) that operates in a predetermined manner, and the second performance pattern executes a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) without executing the pre-stop action performance, and in the special game that is executed after the end of the variable performance, the second performance pattern is not displayed, and a pattern corresponding to the first performance pattern (e.g., only the number portion in performance pattern 70a) is displayed.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a, special symbol TZ) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the presentation pattern being a first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) and a second presentation pattern (e.g., special symbol TZ) different from the first presentation pattern. In a specific variable presentation (for example, a variable presentation pattern executable when a jackpot is determined) based on a result of a determination to execute the special game, the first presentation pattern performs a pre-stop action presentation (for example, a pattern promotion presentation, a revival presentation) that operates in a predetermined manner, thereby changing the first presentation pattern from a first mode (for example, the combination of presentation patterns 70a is "444", for example, the combination of presentation patterns 70a is "454") to a second mode (for example, the combination of presentation patterns 70a is "777"), and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) can be executed with the first presentation pattern of the second mode, and the second presentation pattern can perform a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) with a second presentation pattern corresponding to the first presentation pattern of the second mode without performing the pre-stop action presentation.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation being a pre-stop action presentation (e.g., a display in which a character shakes its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bounding display, a rotating the display mode includes a pre-stop action effect, a stop effect (e.g., a completely stopped state) for stopping the effect pattern, and is capable of displaying a changing icon (e.g., the icon TI) corresponding to the changing effect being executed, and the changing icon can execute a changing icon suggestion effect (e.g., an icon change effect) suggesting the possibility of the special game being executed by a first display mode (e.g., a white icon) and a second display mode (e.g., a blue icon) different from the first display mode, and when the display is performed in the first display mode, a predetermined disappearance effect (e.g., the icon disappearance effect) is performed when the stop display is performed to make the changing icon invisible, and when the display is performed in the second display mode, the predetermined disappearance effect is performed when the stop display is performed to make the changing icon invisible.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆ A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (e.g., special symbol determination information), and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, the presentation symbol including a first presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a) and a second presentation symbol (e.g., special symbol TZ) different from the first presentation symbol, and the The first performance pattern executes a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) after performing a pre-stop action display (for example, a display of a character shaking its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bouncing display, a rotating (small) display, a bouncing (small) display, etc.) that operates in a predetermined manner, and the second performance pattern executes a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) without performing the pre-stop action display, and is capable of displaying a changing icon (for example, the icon TI) corresponding to the changing performance being performed, and the changing icon becomes invisible without performing a predetermined disappearance display (for example, the icon disappearance display) when the first performance pattern is displayed as stopped in the changing performance based on the determination result that the special game is to be performed, but becomes invisible after performing the predetermined disappearance display when the first performance pattern is displayed as stopped in the changing performance based on the determination result that the special game is not to be performed.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (e.g., special symbol determination information), and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a, special symbol TZ) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, the presentation pattern includes a first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) and a second presentation pattern (e.g., special symbol TZ) different from the first presentation pattern, and the The first performance pattern executes a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) after executing a pre-stop action display (for example, a display of a character shaking its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bouncing display, a rotating (small) display, a bouncing (small) display, etc.) that operates in a predetermined manner, and the second performance pattern executes a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) without executing the pre-stop action display, and is capable of displaying a changing icon (for example, the icon TI) corresponding to the changing performance being executed, and the changing icon becomes invisible without executing a predetermined disappearance display (for example, the icon disappearance display) when the second performance pattern is stopped in the changing performance based on the determination result that the special game is to be executed, but becomes invisible after executing the predetermined disappearance display when the second performance pattern is stopped in the changing performance based on the determination result that the special game is not to be executed.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆ A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation being a pre-stop operation performance for operating the presentation symbol in a predetermined manner. The variation effect includes a first appearance (e.g., a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a in a deciding performance), and a stop display that stops the performance pattern after the pre-stop action effect (e.g., a completely stopped state), and the performance pattern can execute the variation effect in a first appearance (e.g., performance pattern 70a with only the number portion) and a second appearance (e.g., performance pattern 70a with a character) different from the first appearance, and in a first variation effect (e.g., a miss SPSP reach variation effect) based on a determination result that the special game will not be executed, the pre-stop action effect is executed in the first appearance and the stop display is executed in the second appearance, but in a second variation effect (e.g., a jackpot SPSP reach variation effect) based on a determination result that the special game will be executed, the pre-stop action effect and the stop display are executed in the first appearance.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation being a pre-stop action presentation (e.g., presentation symbol The special game includes a pre-stop action display, a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a (in a deciding performance), and a stop display that stops the performance pattern (for example, a completely stopped state) after the pre-stop action display, and the performance pattern can execute the variable performance in a first state (for example, performance pattern 70a having only the number portion) and a second state (for example, performance pattern 70a with a character) different from the first state, and in a first variable performance (for example, a miss normal reach variable performance) based on a determination result that the special game will not be executed, the pre-stop action display and the stop display are executed in the second state, but in a second variable performance (for example, a miss SPSP reach variable performance) based on a determination result that the special game will not be executed, the pre-stop action display (for example, a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a (in a deciding performance)) is executed in the first state and the stop display is executed in the second state.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation being a pre-stop action presentation (e.g., a display in which a character shakes its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bouncing display) which causes the presentation symbol to operate in a predetermined manner, 119)を表示する操作表示，并在过点显著的图形的表达中，过点显著的图形的表达可能，并在 ...发生。 119 is characterized in that the display includes a predetermined background image (for example, the normal background image in FIG. 119) which displays an operation during the execution of the variable performance, and a specific performance (for example, an SP reach, an SPSP reach) which makes the predetermined background image difficult to see, and when the predetermined background image is to be viewed again in response to the end of the specific performance, the predetermined background image is not to be viewed from the predetermined background image at the time when it became difficult to see (for example, the normal background image displayed at the timing of T2 in FIG. 119), but from the predetermined background image at the time when the specific performance expires (for example, the normal background image corresponding to the update value at the timing of T8 in FIG. 119, the normal background image expanded to layer N+1 at the timing of T8 in FIG. 119).
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation being a pre-stop action presentation (e.g., a display of a character shaking its head, a shrinking → The display includes a normal display, a rotating display, a bound display, a rotating (small) display, a bound (small) display, etc.), and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) that stops the performance pattern after the pre-stop action performance, and in a specific variable performance based on the determination result that the special game will be executed, after the execution of a specific performance (for example, an SP reach, SPSP reach) has been notified that the special game will be executed and before the stop display is executed, a related performance (for example, display of an afterglow image) related to the specific performance is executed, and during the execution of the related performance, the performance pattern is not displayed in a manner that notifies that the special game will be executed (for example, the performance pattern 70a is not displayed at all), and after the execution of the related performance, the performance pattern is displayed in a manner that notifies that the special game will be executed (for example, the performance pattern 70a is displayed as "777").
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance related to the game, and executes a suggestion performance that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means during an effective period in which a promotion performance that encourages the operation of the operation means is executed (for example, JP 2017-158774 A). However, since the effective period is set for a predetermined time, the operation timing of the player varies, and there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest of the performance.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causes the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation in the variable presentation is performed at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change. The display of the performance pattern starts, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) that stops the performance pattern is executed, and the performance pattern can be oscillated (for example, T3 to T4 in FIG. 123) in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in a final performance). The number of cycle changes performed during the execution of the oscillating display when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 123) during the predetermined operation effective period is different from the number of cycle changes performed during the execution of the oscillating display when the operation means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 123) different from the first timing during the predetermined operation effective period, but the number of cycle changes from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T2 in FIG. 123) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in FIG. 123) is the same regardless of which timing the operation means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73) that can be moved between a waiting position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., special chart determination information The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclic variation, and the display control ... After the start, a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and the movable body can be operated in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined operation effective period (e.g., a 4-second effective period in the final performance) (e.g., the operation of the final performance in FIG. 60 ), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the operation of the movable body (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124 ) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124 ) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124 ) during the predetermined operation effective period is 124) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the operation of the movable body (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period, but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the specified operation effective period (e.g., T2 in FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in Figure 60) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in Figure 60), in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., special chart judgment information), The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change a number of times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops displaying the special pattern (e.g., a completely stopped state). The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change, and after the start, It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) that stops the performance pattern, and to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in the final performance) (for example, the operation of the final performance in FIG. 60), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the return of the movable body to the standby position (for example, T3-1 in case 1 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124) during the predetermined operation effective period, and The number of cycle fluctuations from the return of the movable body to the standby position (e.g., T3-1 in case 2 of FIG. 124) to the display of the stopped performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 124) is different when the operating means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period, but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the specified operation effective period (e.g., T2 in FIG. 124) to the display of the stopped performance pattern (e.g., T6 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73) that can be moved between a waiting position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., special chart determination information The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change a number of times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops the display of the special pattern (e.g., a completely stopped state). The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change, After the start, a stop display that stops the performance pattern (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed, and the movable body can be operated in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined effective operation period (e.g., a 4-second effective period in a deciding performance) (e.g., the operation of the deciding performance in FIG. 60), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the operation of the movable body (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124) during the predetermined effective operation period and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of operation of the movable body (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period is different, but the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of operation of the movable body (e.g., T3 in FIG. 124) to the return to the standby position (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and vibration means (e.g., button drive device 17b) capable of a predetermined vibration, in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special chart determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a control means (e.g., control circuit 120) for determining whether or not to execute the special game. and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to a result of the determination, the variable display means performs a cyclical change a number of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., a completely stopped state), the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change, and after the start, a stop control means for stopping the performance pattern is provided. It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state), and vibrate the vibration means in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in a deciding performance) (for example, T3 to T3-1 in FIG. 125), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of vibration of the vibration means (for example, T3 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) during the predetermined operation effective period to the time when the stop display of the performance pattern is performed (for example, T6 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of vibration of the vibration means (for example, T3 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) to the time when the stop display of the performance pattern is performed (for example, T6 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) when the operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) during the predetermined operation effective period, and The number of cycle fluctuations from when the vibration means starts vibrating (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 125) to when the performance pattern is displayed stopped (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 125) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations when the vibration means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 125) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period, but the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from when the vibration means starts vibrating (e.g., T3 in FIG. 125) to when the vibration ends (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 125) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a vibration means (e.g., button drive device 17b) capable of a predetermined vibration, the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs a cyclical variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causes the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the first cycle variation The display of the performance pattern in the variable performance starts at a timing different from the start timing of the variable performance, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and the vibration means vibrates at a first timing of the variable performance (for example, T7 in FIG. 126, for example, T3 in FIG. 126) and at a second timing of the variable performance that is later than the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 126 vs. T3 in FIG. 126, for example, T7 in FIG. 126 vs. T7 in FIG. 127, for example, T3 in FIG. 126 vs. T7 in FIG. 127), and the number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start of vibration at the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 126) to the end of vibration (for example, T9-1 in FIG. 126) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start of vibration at the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 127) to the end of vibration (for example, T8-1 in FIG. 127).
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and light-emitting means (e.g., frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, presentation button light-emitting LED 17c) that can emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode (e.g., rainbow light emission), in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., special chart judgment information), The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change, and the start of the variable display ... After that, a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting state in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined effective operation period (e.g., a 4-second effective period in a deciding performance) (e.g., T3 in FIG. 128 ), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of emission of the predetermined light-emitting state (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 128 ) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 128 ) during the predetermined effective operation period to the time when the stop display of the performance pattern is performed (e.g., T6 in case 1 of FIG. 128 ) and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of light emission of the specified light-emitting mode (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 128) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 128) when the operating means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 128) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period is different, but the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of light emission of the specified light-emitting mode (e.g., T3 in FIG. 128) to the end of light emission (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 128) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a sound output means (e.g., sound output device 9) that can output a specific sound (e.g., success sound), in which the main control means is a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special chart determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. ), and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., a completely stopped state), the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle fluctuation, and after the start, the performance pattern is stopped. It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) that stops the reel, and to output the specific sound from the sound output means in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in a final performance) (for example, T3 in FIG. 129 ), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of output of the specific sound (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 129 ) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 129 ) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 129 ) during the predetermined operation effective period, and The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of output of the specific sound (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 129) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 129) is different when the operating means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 129) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period, but the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of output of the specific sound (e.g., T3 in FIG. 129) to the end of output (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 129) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means controls a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable control means for executing a variable display of special symbols in response to the result of the determination. and a display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61), the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle fluctuation, and after the start, a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and a predetermined operation effective period In response to the operation of the operation means during the predetermined operation effective period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a deciding performance), the result of the judgment is notified (for example, T3 in FIG. 130), and a specific image (for example, a switching image displayed from T3-1 in FIG. 130) can be displayed after the notification, and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) during the predetermined operation effective period and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) when the operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) during the predetermined operation effective period are calculated based on the number of cycle fluctuations. The number of cycle variations from the start of the notification (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (e.g., T3-1 in case 2 of FIG. 130) when the operating means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 130) different from the first timing in a certain effective operation period is different, but the number of cycle variations from the start of the certain effective operation period (e.g., T2 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 130) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination. (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61), the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., in a completely stopped state), the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclic fluctuation, and after the start, a stop display is executed to stop the performance pattern (e.g., in a completely stopped state), The result of the judgment is notified (for example, T3 in FIG. 130) in response to the operation of the operation means during a certain effective operation period (for example, a 4-second effective period in a deciding performance), and a specific image (for example, a switching image displayed from T3-1 in FIG. 130) can be displayed after the notification, and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) during the certain effective operation period, and The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (e.g., T3-1 in case 2 of FIG. 130) when the operation means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 130) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period is different, but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the display of the specific image (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 130) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in FIG. 130) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining a variable display pattern (e.g., the special symbol variable pattern of FIG. 9) relating to the variable display in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causing the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means being equipped with a variable display pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. 132)と、发生产品132的第1特点 ...
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display means (e.g., special symbol displays 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining a variable display pattern (e.g., special symbol variable pattern in FIG. 9) relating to the variable display in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causing the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means being equipped with a variable display means for determining a variable display pattern in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In response to the above, a variable performance can be executed by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a), and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle variation, and after the start, a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and a specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance) can be executed in a specific variable display pattern (e.g., special chart variable pattern 04 in FIG. 9, special chart variable pattern 09 in FIG. 9) among the variable display patterns, and as the specific performance, either a first specific performance (e.g., typhoon reach in FIG. 132) or a second specific performance (e.g., heavy snow reach in FIG. 132) different from the first specific performance can be executed, and the first specific performance and the second specific performance have different performance contents (the performance contents are different between the typhoon reach and the heavy snow reach), but the number of cycle variations executed after the start of the specific performance (e.g., T5 to T8 in FIG. 132) is the same.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., a presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., a main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable table control means (e.g., a variable table control unit) for performing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination. and a display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61), in which the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causes the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclic fluctuation, and after the start, a stop display (e.g., in a completely stopped state) that stops the performance pattern is performed. and is capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a dialogue preview performance) suggesting the possibility of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (e.g., a valid period of 3 seconds for a dialogue preview), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of execution of the suggestive performance (e.g., T4 in case 1 of FIG. 133) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T8 in case 1 of FIG. 133) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (e.g., T2 in case 1 of FIG. 133) during the predetermined operation effective period, and The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the execution of the suggestive performance (e.g., T4 in case 2 of Figure 133) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T8 in case 2 of Figure 133) when the operating means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T2 in case 2 of Figure 133) different from the first timing in the period is different, but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the specified operation effective period (e.g., T2 in Figure 133) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T8 in Figure 133) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) operable by a player, the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs a cyclical change a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causes the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation is performed at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change. A display of the variation of the performance pattern in the performance is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and a first operation performance (for example, an operation performance in a dialogue preview) that causes the operation means to be operated and a second operation performance (for example, an operation performance in a deciding performance) that is an operation performance different from the first operation performance and causes the operation means to be operated can be executed. A first suggestion performance (for example, display of a fade-in image for the dialogue preview in FIG. 134) that suggests that the first operation performance will be executed when the first operation performance is executed, and a second suggestion performance (for example, display of a fade-in image for the deciding performance in FIG. 134) that suggests that the second operation performance will be executed when the second operation performance is executed, are executable, and the number of cycle variations performed during the execution of the first suggestion performance (for example, T1-1 to T2 in FIG. 134) is different from the number of cycle variations performed during the execution of the second suggestion performance (for example, T5 to T6 in FIG. 134).
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means comprises a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for performing a variable display of special symbols in response to the result of the determination. The variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (for example, performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle fluctuation, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance pattern (for example, in a completely stopped state) is executed, and the operation means is operated during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a deciding performance). A suggestion effect (e.g., a meter effect) can be executed which suggests the possibility of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means in a first operation mode (e.g., operating the effect button 17 five times), and the suggestion effect includes a first suggestion effect (e.g., meter pattern 1) which suggests the possibility of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means in a second operation mode (e.g., operating the effect button 17 once) different from the first operation mode (e.g., operating the effect button 17 once), and a second suggestion effect (e.g., meter pattern 2) which suggests the possibility of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means in a second operation mode (e.g., operating the effect button 17 once) different from the first operation mode. The number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, T2 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135) until the possibility of the special game being executed is suggested (for example, T5 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, T2 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135) until the possibility of the special game being executed is suggested (for example, T5 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135), but the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect (for example, T2 of FIG. 135) until the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T8 of FIG. 135) is the same.
This can increase the entertainment value of the performance.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, various presentation means are provided on the game board, and the presentation means are used to increase the interest in the game. Some of these presentation means are provided with movable presentation means (so-called gimmicks), and the movable presentation means is operated in a predetermined operation mode (so-called presentation operation). The movable presentation means is configured to perform an operation check (so-called initial operation) to operate in the same mode or substantially the same mode as the above-mentioned predetermined operation mode, for example, when the power is turned on. The operation check is performed when the power is turned on even when the player is playing the game (for example, during a variable display) (for example, JP 2013-236681 A). However, when the operation check is performed during a variable display, some players may mistake the operation check for a presentation operation, resulting in a decrease in the interest in the game.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a performance control means (e.g., performance control board 130) for controlling the performance in response to a command from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable performance device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a performance position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), the main control means is a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display device 60, 61) for performing a variable display of a special pattern according to the result of the determination. and the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and is capable of executing a performance operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) during the execution of the variable display, while, when power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and power is supplied thereafter, is capable of executing an initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the performance operation of the movable body is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the initial operation of the movable body.
This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in gaming machines equipped with movable presentation means.

◇A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), in which the main control means is equipped with determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player, and variable display means (e.g., special symbol displays 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to a result of the determination, and the variable display means is configured to perform a variable display of the special symbol and and then performs cyclic fluctuations a plurality of times before causing the special symbol to stop being displayed (for example, in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and while the variable display is being executed, a performance operation (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) by the movable body can be executed, while, when power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and power is subsequently supplied, an initial operation (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) by the movable body can be executed during the execution of the variable display executed after the power supply, and the number of cyclic fluctuations performed before the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position in the performance operation of the movable body is different from the number of cyclic fluctuations performed before the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position in the initial operation of the movable body.
This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in gaming machines equipped with movable presentation means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine having a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), the main control means has a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display device 60, 61) for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state) after a cyclic change is performed multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and a performance operation (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) by the movable body can be executed during the execution of the variable display, while when power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and power is subsequently supplied, an initial operation (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) by the movable body can be executed during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and the number of cyclic changes performed when the movable body is in the performance position during the performance operation of the movable body is different from the number of cyclic changes performed when the movable body is in the performance position during the initial operation of the movable body.
This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in gaming machines equipped with movable presentation means.

◆ A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, for example) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "D" in FIG. 61, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, for example, "E" in FIG. 61, for example, "G" in FIG. 62). , a second movable performance device 75, for example, a sub display device 71), the main control means includes a determination means (for example, a main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big win game) advantageous to a player (for example, special symbol determination information), and a variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means performs a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state), The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of executing a performance action by the movable body during the execution of the variable display (e.g., FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 61, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62), while when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and the power supply is thereafter resumed, the initial action by the movable body during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply (e.g., FIG. 59, for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 61, for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 62, (c)), the movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., a second movable performance device 75) and a second movable body (e.g., a first movable performance device 73, e.g., a sub-display device 71) different from the first movable body, and the first movable body has the same number of cycle variations during the execution of the performance action and the same number of cycle variations during the execution of the initial action, while the second movable body has a different number of cycle variations during the execution of the performance action and the initial action.
This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in gaming machines equipped with movable presentation means.

◆ A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub-display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), in which the main control means controls a special game (e.g., a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player. The game device includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a game (play or play), a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining a variable display pattern (e.g., special symbol variable pattern of FIG. 9) relating to the variable display according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs a cyclical variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causes the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means controls the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state) according to the result of the determination. A variable performance can be performed by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of another pattern, and a performance action (e.g., FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) can be performed by the movable body during the execution of the variable display, while when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and then power is supplied, an initial action (e.g., FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) can be performed by the movable body during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and when the power supply is supplied, a predetermined supply time image (e.g., "Restoring") can be displayed on the display means (e.g., main display device 70), In the presentation operation of a moving body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the presentation position is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the presentation position during the initial operation of the movable body, and when power supply is stopped at a predetermined timing (e.g., T0 in Figure 137) during the execution of the variable display according to a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., special chart variable pattern 01), and then power is supplied (e.g., T1 in Figure 137) to execute the initial operation, the display of the predetermined supply time image has already ended when the initial operation is terminated (e.g., T9 in Figure 137).
This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in gaming machines equipped with movable presentation means.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub-display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), in which the main control means controls a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. The present invention is provided with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special symbol determination process, a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining a variable display pattern (e.g., special symbol variable pattern of FIG. 9) relating to the variable display according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causes the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means controls the variable display of ... A variable performance can be performed by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the display, and a performance operation by the movable body (e.g., FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) can be performed during the execution of the variable display, while, when power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and power is subsequently supplied, an initial operation by the movable body (e.g., FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) can be performed during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and when the power supply is supplied, a predetermined supply time image (e.g., "Restoring") can be displayed on a display means (e.g., main display device 70), and during the performance operation of the movable body The number of cycle variations that occur when the movable body is in the performance position is different from the number of cycle variations that occur during the initial operation of the movable body when the movable body is in the performance position, and when power supply is stopped at a predetermined timing (e.g., T0 in Figure 138) during the execution of the variable display according to a specific variable display pattern (e.g., special chart variable pattern 05, e.g., special chart variable pattern 08), and then power is supplied (e.g., T1 in Figure 138) to execute the initial operation, when the initial operation is terminated (e.g., T7 in Figure 138), the display of the predetermined supply time image is still continuing.
This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in gaming machines equipped with movable presentation means.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to a command from the main control means. Some of these gaming machines are designed to execute the variable display of the special symbol according to the judgment result of the judgment information, and to output a performance sound from a sound output unit during the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, there are some gaming machines that allow the volume value of the performance sound to be set to a predetermined setting value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by a player (for example, see JP 2018-043025 A). However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in the game performance, and there is a problem that the game is less interesting.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output section (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the special symbol is displayed, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and can audibly output a predetermined sound (variable BGM such as normal BGM, sound effects, etc.) from the sound output unit while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. When the cycle variation of the special symbol starts from a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but when the audible output of the predetermined sound starts in response to the start of the cycle variation, there is a restriction on the setting of the volume value (restriction on the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the rear layer of the performance symbol, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the variable performance.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output unit (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means is equipped with a judgment means for executing a variable display of the special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, The special symbol is stopped and displayed after performing cycle fluctuations multiple times, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and can execute a variable performance in which the variable display of the performance symbol and the variable display of the special symbol are performed in response to the execution of the cycle fluctuation. When the cycle fluctuation starts from a customer waiting state, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but when the variable display of the special symbol starts in response to the start of the cycle fluctuation, there is a restriction on the setting of the volume value (restriction on the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the layer behind the performance symbol, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long a period as possible for the player to adjust the volume, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the variable performance even if the volume has been adjusted.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output unit (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the variable display means is equipped with a cyclical variation as a variable display of the special symbol. After several times, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and can increase (addition display, increase in number, etc.) the reserved information (reserved icon, number reserved, reserved LED) in response to an increase in the reserved memory, and can decrease (shift display, decrease in number, etc.) the reserved information in response to a decrease in the reserved memory. When the cycle fluctuation starts from the waiting state, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but when the reserved information is decreased in response to the start of the cycle fluctuation, there is a restriction on the setting of the volume value (restriction on the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the rear layer of the performance pattern, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long a period as possible for the player to adjust the volume, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to make the player aware of the decrease in the number of reserved items even if the volume is adjusted.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output unit (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means displays a cycle variable as a variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol is stopped and displayed after performing this multiple times, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and can audibly output a predetermined sound (changing BGM, sound effects, etc.) from the sound output unit while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. When the cycle variation starts from a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but when the audible output of the predetermined sound starts in response to the start of the cycle variation, there is a restriction on the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the layer behind the performance symbol, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long a period as possible for the player to adjust the volume, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. It is also possible to reduce the control load at the start of the audible output of the predetermined sound.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output section (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination. , the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and can execute a variable performance that displays a variable performance pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the variable display of the performance pattern is stopped in response to the stop of the cyclic fluctuation, restrictions are imposed on the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the layer behind the performance pattern, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long a period as possible during which the player can adjust the volume, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware of the stopped display of the performance pattern or special pattern (the variable performance has ended).

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output unit (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means controls a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable control means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination. The game device includes a display means, and the variable display means performs a cycle of variable display of the special symbol multiple times and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and can display an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the execution display is erased in response to the end of the cycle of variation, restrictions are imposed on the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the layer behind the performance symbol, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware that the execution display (the icon) has been erased, that is, that the variable performance has ended.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to a command from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are some that execute a variable display of a special symbol according to the judgment result of the judgment information, execute a variable performance during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and output a performance sound (for example, see JP 2018-043025 A). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the progress of the performance stagnates, and there is a problem that the interest of the game may decrease.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is equipped with a variable presentation for executing a variable display of a presentation symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute the program, and sound effects (variable BGM such as normal BGM, sound effects, etc.) can be output during the execution of the variable performance. If the stop condition is not met at the specified timing when the performance symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance symbol and the output period of the performance sound are extended, and if the performance sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol, the performance sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the performance sound is extended even in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means controls the variable display of the presentation symbol and the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and a variable sound (variable background music) can be output during the variable display of the special symbol. If the stop condition is not met at a predetermined timing when the special symbol is variable (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the variable period of the special symbol and the output period of the variable sound are extended, and if the variable sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, the variable sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the variable sound is extended even in a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation for performing a variable display of a presentation symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. During the execution of the variable performance, a specific sound (zone BGM, big win warning sound, etc.) that makes the player expect the special game to be executed can be output, and if the stop condition is not met at a predetermined timing when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance pattern and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, the specific sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the specific sound is extended even in a state where the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means being equipped with a variable display means for executing a variable display of a presentation symbol and a variable display of a special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a special sound (such as a zone background music or a big win warning sound) that makes the player expect the special game to be executed while the special symbol is being displayed and changing, and if the stop condition is not met at a predetermined timing when the special symbol is being displayed and the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the special symbol change period and the output period of the special sound are extended, and if the special sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the special symbol change period, the special sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the special sound is extended even when the special symbol change display is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect during the extension of the special symbol change period, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means controls a presentation pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable performance, and during the execution of the variable performance, a predetermined notification performance (such as a confirmed performance) based on the result of the judgment can be executed. If the stop condition is not met at the predetermined timing when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance pattern is extended, and the predetermined notification performance will not start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, but the predetermined notification performance that started before the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern can be continued during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is equipped with a variable display means for executing a variable display of a presentation symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable presentation in which the display and the special pattern are displayed, and a predetermined notification presentation (such as a confirmation presentation) based on the result of the judgment can be executed while the special pattern is being displayed and changed. If the stop condition is not met at the predetermined timing when the special pattern is being displayed and changed (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the period during which the special pattern is changed is extended, and the predetermined notification presentation will not be started during the extension of the special pattern's period of change, but the predetermined notification presentation that was started before the extension of the special pattern's period of change can be executed during the extension of the special pattern's period of change. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from decreasing during the extension of the special pattern's period of change, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means. In such gaming machines, the variable display of the special symbols is executed in response to the judgment result of the judgment information, and the variable presentation is executed. In addition, the variable display of the special symbols is displayed as a reserved display corresponding to the judgment information that has not been executed, and the execution display is displayed in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols (for example, see JP 2018-043025 A). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest of the game is low.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means that stores judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means is equipped with a judgment means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, It is possible to display the number of reserved displays (reserved icons, etc.) according to the memory, to execute a variable display of the display pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, to execute the motion display (rotation, swing) of the reserved display during the execution of the variable display, to execute a specific display (start effect display, mode change display SP reach display, eye-catching display, etc.) that hides the reserved display during the execution of the variable display, and when the reserved display is displayed in response to the end of the specific display, it is possible to display the motion from a predetermined motion state (initial position, a position in which the motion display would have continued during the specific display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the reserved display (reserved icon), and it is also possible to make the player feel less uncomfortable when redisplaying the reserved display, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means being equipped with a judgment means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, It is possible to display an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, to execute a variable display of the performance symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, to execute a motion display (rotation, swing) of the execution display during the variable display, to execute a specific performance (mode change performance, SPSP development performance, successful decision performance, eye-catching performance, etc.) that hides the execution display during the variable performance, and when the execution display is displayed in response to the end of the specific performance, it is possible to display the operation from a predetermined motion state (initial position, a position in which the motion display would have continued during the specific performance). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the execution display (the icon), and it is also possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player when redisplaying the execution display, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, the presentation control means being capable of displaying a number of reserved displays (reserved icons, etc.) in accordance with the reserved memory, and being capable of controlling the variable display of the special symbol. The reserved display whose dynamic display has started can be displayed as an execution display (the icon, etc.), a variable display in which the display pattern is changed in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern can be executed, the action display (rotation, swing) of the reserved display and the execution display can be executed during the execution of the variable display, a specific display (mode change display, SPSP development display, SPSP reach display, successful decision display, eye-catching display, etc.) that hides the reserved display and the execution display can be executed during the execution of the variable display, and when the reserved display and the execution display are displayed in response to the end of the specific display, the action display can be displayed from a predetermined action state (initial position, a position in which the action display would have continued during the specific display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the reserved display (reserved icon), and it is also possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that is given to the player when redisplaying the reserved display, thereby improving the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start port), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, and the presentation control means being equipped with a judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start port), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, It is possible to display a number of reserved displays (reserved icons, etc.) according to the memory, and to execute a change performance in which the reserved display is changed to a special mode (white) different from the normal mode (white) based on the result of the pre-determination, and a change performance in which a change display of a performance pattern is executed in response to the execution of the change display of the special pattern, and an action display (rotation, swing) in which the reserved display is repeatedly changed between a first state (initial position) and a second state (changed position) during the execution of the change performance can be executed, and when the reserved display in the normal mode is changed to the special mode when it is in the second state, the reserved display changed to the special mode can be displayed in action from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved display (reserved icon). In addition, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when changing the display mode of the reserved display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means being equipped with a judgment means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory when the variable display of the special symbol starts. In response to the command, an execution display (such as the icon) can be displayed, a change effect can be executed in which the execution display is changed to a special mode (such as a flashing white, blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.) different from the normal mode (white), a change effect can be executed in which the effect pattern is changed in response to the execution of the change display of the special pattern, and an action display (rotation, swing) can be executed in which the execution display is repeatedly changed between a first state (initial position) and a second state (changed position) during the execution of the change effect, and when the execution display in the normal mode is changed to the second state and is changed to the special mode, the execution display changed to the special mode is displayed in action from the first state. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when the display mode of the execution display is changed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start port), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, and the presentation control means being capable of displaying a number of reserved displays (reserved icons, etc.) corresponding to the reserved memory. Based on the result of the advance determination, a change performance can be executed in which the reserved display is changed to a special mode (flashing white, blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.) different from the normal mode (white), a change performance can be executed in which a change display of a performance pattern is changed in response to the execution of a change display of the special pattern, and an action display (rotation, swing) can be executed in which the reserved display is repeatedly changed between a first state (initial position) and a second state (changed position) during the execution of the change performance, and the special mode includes a first special mode (flashing white, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.), and when the reserved display of the first special mode is changed to the second special mode when it is in the second state, the reserved display changed to the second special mode can be displayed in action from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved display (reserved icon). In addition, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when changing the display mode of the reserved display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start port), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, the presentation control means being capable of displaying an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the execution It is possible to execute a change performance in which the row display is changed to a special mode (white flashing, blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.) different from the normal mode (white), and a change performance in which the display of the performance pattern is changed in response to the execution of the change display of the special pattern can be executed, and an action display (rotation, swing) in which the execution display is repeatedly changed between a first state (initial position) and a second state (changed position) during the execution of the change performance can be executed, and the special mode includes a first special mode (white flashing, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.), and when the execution display of the first special mode is changed to the second special mode when it is in the second state, it is possible to display the execution display changed to the second special mode from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when changing the display mode of the execution display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 8 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to a command from the main control means. In such gaming machines, the variable display of the special symbol is executed according to the judgment result of the judgment information, and the variable performance is executed. In addition, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the machine is in a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, the customer waiting performance is executed (for example, see JP 2018-043025 A). However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in the performance when the variable performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting performance, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is low.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a display means displays a variable display of a plurality of presentation symbols and a variable display of a plurality of special symbols in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the variable presentation, a display means is provided with a display means for displaying a variable display of a plurality of special symbols and a variable display of a plurality of special symbols. The effect pattern can be displayed in a variable manner after a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) is performed, and a customer waiting effect can be executed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state. The variable effect starts when the multiple effect patterns and the multiple special patterns have the same display number, and ends when the multiple effect patterns and the multiple special patterns have the same display number. When the variable effect starts during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image is faded out, and the multiple effect patterns and the multiple special patterns are displayed so that they are visible while the specific image is faded out, but the time until the multiple effect patterns are displayed in a variable manner is longer than the time until the multiple special patterns are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special pattern has started by the special pattern while confirming the stop number of the previous variable effect. In addition, the effect of the effect pattern can be improved at the start of the variation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is equipped with a display means for displaying the variable display of the presentation symbol and the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable performance in which the special pattern is displayed after the performance pattern performs a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) in the variable performance, and the performance pattern is displayed after the performance pattern performs a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.), and it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state, and when the variable performance starts during the customer waiting performance, it is possible to fade out the specific image, and the special pattern starts to be displayed before the specific image fades out, and the performance pattern starts to be displayed (scrolling, pattern update) after the specific image fades out. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the special pattern has started to display the variable display by the special pattern while checking the stop result of the previous variable performance. In addition, the performance effect at the start of the variation can be improved by the performance pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means being equipped with a reserved display (reserved icon) in response to an increase in the reserved memory. It is possible to display additional symbols (such as a symbol, a con, etc.) and to reduce the reserved display in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, and to execute a variable display in which the display means displays a variable display of the performance symbol and a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and to execute a customer waiting display in which the display means displays a specific image (a customer waiting demo image) during a customer waiting state, and when the variable display is started during the execution of the customer waiting display, it is possible to fade out the specific image, and the variable display of the special symbol is started before the fade-out of the specific image ends, and the reduction display of the reserved display is ended after the fade-out of the specific image ends. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started, while accurately recognizing that the reserved memory has been reduced, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means being equipped with a reserve display (reserved icon, etc.) for displaying additional reserved displays in response to an increase in the reserved memory. The reserved display can be displayed in a decreasing manner in response to the decrease in the reserved memory, a variable display can be executed in which the display means displays the variable display of the performance pattern and the variable display of the special pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, a customer waiting display can be executed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state, and when the variable display is started during the execution of the customer waiting display, the specific image can be faded out, the variable display of the special pattern is started before the end of the fade-out of the specific image, the reserved display is displayed visibly while the fade-out of the specific image is finished, and the decreasing display is finished after the fade-out is finished. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special pattern has started, while accurately recognizing that the reserved memory has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means for additionally displaying a reserved display (reserved icon, etc.) in response to an increase in the reserved memory, and for reducing the reserved display in response to a decrease in the reserved memory. The display can be reduced, a variable performance can be performed in which the display means displays the variable performance pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, the performance pattern can be displayed after the performance pattern is caused to perform a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) in the variable performance, a customer waiting performance can be performed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state, the specific image can be faded out when the variable performance is started during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the reserved display starts to be reduced before the fade-out of the specific image ends, and the performance pattern starts to be displayed (scrolling, updating of the pattern) after the fade-out of the specific image ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has been reduced before the performance pattern starts to display the variable performance, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and improving the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means for additionally displaying a reserved display (reserved icon, etc.) in response to an increase in the reserved memory, and for reducing the reserved display in response to a decrease in the reserved memory. The display can be reduced, a variable performance can be performed in which the display means displays the variable performance pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, the performance pattern can be displayed after the performance pattern is caused to perform a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) in the variable performance, a customer waiting performance can be performed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state, the specific image can be faded out when the variable performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the reduction display of the reserved display ends after the fade-out of the specific image ends, and the variable display of the performance pattern (scrolling, pattern update) starts after the reduction display of the reserved display ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the reserved memory decrease before the performance pattern starts to display the variable performance, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and improving the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and is capable of displaying the variable display of the special symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In response to the execution of the variable performance, the display means can perform a variable performance display of the performance pattern, and the performance pattern can be displayed after the performance pattern performs a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) in the variable performance. A customer waiting performance can be performed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state. When the variable performance starts during the customer waiting performance, the specific image can be faded out. The display of the execution display is completed after the fade-out of the specific image is completed, and the variable display (scrolling, updating of the pattern) of the performance pattern starts after the display of the execution display is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to display the variable performance, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and improving the interest of the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means is The special symbol is displayed in a static manner after multiple cycle variations as a dynamic display, and the performance control means can execute a variation performance in which the display means displays a variation of the performance symbol in response to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and can execute a customer waiting performance in which the display means displays a specific image (customer waiting demo image) during a customer waiting state, and when the variation performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the specific image can be faded out, and the display change in the cycle variation is performed multiple times before the fade-out of the specific image ends. Therefore, the customer waiting demo performance can be ended in a natural flow while the player is made aware that the variation display of the special symbol has started, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls the presentation in response to commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting port), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable display of a presentation pattern on a display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation that displays a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during a customer waiting state, and when the variable presentation starts during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, the specific image is faded out and the presentation pattern is displayed so that it is visible during the fade-out. This allows the waiting demo performance to end in a natural way and the variable performance to start without delay, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means being equipped with a display means for executing a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable performance in which the performance pattern is displayed, a notice performance (start effect performance, mode change performance) that makes the player expect the special game to be executed in response to the start of the variable performance can be executed, and a customer waiting performance in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state can be executed, and when the variable performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the specific image is faded out and the performance pattern is displayed so that it is visible during the fade-out, and the notice performance that restricts the visibility of the performance pattern is started after the performance pattern becomes visible. Therefore, while the player is allowed to confirm the stop result of the previous variable performance, the start of the variable performance can make the player recognize that a specific notice performance has started, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed simultaneously (in parallel), and the second special symbol is displayed preferentially. However, the gaming machine may be configured to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in the order of the winning balls entering the first start hole 45 and the second start hole 47.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the small win game is not executed because there is no small win as a result of the big win determination, but for example, in the big win determination when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, a small win may be determined with the same first probability (e.g., 1/300) regardless of the setting value, and in the big win determination when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47, a small win may be determined with the same second probability (e.g., 1/7) regardless of the setting value. In this case, a specific area may be provided inside the first variable winning section 49, and the so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine may be configured to execute the big win game when a gaming ball that entered the first large winning hole 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area.

In addition, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, the machine is to transition to a normal game state or a time-saving game state after a jackpot game, and when a jackpot game (including via a small jackpot game) is executed based on a win in the first start port 45, the machine is to transition to a normal game state or a time-saving game state at a ratio of 1:1, and when a jackpot game (including via a small jackpot game) is executed based on a win in the second start port 47, the machine is to transition to a time-saving game state with a 100% probability. In this case, when the machine transitions to a time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game based on a win in the first start port 45, the number of time-saving times is set to 1, and when the machine transitions to a time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game based on a win in the second start port 47, the number of time-saving times is set to 5 and 10 at a ratio of 1:1.

In addition, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, if a small win is determined in the look-ahead judgment (pre-judgment) during the normal gaming state, the rainbow icon, which confirms the execution of a big win game, may not be determined as the final icon display mode in the icon change presentation, and if a small win is determined in the look-ahead judgment (pre-judgment) during the time-saving gaming state, the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode in the icon change presentation.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) that can award a player a predetermined amount of prize medals (prize medal data) when a winning symbol is displayed stopped on an active line by playing with medals (gaming media) (satisfying the awarding conditions). Furthermore, it can also be used in a Jankyu gaming machine or an Arrange Ball gaming machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 Regular map gate 45 First start gate 47 Second start gate 50 First big prize gate 56 Second big prize gate 70 Main display device 71 Sub display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means for supplying power, and a movable body capable of moving between a standby position and a specific position,
The main control means
A determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be executed;
A variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment,
The variable display means is
The special symbol is displayed in a cyclic manner several times, and then the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state;
The movable body is
the robot is capable of moving from a stopped state at the standby position toward the specific position, and when the robot moves to the specific position, the robot is capable of stopping at the specific position;
The performance control means includes:
A variable performance is possible in which a performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the performance pattern is displayed in a stopped state in response to the stopped display of the special pattern;
While the variable display is being executed, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the specific position without stopping, and then the movable body is moved from the specific position to the standby position.
When the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and then the power supply is resumed, an initial operation by the movable body can be performed during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply is resumed;
In the performance operation of the movable body, a moving path along which the movable body moves from the standby position to the specific position is the same as a moving path along which the movable body moves from the standby position to the specific position in the initial operation of the movable body,
In the performance operation of the movable body, the number of cycles of the movement of the movable body from the standby position to the specific position can be made different from the number of cycles of the movement of the movable body from the standby position to the specific position in the initial operation of the movable body,
After the first cycle of fluctuation in the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the performance symbol in the variable performance is started,
The performance pattern is stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing after the end of the last cycle of the special pattern variation display and before the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed,
When the execution of the special game is started in a state where the performance pattern is not stopped and displayed at the predetermined timing,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a display corresponding to the special game without going through a period during which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed.